Product Detail Manual AT
User Manual: at
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 502
Download | ![]() |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
C TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE A SECTION AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION B AT D CONTENTS RL4R01A PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 5 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 5 Precautions .............................................................. 5 Service Notice or Precautions .................................. 6 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 6 PREPARATION ........................................................... 7 Special Service Tools ............................................... 7 OVERALL SYSTEM ................................................... 9 Circuit Diagram ........................................................ 9 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 10 Cross-sectional View .............................................. 13 Hydraulic Control Circuits ....................................... 14 Shift Mechanism ..................................................... 15 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION ... 26 A/T Fluid Check ...................................................... 26 Stall Test ................................................................. 26 Line Pressure Test ................................................. 29 Road Test ............................................................... 31 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION .......................................................................... 33 Symptom Chart ...................................................... 33 DTC P1775 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID ............................................................... 41 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................. 41 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES .......................................... 44 Component Inspection ........................................... 44 Electrical Component Inspection ............................ 50 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ...................................... 51 Description ............................................................. 51 Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location ........... 51 Removal and Installation ........................................ 51 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 53 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................. 54 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE ........................................... 58 Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators ............ 58 Rear Oil Seal Replacement .................................... 59 Parking Components Inspection ............................ 59 Governor Valve ....................................................... 59 Throttle Wire Adjustment ........................................ 60 Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment ... 60 Control Cable Adjustment ....................................... 61 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............................. 62 Removal ................................................................. 62 Installation .............................................................. 64 OVERHAUL .............................................................. 66 Components ........................................................... 66 Oil Channel ............................................................. 68 Locations of Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings ............................................................. 69 Disassembly ........................................................... 70 OIL PUMP ................................................................. 83 Components ........................................................... 83 Disassembly ........................................................... 83 Inspection ............................................................... 85 Assembly ................................................................ 86 CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY ................................ 88 Components ........................................................... 88 Disassembly ........................................................... 89 Inspection ............................................................... 90 Assembly ................................................................ 91 CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY ............................ 94 Components ........................................................... 94 Disassembly ........................................................... 95 Inspection ............................................................... 96 Assembly ................................................................ 97 CONTROL VALVE LOWER BODY ........................... 99 Components ........................................................... 99 Disassembly ......................................................... 100 Inspection ............................................................. 100 Assembly .............................................................. 100 GOVERNOR VALVE ASSEMBLY .......................... 101 Components ......................................................... 101 Inspection ............................................................. 101 PARKING GEAR ..................................................... 102 Inspection ............................................................. 102 REVERSE CLUTCH ................................................ 103 Components ......................................................... 103 AT-1 E F G H I J K L M Disassembly ......................................................... 103 Inspection ............................................................. 104 Assembly .............................................................. 105 HIGH CLUTCH ........................................................ 108 Components ......................................................... 108 Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 108 FORWARD AND OVERRUN CLUTCHES .............. 110 Components ......................................................... 110 Disassembly and Assembly ...................................111 LOW & REVERSE BRAKE ..................................... 115 Components ......................................................... 115 Disassembly ......................................................... 115 Inspection ............................................................. 116 Assembly .............................................................. 117 FORWARD CLUTCH DRUM ASSEMBLY .............. 119 Components ......................................................... 119 Disassembly ......................................................... 119 Inspection ............................................................. 119 Assembly .............................................................. 120 REAR INTERNAL GEAR AND FORWARD CLUTCH HUB ......................................................................... 121 Components ......................................................... 121 Disassembly ......................................................... 121 Inspection ............................................................. 122 Assembly .............................................................. 122 BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY ...................... 124 Components ......................................................... 124 Disassembly ......................................................... 124 Inspection ............................................................. 125 Assembly .............................................................. 126 PARKING PAWL COMPONENTS ........................... 129 Components ......................................................... 129 Disassembly ......................................................... 129 Inspection ............................................................. 130 Assembly .............................................................. 130 ASSEMBLY ............................................................. 132 Assembly (1) ......................................................... 132 Adjustment ............................................................ 140 Assembly (2) ......................................................... 143 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 150 General Specifications .......................................... 150 Shift Schedule ...................................................... 150 Stall Revolution ..................................................... 150 Line Pressure ....................................................... 150 Governor Pressure ............................................... 150 Return Springs ...................................................... 151 Accumulator O-ring ............................................... 152 Clutch and Brakes ................................................ 152 Oil Pump and Low One-way Clutch ...................... 154 Total End Play ....................................................... 154 Parking Gear ........................................................ 154 Reverse Clutch Drum End Play ............................ 154 Removal and Installation ...................................... 154 RE4R01A TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX .......................... 156 Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC ..................... 156 PRECAUTIONS ....................................................... 158 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ............................................................... 158 Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of A/T and Engine ................................................. 158 Precautions ........................................................... 159 Service Notice or Precautions ............................... 160 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ............... 161 PREPARATION ....................................................... 162 Special Service Tools ............................................ 162 OVERALL SYSTEM ................................................ 164 A/T Electrical Parts Location ................................. 164 Circuit Diagram ..................................................... 165 Cross-sectional View ............................................ 166 Hydraulic Control Circuit ....................................... 167 Shift Mechanism ................................................... 168 Control System ..................................................... 177 Control Mechanism ............................................... 178 Control Valve ......................................................... 183 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................................................................ 185 Introduction ........................................................... 185 OBD-II Function for A/T System ........................... 185 One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II ........... 185 OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ................ 185 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ......................... 189 CONSULT-II .......................................................... 189 Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II ......... 198 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION ......... 204 Introduction ........................................................... 204 Work Flow ............................................................. 208 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION ... 211 A/T Fluid Check .................................................... 211 Stall Test ................................................................ 211 Line Pressure Test ................................................ 214 Road Test .............................................................. 216 Symptom Chart ..................................................... 230 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION ........................................................................ 242 TCM Terminals and Reference Value ................... 242 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY .... 246 Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN ............................. 246 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 247 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH ................................................................... 249 Description ............................................................ 249 Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW ....................... 251 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 252 Component Inspection .......................................... 254 DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT .................................................................. 255 Description ............................................................ 255 Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS ............................... 257 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 258 Component Inspection .......................................... 260 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) ............................................... 261 Description ............................................................ 261 AT-2 Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T ........................ 263 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 264 Component Inspection ......................................... 265 DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL ................... 266 Description ........................................................... 266 Wiring Diagram — AT — ENGSS ........................ 267 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 268 DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION ............................................................... 270 Description ........................................................... 270 Wiring Diagram — AT — 1ST .............................. 273 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 274 Component Inspection ......................................... 275 DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION ............................................................... 276 Description ........................................................... 276 Wiring Diagram — AT — 2ND .............................. 278 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 279 Component Inspection ......................................... 279 DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION ............................................................... 281 Description ........................................................... 281 Wiring Diagram — AT — 3RD .............................. 283 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 284 Component Inspection ......................................... 285 DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION ............................................................... 286 Description ........................................................... 286 Wiring Diagram — AT — 4TH .............................. 289 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 290 Component Inspection ......................................... 292 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE ................................................. 293 Description ........................................................... 293 Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV .............................. 295 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 296 Component Inspection ......................................... 297 DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION . 298 Description ........................................................... 298 Wiring Diagram — AT — TCCSIG ....................... 301 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 302 Component Inspection ......................................... 304 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE. 306 Description ........................................................... 306 Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV ............................ 308 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 309 Component Inspection ......................................... 310 DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A ...............311 Description ............................................................311 Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A .......................... 313 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 314 Component Inspection ......................................... 315 DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B .............. 316 Description ........................................................... 316 Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B .......................... 318 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 319 Component Inspection ......................................... 320 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR ....... 321 Description ........................................................... 321 Wiring Diagram — AT — TPS .............................. 324 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 325 Component Inspection .......................................... 328 DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE ..................................................................... 329 Description ............................................................ 329 Wiring Diagram — AT — OVRCSV ...................... 331 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 332 Component Inspection .......................................... 333 DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE). 334 Description ............................................................ 334 Wiring Diagram — AT — BA/FTS ......................... 336 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 337 Component Inspection .......................................... 339 DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR .................. 340 Description ............................................................ 340 Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSMTR ...................... 342 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 343 DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR (VG33ER ONLY) ...................................................................... 344 Description ............................................................ 344 Wiring Diagram — AT — TRSA/T ........................ 346 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 347 Component Inspection .......................................... 348 DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM) ...................................................................... 349 Description ............................................................ 349 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 350 DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM) ......................... 351 Description ............................................................ 351 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 352 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS .......... 353 Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC ...................... 353 1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On . 356 2. Engine Cannot Be Started In P and N Position. 358 3. In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or Backward When Pushed .............................................. 359 4. In N Position, Vehicle Moves ............................ 360 5. Large Shock. N → R Position ........................... 362 6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position. 364 7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 Or 1 Position ........................................................................ 367 8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ................. 369 9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2 ..................................................... 372 10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 .......................... 374 11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 .......................... 376 12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up ...................... 378 13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition ............ 379 14. Lock-up Is Not Released ................................ 381 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 ) ................................................ 382 16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1 ..................... 383 17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D3 , When Overdrive Control Switch ON → OFF ................................... 385 18. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → 22 , When Selector Lever D → 2 Position ............................................ 386 19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11 , When Selector AT-3 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M Lever 2 → 1 Position ............................................ 387 20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake. 387 21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches Circuit Checks) ..................................................... 387 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ..................................... 395 Description ............................................................ 395 Wiring Diagram — SHIFT — ................................ 396 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 397 Component Check ................................................ 399 KEY INTERLOCK CABLE ...................................... 400 Components ......................................................... 400 Removal ............................................................... 400 Installation ............................................................. 401 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE .......................................... 402 Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators .......... 402 Revolution Sensor Replacement .......................... 403 Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement (VG33ER only) ...................................................................... 404 Rear Oil Seal Replacement .................................. 404 Parking Components Inspection ........................... 405 Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment ... 405 Manual Control Linkage Adjustment ..................... 406 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ........................... 407 Removal ............................................................... 407 Installation ............................................................. 408 OVERHAUL ............................................................. 410 Components ......................................................... 410 Oil Channel ........................................................... 412 Locations of Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings ........................................................... 413 Disassembly ......................................................... 414 OIL PUMP ............................................................... 426 Components ......................................................... 426 Disassembly ......................................................... 426 Inspection ............................................................. 428 Assembly .............................................................. 428 CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY .............................. 431 Components ......................................................... 431 Disassembly ......................................................... 432 Inspection ............................................................. 433 Assembly .............................................................. 435 CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY .......................... 438 Components ......................................................... 438 Disassembly ......................................................... 439 Inspection ............................................................. 440 Assembly .............................................................. 441 CONTROL VALVE LOWER BODY ......................... 443 Components ......................................................... 443 Disassembly ......................................................... 444 Inspection ............................................................. 444 Assembly .............................................................. 444 REVERSE CLUTCH ................................................ 445 Components ......................................................... 445 Disassembly ......................................................... 445 Inspection .............................................................. 446 Assembly .............................................................. 447 HIGH CLUTCH ........................................................ 450 Components .......................................................... 450 Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 450 FORWARD AND OVERRUN CLUTCHES .............. 453 Components .......................................................... 453 Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 454 LOW & REVERSE BRAKE ..................................... 458 Components .......................................................... 458 Disassembly .......................................................... 458 Inspection .............................................................. 459 Assembly .............................................................. 460 FORWARD CLUTCH DRUM ASSEMBLY .............. 463 Components .......................................................... 463 Disassembly .......................................................... 463 Inspection .............................................................. 464 Assembly .............................................................. 464 REAR INTERNAL GEAR AND FORWARD CLUTCH HUB ......................................................................... 466 Components .......................................................... 466 Disassembly .......................................................... 466 Inspection .............................................................. 468 Assembly .............................................................. 468 BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY ...................... 470 Components .......................................................... 470 Disassembly .......................................................... 470 Inspection .............................................................. 472 Assembly .............................................................. 472 PARKING PAWL COMPONENTS ........................... 475 Components .......................................................... 475 Disassembly .......................................................... 475 Assembly .............................................................. 477 ASSEMBLY ............................................................. 478 Assembly (1) ......................................................... 478 Adjustment ............................................................ 486 Assembly (2) ......................................................... 489 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 496 General Specifications .......................................... 496 Shift Schedule ....................................................... 496 Stall Revolution ..................................................... 496 Line Pressure ........................................................ 497 Return Springs ...................................................... 497 Accumulator O-ring ............................................... 498 Clutches and Brakes ............................................. 498 Oil Pump and Low One-way Clutch ...................... 500 Total End Play ....................................................... 501 Reverse Clutch Drum End Play ............................ 501 Removal and Installation ....................................... 501 Shift Solenoid Valves ............................................ 501 Solenoid Valves .................................................... 501 A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor .............................. 501 Turbine Revolution Sensor .................................... 502 Revolution Sensor ................................................. 502 Dropping Resistor ................................................. 502 AT-4 PRECAUTIONS [RL4R01A] PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A ECS007IH The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along B with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system may include seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. If equipped with dual stage front air bag modules, the SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the AT front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. D The vehicle may be equipped with a passenger air bag deactivation switch. Because no rear seat exists where a rear-facing child restraint can be placed, the switch is designed to turn off the passenger air bag so that a rear-facing child restraint can be used in the front passenger seat. The switch is located in the center of the E instrument panel, near the ashtray. When the switch is turned to the ON position, the passenger air bag is enabled and could inflate for certain types of collision. When the switch is turned to the OFF position, the passenger air bag is disabled and will not inflate. A passenger air bag OFF indicator on the instrument panel lights up when the passenger air bag is switched OFF. The driver air bag always remains enabled and is not affected F by the passenger air bag deactivation switch. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. ● The vehicle may be equipped with a passenger air bag deactivation switch which can be operated by the customer. When the passenger air bag is switched OFF, the passenger air bag is disabled and will not inflate. When the passenger air bag is switched ON, the passenger air bag is enabled and could inflate for certain types of collision. After SRS maintenance or repair, make sure the passenger air bag deactivation switch is in the same position (ON or OFF) as when the vehicle arrived for service. G Precautions L ECS007II Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the transmission. It is important to prevent the internal parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter. 2. Disassembly should be done in a clean work area. 3. Use lint-free cloth or towels for wiping parts clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere with the operation of the transmission. 4. Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly. 5. All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or reassembly. 6. Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the transmission is disassembled. 7. The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced. Place removed parts in order, on a parts rack, so they can be put back in the valve body in the same positions and sequences. Care will also prevent springs and small parts from becoming scattered or lost. 8. Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along their bores in the valve body under their own weight. 9. Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings and seals, or hold small bearings and washers in place during assembly. Do not use grease. 10. Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling. H I J K 1. AT-5 M PRECAUTIONS [RL4R01A] 11. If A/T fluid contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.) or if an A/T is repaired, overhauled, or replaced, inspect and clean the A/T oil cooler mounted in the radiator or replace radiator. Flush cooler lines using cleaning solvent and compressed air after repair. Check Service Bulletins for latest A/T oil cooler cleaning procedure. For radiator replacement refer to CO-30, "RADIATOR" . 12. After overhaul, refill the transmission with new ATF. 13. When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the fluid is drained. Old A/T fluid will remain in torque converter and ATF cooling system. Always follow the procedures when changing A/T fluid. Refer to MA-38, "Changing A/T Fluid" . Service Notice or Precautions ECS007IJ TORQUE CONVERTER SERVICE The torque converter should be replaced under any of the following conditions: ● External leaks in the hub weld area. ● Converter hub is scored or damaged. ● Converter pilot is broken, damaged or fits poorly into crankshaft. ● Steel particles are found after flushing the cooler and cooler lines. ● Pump is damaged or steel particles are found in the converter. ● Vehicle has TCC shudder and/or no TCC apply. Replace only after all hydraulic and electrical diagnoses have been made (Converter clutch material may be glazed). ● Converter is contaminated with engine coolant containing antifreeze. ● Internal failure of stator roller clutch. ● Heavy clutch debris due to overheating (blue converter). ● Steel particles or clutch lining material found in fluid filter or on magnet when no internal parts in unit are worn or damaged — indicates that lining material came from converter. The torque converter should not be replaced if: ● The fluid has an odor, is discolored, and there is no evidence of metal or clutch facing particles. ● The threads in one or more of the converter bolt holes are damaged. ● Transmission failure did not display evidence of damaged or worn internal parts, steel particles or clutch plate lining material in unit and inside the fluid filter. ● Vehicle has been exposed to high mileage (only). The exception may be where the torque converter clutch dampener plate lining has seen excess wear by vehicles operated in heavy and/or constant traffic, such as taxi, delivery or police use. ATF COOLER SERVICE If A/T fluid contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.) or if an A/T is repaired, overhauled, or replaced, inspect and clean the A/T oil cooler mounted in the radiator or replace radiator. Flush cooler lines using cleaning solvent and compressed air after repair. Check Service Bulletins for latest A/T oil cooler cleaning procedure. For radiator replacement refer to CO-30, "RADIATOR" . Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● Refer to GI-13, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" . ● Refer to PG-9, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" for power distribution circuit. When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● Refer to GI-9, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" . ● Refer to GI-25, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" . AT-6 ECS007IK PREPARATION [RL4R01A] PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A ECS007IL The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Description Tool name (J-34301-C) Oil pressure gauge set 1 (J34301-1) Oil pressure gauge 2 (J-34301-2) Hose 3 (J-34298) Joint pipe 4 (J-34282-2) Adapter 5 (790-301-1230-A) 60° Adapter 6 (J-34301-15) Square socket Measuring line pressure and governor pressure B AT D E F AAT546 ST07870000 (J-37068) Transmission case stand Disassembling and assembling A/T a: 182 mm (7.17 in) b: 282 mm (11.10 in) c: 230 mm (9.06 in) d: 100 mm (3.94 in) G H NT421 KV31102100 (J-37065) Torque converter one-way clutch check tool Checking one-way clutch in torque converter I J NT098 ST25850000 (J-25721-A) Sliding hammer Removing oil pump assembly a: 179 mm (7.05 in) b: 70 mm (2.76 in) c: 40 mm (1.57 in) dia. d: M12 x 1.75P NT422 KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87) Clutch spring compressor NT423 Installing oil pump housing oil seal Installing rear oil seal a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia. b: 44.5 mm (1.752 in) dia. NT091 AT-7 L M Removing and installing clutch return springs a: 320 mm (12.60 in) b: 174 mm (6.85 in) ST33200000 (J-26082) Drift K PREPARATION [RL4R01A] Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description (J-34291) Shim setting gauge set Selecting oil pump cover bearing race and oil pump thrust washer NT101 (J-45499) Ring gear stopper Removing and Installing A/T assembly LBIA0362E AT-8 OVERALL SYSTEM [RL4R01A] OVERALL SYSTEM Circuit Diagram PFP:00000 A ECS007IM B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0086E AT-9 OVERALL SYSTEM [RL4R01A] Wiring Diagram ECS007IN WCWA0145E AT-10 OVERALL SYSTEM [RL4R01A] A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0088E AT-11 OVERALL SYSTEM [RL4R01A] WCWA0089E AT-12 OVERALL SYSTEM [RL4R01A] Cross-sectional View ECS007IO A B AT D E F G H I J K L M LCIA0279E AT-13 OVERALL SYSTEM [RL4R01A] Hydraulic Control Circuits ECS007IP WCIA0157E AT-14 OVERALL SYSTEM [RL4R01A] Shift Mechanism ECS007IQ The automatic transmission uses compact, dual planetary gear systems to improve power-transmission efficiency, simplify construction and reduce weight. It also employs an optimum shift control and superwide gear ratios to improve starting performance and acceleration during medium and high-speed operation. Two one-way clutches are also employed: one is used for the forward clutch, and the other for the low clutch. These one-way clutches, combined with four accumulators, reduce shifting shock to a minimum. A B AT CONSTRUCTION D E F G H I J K L SAT026HA M AT-15 OVERALL SYSTEM [RL4R01A] FUNCTION OF CLUTCH AND BRAKE Clutch and brake components Abbr. Function Reverse clutch 6 R/C To transmit input power to front sun gear 9 . High clutch 7 H/C To transmit input power to front planetary carrier 11 . Forward clutch 16 F/C To connect front planetary carrier 11 with forward one-way clutch 17 . Overrun clutch 18 O/C To connect front planetary carrier 11 with rear internal gear 14 . Brake band 5 B/B To lock front sun gear 9 . Forward one-way clutch 17 F/O.C When forward clutch 16 is engaged, to stop rear internal gear 14 from rotating in opposite direction. Low one-way clutch 19 L/O.C At D1 position, to prevent rear internal gear 14 from rotating in opposite direction. Low & reverse brake 20 L & R/B To lock rear internal gear 14 (2, 12 and 11 ), to lock front planetary carrier 11 (R position). CLUTCH AND BAND CHART Band servo Shift position Reverse clutch 6 High clutch 7 Forward clutch 16 Overrun clutch 18 2nd apply 3rd releas e 4th apply Forward oneway clutch 17 Low oneway clutch 19 Low & revers e brake 20 Lock-up Remarks P PARK POSITION R REVERS E POSITION N NEUTRAL POSITION 1st D B 2nd *1A B 3rd A B D *4 4th 1st C *2C C *3C C D B B 2 2nd B 1st B 2nd B 1 B Automatic shift 1 ←→ 2 ←→ 3 ←→ 4 Automatic shift 1 ←→ 2 Locks (held stationary) in 1st speed 1←2 *1 : Operates when overdrive control switch is set in OFF position. *2 : Oil pressure is applied to both 2nd “apply” side and 3rd “release” side of band servo piston. However, brake band does not contract because oil pressure area on the “release” side is greater than that on the “apply” side. *3 : Oil pressure is applied to 4th “apply” side in condition *2 above, and brake band contracts. *4 : A/T will not shift to 4th when overdrive control switch is set to OFF position. : Operates. A: Operates when throttle opening is less than 3/16, activating engine brake. B: Operates during “progressive” acceleration. C: Operates but does not affect power-transmission. D: Operates when throttle opening is less than 3/16, but does not affect engine brake. AT-16 OVERALL SYSTEM [RL4R01A] POWER TRANSMISSION “N” and “P” Positions ● ● A “N” position No control members operate. Power from the input shaft is not transmitted to the output shaft because the B clutches do not operate. “P” position Similar to the “N” position, no control members operate. The parking pawl interconnected with the select lever engages with the parking gear to mechanically hold the output shaft so that the powertrain is locked. AT D E F G H I J K SAT039J L M AT-17 OVERALL SYSTEM [RL4R01A] “11 ” Position SAT100J ● Forward clutch ● Forward one-way clutch ● Overrun clutch ● Low and reverse brake Engine brake As overrun clutch engages, rear internal gear is locked by the operation of low and reverse brake. This is different from that of D1 and 21 . Overrun clutch always engages, therefore engine brake can be obtained when decelerating. AT-18 OVERALL SYSTEM [RL4R01A] “D1 ” and “21 ” Positions A B AT D E F G H I J K L M SAT096J ● Forward one-way clutch ● Forward clutch ● Low one-way clutch Overrun clutch engagement conditions (Engine brake) Rear internal gear is locked to rotate counterclockwise because of the functioning of these three clutches (Start-up at D1 ). D1 : Overdrive control switch “OFF” and throttle opening is less than 3/16 21 : Throttle opening less than 3/16 At D1 and 21 positions, engine brake is not activated due to free turning of low oneway clutch. AT-19 OVERALL SYSTEM [RL4R01A] “D2 ”, “22 ” and “12 ” Positions SAT097J ● Forward clutch ● Forward one-way clutch ● Brake band Overrun clutch engagement conditions Rear sun gear drives rear planetary carrier and combined front internal gear. Front internal gear now rotates around front sun gear accompanying front planetary carrier. As front planetary carrier transfers the power to rear internal gear through forward clutch and forward one-way clutch, this rotation of rear internal gear increases the speed of rear planetary carrier compared with that of the 1st speed. D2 : Overdrive control switch “OFF” and throttle opening is less than 3/16 22 : Throttle opening less than 3/16 12 : Always engaged AT-20 OVERALL SYSTEM [RL4R01A] “D3 ” Position A B AT D E F G H I J K L M SAT098J ● High clutch ● Forward clutch ● Forward one-way clutch Overrun clutch engagement conditions Input power is transmitted to front planetary carrier through high clutch. And front planetary carrier is connected to rear internal gear by operation of forward clutch and forward one-way clutch. This rear internal gear rotation and another input (the rear sun gear) accompany rear planetary carrier to turn at the same speed. D3 : Overdrive control switch “OFF” and throttle opening is less than 3/16 Throttle opening less than 3/16 AT-21 OVERALL SYSTEM [RL4R01A] “D4 ” (O/D) Position SAT099J ● High clutch ● Brake band ● Forward clutch (Does not affect power transmission) Engine brake Input power is transmitted to front carrier through high clutch. This front carrier turns around the sun gear, which is fixed by brake band, and makes front internal gear (output) turn faster. At D4 position, there is no one-way clutch in the power transmission line and engine brake can be obtained when decelerating. AT-22 OVERALL SYSTEM [RL4R01A] “R” Position A B AT D E F G H I J K L M SAT101J ● Reverse clutch ● Low and reverse brake Engine brake Front planetary carrier is stationary because of the operation of low and reverse brake. Input power is transmitted to front sun gear through reverse clutch, which drives front internal gear in the opposite direction. As there is no one-way clutch in the power transmission line, engine brake can be obtained when decelerating. AT-23 OVERALL SYSTEM [RL4R01A] FUNCTION OF CONTROL VALVES Valve Name Function Pressure regulator valve Optimally controls oil under pressure discharged from oil pump in response to driving conditions. Throttle valve Regulates line pressure to throttle pressure corresponding with throttle opening. Detent valve Activates throttle valve via spring in response to changes in throttle opening, thereby regulating throttle pressure. Pressure modifier valve Serves as an auxiliary signal valve of pressure regulator valve to control line pressure in response to driving conditions. Accumulator control valve Regulates accumulator pressure to pressure corresponding with driving conditions. Manual valve Directs line pressure to each oil circuit selected by the selector lever position. Circuit Position 1 2 3 4 P R N D 2 1 AAT681A Hydraulic pressure drains when the shift lever is in N and P. ● 1-2 shift valve ● 2-3 shift valve ● 3-4 shift valve Provides automatic shift control in response to driving conditions, such as vehicle speed, throttle opening, etc. Shift control is accomplished by activating or deactivating the clutch, brakes, brake bands, etc. 2-3 throttle modifier valve Controls line pressure to provide optimum shifting point (2nd → 3rd) during partialopen throttle. (2-3 throttle modulator pressure) 3-2 downshift valve Delivers throttle pressure in a direction that overcomes 2-3 shift valve's governor pressure while shifting from “3rd” to “2nd” in the “D” position. Kickdown modifier valve Controls line pressure to provide optimum shifting points (1st → 2nd) and (2nd → 3rd) during kickdowns. (Kickdown modifier pressure) 4-2 relay valve Operates in conjunction with the 4-2 sequence valve to prevent downshifting from 4th to 3rd, then to 2nd while directly shifting from 4th to 2nd. 4-2 sequence valve Prevents 4th band servo “apply” pressure from draining during direct shifting from 4th to 2nd before high clutch “apply” pressure and band servo “release” pressure in the same oil circuit are drained. 3-2 timing valve Engine speed increases in a short period of time at low engine speeds when accelerator is depressed during downshifts from D3 to D2 . However, it takes longer for the engine to increase speed at high engine speeds. The 3-2 timing valve serves to delay the band servo “release” draining speed (At this point, the transmission is tentatively set in Neutral) during downshifts from D3 to D2 at speeds greater than those in the specifications, thereby providing smooth shifting. 1st reducing valve Controls low & reverse brake “apply” pressure to relief shocks caused by engine brakes while shifting from 2nd to 1st in the 1 position. AT-24 OVERALL SYSTEM [RL4R01A] Valve Name Overrun clutch reducing valve 4th speed cut valve ● Torque converter clutch control valve ● Torque converter clutch solenoid valve Torque converter relief valve Function Controls pressure that operates the overrun clutch to relief shocks caused during engine braking. Line pressure acts on the overrun clutch reducing valve in the 1st or 2nd position to increase the pressure-regulating point with resultant high engine braking capabilities. A B Determines lock-up speed while operating in 4th gear. Activates or deactivates lock-up system. AT Prevents abnormal increase of converter oil pressure. D E F G H I J K L M AT-25 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RL4R01A] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION A/T Fluid Check PFP:00000 ECS007IR FLUID LEAKAGE CHECK 1. 2. 3. 4. Clean area suspected of leaking, — for example, mating surface of converter housing and transmission case. Start engine, apply foot brake, place selector lever in D position and wait a few minutes. Stop engine. Check for fresh leakage. SAT288G FLUID CONDITION CHECK Fluid color Dark or black with burned odor Suspected problem Wear of frictional material Water contamination Milky pink ● Road water entering through filler tube or breather Oxidation Varnished fluid, light to dark brown and tacky ● Over or under filling ● Overheating SAT638A FLUID LEVEL CHECK Refer to MA-37, "Checking A/T Fluid" . Stall Test ECS007IS STALL TEST PROCEDURE 1. 2. Check A/T fluid and engine oil levels. If necessary, add fluid and oil. Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes or until fluid and oil reach operating temperature. ATF operating temperature : 50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F) SAT647B 3. 4. Set parking brake and block wheels. Install a tachometer where it can be seen by driver during test. ● It is good practice to put a mark on point of specified engine speed on indicator. SAT513G AT-26 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RL4R01A] 5. 6. 7. Start engine, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in D position. Accelerate to wide open throttle gradually while applying foot brake. ● During test, never hold throttle wide open for more than 5 seconds. Quickly note the engine stall revolution and immediately release throttle. Stall revolution standard A B AT : 2,100 - 2,300 rpm SAT514G D 8. 9. Shift selector lever to N position. Cool off ATF. ● Run engine at idle for at least one minute. 10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 with selector lever in 2, 1 and R positions. E F G SAT414F H I J K L M AT-27 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RL4R01A] JUDGEMENT OF STALL TEST LCIA0280E AT-28 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RL4R01A] Line Pressure Test ECS007IT LINE PRESSURE TEST PORTS A Location of line pressure test ports are shown in illustration. ● Line pressure plugs are hexagon-headed bolts. ● Always replace line pressure plugs as they are self-sealing bolts. B AT D SAT176G LINE PRESSURE TEST PROCEDURE 1. 2. E Check A/T fluid and engine oil levels. If necessary, add fluid and oil. Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes or until fluid and oil reach operating temperature. ATF operating temperature F : 50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F) G H SAT647B 3. Install pressure gauge to line pressure port. I J K AAT809 — D, 2 and 1 positions — — R position — L M AAT810 AT-29 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RL4R01A] 4. Set parking brake and block wheels. ● Continue to depress brake pedal fully while performing line pressure test at stall speed. SAT513G 5. Start engine and measure line pressure at idle and stall speed. ● When measuring line pressure at stall speed, follow the stall test procedure. Line pressure : Refer to AT-150, "Line Pressure" . SAT494G JUDGEMENT OF LINE PRESSURE TEST Judgement At idle Suspected parts Line pressure is low in all positions. Line pressure is low in particular position. Line pressure is high. At stall speed Line pressure is low. AT-30 ● Oil pump wear ● Control piston damage ● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking ● Spring for pressure regulator valve damaged ● Fluid pressure leakage between oil strainer and pressure regulator valve ● Clogged strainer ● Fluid pressure leakage between manual valve and particular clutch. ● For example, line pressure is: — Low in R and 1 positions, but — Normal in D and 2 positions. Therefore, fluid leakage exists at or around low & reverse brake circuit. Refer to AT-152, "Clutch and Brakes" . ● Maladjustment of throttle position sensor ● Fluid temperature sensor damaged ● Line pressure solenoid valve sticking ● Short circuit of line pressure solenoid valve circuit ● Pressure modifier valve sticking ● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking ● Maladjustment of throttle position sensor ● Control piston damaged ● Line pressure solenoid valve sticking ● Short circuit of line pressure solenoid valve circuit ● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking ● Pressure modifier valve sticking ● Pilot valve sticking TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RL4R01A] Governor Pressure Testing 1. 2. ATF operating temperature 3. A Check A/T and engine fluid levels. If necessary, add fluid. Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes or until engine oil and ATF reach operating temperature. B : 50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F) Install pressure gauge to governor pressure port. AT AAT682A 4. 5. ● Jack up front and rear wheels. Set selector lever in D position and gradually depress accelerator pedal. Be careful of rotating wheels. D E F G AAT875 ● ● Governor pressure is not generated when vehicle is stopped. Governor pressure rises gradually in response to vehicle speed. Governor pressure H I : Refer to AT-150, "Governor Pressure" . J If not, check governor valve assembly. Refer to AT-101, "GOVERNOR VALVE ASSEMBLY" . K AAT876 Road Test ECS007IU L Perform road tests using symptom chart. Refer to AT-33, "Symptom Chart" . P POSITION 1. 2. Place selector lever in P position and start the engine. Stop the engine and repeat the procedure in all positions, including N position. Stop vehicle on a slight upgrade and place selector lever in P position. Release parking brake to make sure vehicle remains locked. R POSITION 1. 2. Manually move selector lever from P or R, and note shift quality. Drive vehicle in reverse long enough to detect slippage or other abnormalities. N POSITION 1. 2. Manually move selector lever from R and D to N and note shift quality. Release parking brake with selector lever in N position. Lightly depress accelerator pedal to make sure vehicle does not move. (When vehicle is new or soon after clutches have been replaced, vehicle may move slightly. This is not a problem.) AT-31 M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RL4R01A] D POSITION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Manually shift selector lever from N to D position, and note shift quality. Using the shift schedule as a reference, drive vehicle in D position. Record, on Symptom Chart, respective vehicle speeds at which up-shifting and down-shifting occur. These speeds are to be read at three different throttle positions light, half and full. Also determine the timing at which shocks are encountered during shifting and which clutches are engaged. Determine whether lock-up properly occurs while driving vehicle in proper gear position and at proper speeds. Check to determine if shifting to overdrive gear cannot be made while overdrive control switch is OFF. Drive vehicle at 65 to 80 km/h (40 to 50 MPH) with half to light throttle position (D3 position). Fully depress accelerator pedal to make sure transmission downshifts from 3rd to 2nd gear. Drive vehicle at 35 to 45 km/h (22 to 28 MPH) with half to light throttle position (D2 position). Fully depress accelerator pedal to make sure transmission downshifts from 2nd to 1st gear. AAT164A AAT165A 2 POSITION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Shift to 2 position and make sure vehicle starts in 1st gear. Increase vehicle speed to make sure transmission upshifts from 1st to 2nd gear. Further increase vehicle speed. Make sure transmission does not upshift to 3rd gear. Drive vehicle at 35 to 45 km/h (22 to 28 MPH) with throttle at half to light position (22 position). Fully depress accelerator pedal to make sure transmission downshifts from 2nd to 1st gear. Drive vehicle at idle in 2 position to make sure that transmission downshifts to 1st gear. Move selector lever to D position and drive vehicle at 40 to 50 km/h (25 to 31 MPH). Then, move selector lever to 2 position to make sure transmission downshifts to 2nd gear. 1 POSITION 1. 2. 3. Place selector lever in 1 position and accelerate. Make sure transmission does not shift from 1st to 2nd gear although vehicle speed increases. While driving vehicle in 1 position, release accelerator pedal to make sure that engine compression acts as a brake. Place selector lever in D or 2 position and drive vehicle at 20 to 30 km/h (12 to 19 MPH). Then move selector lever to 1 position to make sure transmission downshifts to 1st gear. AT-32 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RL4R01A] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION Symptom Chart PFP:00000 A ECS007IV Numbers are arranged in order of the inspection. Perform inspections starting with number one and work up. Numbers in the OFF VEHICLE columns indicate that the transmission must be removed from the vehicle to perform the inspection. *: Valve suspected to be malfunctioning Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item ON VEHICLE Sharp shocks in shifting from N to D position When shifting from 1st to 2nd or 2nd to 3rd. OFF VEHICLE 9. Reverse clutch ON VEHICLE 1. Fluid level and fluid quality 2. Control linkage 3. Line pressure 4. Throttle wire 5. Accumulator 1-2 6. Accumulator 2-3 7. Control valve * Pressure regulator valve * Pressure modifier valve * Accumulator control valve ON VEHICLE When shifting from 3rd to 4th. Shift shocks When shifting from D to 2 and 1 position. When overdrive control switch is set from ON to OFF Shift shocks When shifting from 2nd to 1st in 1 position 1. Fluid level and fluid quality 2. Control linkage 3. Engine idling speed 4. Line pressure 5. Throttle wire 6. Accumulator N-D 7. Accumulator 3-4 (N-R) 8. Control valve * Pressure regulator valve * Pressure modifier valve * Accumulator control valve * Throttle valve & detent valve * Kickdown modifier valve 1. Fluid level and fluid quality 2. Control linkage 3. Line pressure 4. Throttle wire 5. Accumulator 3-4 (N-R) 6. Control valve * 4th speed cut valve * Pressure regulator valve * Pressure modifier valve OFF VEHICLE 7. Brake band 8. Overrun clutch ON VEHICLE 1. Fluid level and fluid quality 2. Control linkage 3. Line pressure 4. Throttle wire 5. Control valve * Pressure regulator valve * Pressure modifier valve * Throttle valve & detent valve * Overrun clutch reducing valve OFF VEHICLE 6. Brake band 7. High clutch ON VEHICLE 1. Fluid level and fluid quality 2. Control linkage 3. Line pressure 4. Throttle wire 5. Control valve * Pressure regulator valve * Pressure modifier valve * 1st reducing valve OFF VEHICLE 6. Low one-way clutch AT-33 B AT D E F G H I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RL4R01A] Symptom When shifting from 1st to 2nd Shift slippage when upshifting Condition Diagnostic Item ON VEHICLE 1. Fluid level and fluid quality 2. Control linkage 3. Line pressure 4. Throttle wire 5. Accumulator 1-2 6. Control valve * Pressure regulator valve * Pressure modifier valve * Throttle valve & detent valve * Kickdown modifier valve OFF VEHICLE 7. Brake band ON VEHICLE 1. Fluid level and fluid quality 2. Control linkage 3. Line pressure 4. Throttle wire 5. Accumulator 2-3 6. Control valve * Pressure regulator valve * Pressure modifier valve * Throttle valve & detent valve * Kickdown modifier valve OFF VEHICLE 7. Brake band 8. High clutch ON VEHICLE 1. Fluid level and fluid quality 2. Control linkage 3. Line pressure 4. Throttle wire 5. Accumulator 3-4 (N-R) 6. Control valve * Pressure regulator valve * Pressure modifier valve * Throttle valve & detent valve * Kickdown modifier valve OFF VEHICLE 7. Brake band 8. High clutch When shifting from 2nd to 3rd When shifting from 3rd to 4th AT-34 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RL4R01A] Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item ON VEHICLE 1. Fluid level and fluid quality 2. Control linkage 3. Line pressure 4. Governor pressure 5. Throttle wire 6. Accumulator N-D 7. Control valve * Pressure regulator valve * Pressure modifier valve * Throttle valve & detent valve * Kickdown modifier valve * 4-2 sequence valve 8. Accumulator 3-4 (N-R) 9. Accumulator 1-2 10. Accumulator 2-3 11. Governor valve * Primary governor valve * Secondary governor valve 1 * Secondary governor valve 2 When shifting from 4th to 2nd. Shift slippage with accelerator pedal depressed OFF VEHICLE ON VEHICLE When shifting from 4th to 3rd. OFF VEHICLE AT-35 12. Torque converter 13. Fluid pump 14. Reverse clutch 15. High clutch 16. Forward clutch 17. Forward one-way clutch 18. Overrun clutch 19. Low one-way clutch 20. Low & reverse clutch 21. Brake band 1. Fluid level and fluid quality 2. Control linkage 3. Line pressure 4. Throttle wire 5. Accumulator 1-2 6. Control valve * Pressure regulator valve * Pressure modifier valve * Throttle valve & detent valve * Kickdown modifier valve 7. Accumulator 2-3 8. Accumulator 3-4 (N-R) 9. Fluid pump 10. High clutch 11. Brake band 12. Overrun clutch 13. Low & reverse clutch A B AT D E F G H I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RL4R01A] Symptom Shift slippage with accelerator pedal depressed Condition Diagnostic Item ON VEHICLE 1. Fluid level and fluid quality 2. Control linkage 3. Line pressure 4. Governor pressure 5. Throttle wire 6. Accumulator 2-3 7. Control valve * Pressure regulator valve * Pressure modifier valve * Throttle valve & detent valve * Kickdown modifier valve * 3-2 timing valve 8. Governor valve * Primary governor valve * Secondary governor valve 1 * Secondary governor valve 2 OFF VEHICLE 9. High clutch 10. Brake band 11. Forward one-way clutch ON VEHICLE 1. Fluid level and fluid quality 2. Control linkage 3. Line pressure 4. Throttle wire 5. Accumulator 2-3 6. Control valve * Pressure regulator valve * Pressure modifier valve * Throttle valve & detent valve * Kickdown modifier valve OFF VEHICLE 7. High clutch 8. Forward clutch ON VEHICLE 1. Fluid level and fluid quality 2. Control linkage 3. Line pressure 4. Throttle wire 5. Governor pressure 6. Accumulator 2-3 7. Control valve * Pressure regulator valve * Pressure modifier valve * Throttle valve & detent valve * Kickdown modifier valve * 3-2 timing valve 8. Governor valve * Primary governor valve * Secondary governor valve 1 * Secondary governor valve 2 OFF VEHICLE 9. Forward clutch ON VEHICLE 1. Fluid level and fluid quality 2. Control linkage 3. Line pressure 4. Throttle wire 5. Accumulator 2-3 6. Control valve * Pressure regulator valve * Pressure modifier valve * Throttle valve & detent valve * Overrun clutch reducing valve OFF VEHICLE 7. Overrun clutch When shifting from 4th to 1st and shifting from 3rd to 1st. When vehicle starts. Poor power/acceleration When upshifting. No engine braking When shifting from D to 2 and 1 position. AT-36 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RL4R01A] Symptom Condition When overdrive control switch is set from ON to OFF. ON VEHICLE No engine braking When shifting from 2nd to 1st in 1 position. Too low a gear change point from 2nd to 3rd and from 3rd to 2nd. Too high a gear change point from 2nd to 3rd and from 3rd to 2nd. 1. Fluid level and fluid quality 2. Control linkage 3. Line pressure 4. Throttle wire 5. Accumulator 2-3 6. Overdrive control switch, overdrive hold control module (if equipped), overdrive cancel relay (if equipped), and wiring 7. Overdrive cancel solenoid valve 8. Control valve * Pressure regulator valve * Pressure modifier valve * Throttle valve & detent valve * Overrun clutch reducing valve OFF VEHICLE 9. Overrun clutch ON VEHICLE 1. Fluid level and fluid quality 2. Control linkage 3. Line pressure 4. Throttle wire 6. Control valve * Pressure regulator valve * Pressure modifier valve * Throttle valve & detent valve * 1st reducing valve OFF VEHICLE 7. Overrun clutch 8. Low & reverse clutch ON VEHICLE 1. Fluid level and fluid quality 2. Line pressure 3. Governor pressure 4. Throttle wire 5. Control valve * 2-3 throttle modifier valve 6. Governor valve * Primary governor valve * Secondary governor valve 1 * Secondary governor valve 2 ON VEHICLE Shift quality Too low a gear change point from 2nd to 1st in 1 position. Diagnostic Item ON VEHICLE AT-37 1. Fluid level and fluid quality 2. Line pressure 3. Governor pressure 4. Throttle wire 5. Control valve * 2-3 shift valve * 2-3 throttle modifier valve 6. Governor valve * Primary governor valve * Secondary governor valve 1 * Secondary governor valve 2 1. Fluid level and fluid quality 2. Line pressure 3. Governor pressure 4. Throttle wire 5. Control valve * Pressure regulator valve * Pressure modifier valve * Throttle valve & detent valve * 1st reducing valve 6. Governor valve * Primary governor valve * Secondary governor valve 1 * Secondary governor valve 2 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RL4R01A] Symptom Condition Too high a gear change point from 2nd to 1st in 1 position. Failure to change gear from 4th to 2nd with accelerator pedal depressed. Shift quality Failure to change gear from 3rd to 2nd with accelerator pedal depressed. Failure to change gear from 1st to 2nd in D and 2 position. Vehicle does not start from 1st in D and 2 position. Diagnostic Item ON VEHICLE 1. Fluid level and fluid quality 2. Line pressure 3. Governor pressure 4. Throttle wire 5. Control valve * 1st reducing valve 6. Governor valve * Primary governor valve * Secondary governor valve 1 * Secondary governor valve 2 ON VEHICLE 1. Fluid level and fluid quality 2. Line pressure 3. Governor pressure 4. Throttle wire 5. Control valve * 4-2 relay valve * 4-2 sequence valve 6. Governor valve * Primary governor valve * Secondary governor valve 1 * Secondary governor valve 2 ON VEHICLE 1. Fluid level and fluid quality 2. Line pressure 3. Governor pressure 4. Throttle wire 5. Control valve * 3-2 downshift valve 6. Governor valve * Primary governor valve * Secondary governor valve 1 * Secondary governor valve 2 ON VEHICLE 1. Fluid level and fluid quality 2. Line pressure 3. Governor pressure 4. Throttle wire 5. Control valve * 1-2 shift valve 6. Governor valve * Primary governor valve * Secondary governor valve 1 * Secondary governor valve 2 ON VEHICLE 1. Fluid level and fluid quality 2. Line pressure 3. Governor pressure 4. Throttle wire 5. Control valve * 1-2 shift valve 6. Governor valve * Primary governor valve * Secondary governor valve 1 * Secondary governor valve 2 AT-38 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RL4R01A] Symptom Condition Failure to change gear to 3rd to 4th in D position. Changes gear to 1st directly when selector lever is set from D to 1 position. ON VEHICLE ON VEHICLE Shift quality Changes gear to 2nd in 1 position. ON VEHICLE Too high or low a change point when lock-up operates. ON VEHICLE AT-39 Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and fluid quality 2. Line pressure 3. Governor pressure 4. Throttle wire 5. Overdrive control switch, overdrive hold control module (if equipped), overdrive cancel relay (if equipped), and wiring 6. Overdrive cancel solenoid valve 7. Control valve * 2-3 shift valve * 3-4 shift valve 8. Governor valve * Primary governor valve * Secondary governor valve 1 * Secondary governor valve 2 1. Fluid level and fluid quality 2. Line pressure 3. Governor pressure 4. Throttle wire 5. Control valve * 1st reducing valve 6. Governor valve * Primary governor valve * Secondary governor valve 1 * Secondary governor valve 2 1. Fluid level and fluid quality 2. Line pressure 3. Governor pressure 4. Throttle wire 5. Control valve * Pressure regulator valve * Pressure modifier valve * Throttle valve & detent valve * 1st reducing valve 6. Governor valve * Primary governor valve * Secondary governor valve 1 * Secondary governor valve 2 1. Fluid level and fluid quality 2. Line pressure 3. Governor pressure 4. Throttle wire 5. Control valve * Pressure regulator valve * Pressure modifier valve * Throttle valve & detent valve * Kickdown modifier valve 6. Governor valve * Primary governor valve * Secondary governor valve 1 * Secondary governor valve 2 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RL4R01A] Symptom Condition Lock-up point is extremely high or low. ON VEHICLE 1. Fluid level and fluid quality 2. Line pressure 3. Governor pressure 4. Throttle wire 5. Control valve * 4th speed cut valve * Pressure regulator valve * Pressure modifier valve * Torque converter clutch control valve * Throttle valve & detent valve 6. Governor valve * Primary governor valve * Secondary governor valve 1 * Secondary governor valve 2 ON VEHICLE 1. Fluid level and fluid quality 2. Line pressure 3. Governor pressure 4. Throttle wire 5. Control valve * 4th speed cut valve * Torque converter clutch control valve 6. Governor valve * Primary governor valve * Secondary governor valve 1 * Secondary governor valve 2 OFF VEHICLE 7. Torque converter ON VEHICLE 1. Fluid level and fluid quality 2. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve ON VEHICLE 1. Ignition switch and starter motor 2. Control linkage 3. PNP switch and wiring ON VEHICLE 1. Control linkage OFF VEHICLE 2. Parking components Lock-up quality Torque converter does not lock-up. Lock-up is not released when accelerator pedal is released. Engine does not start in P and N positions, or engine starts in positions other than P and N positions. Vehicle moves with selector lever in P position. Diagnostic Item AT-40 DTC P1775 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID [RL4R01A] DTC P1775 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID Diagnostic Procedure PFP:31940 A ECS007IW When the malfunction indicator lamp indicates DTC P1775, refer to EC-524, "DTC P1775 TCC SOLENOID VALVE" . B AT D AAT127A E 1. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector and torque converter clutch solenoid valve harness connector. Check resistance between solenoid valve unit harness connector E36 terminal 3 and ECM harness connector F29 terminal 115. Resistance F G : Approximately 0Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace harness between ECM and torque converter clutch solenoid valve. H I J AAT128A 2. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT K 1. 2. L Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between solenoid valve unit harness connector E36 terminal 1 and ground. Voltage : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. M AAT129A AT-41 DTC P1775 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID [RL4R01A] 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● Ignition switch and fuse Refer to PG-9, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" . ● Harness continuity between fuse and torque converter clutch solenoid valve. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4. CHECK TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE (RESISTANCE) Check resistance between solenoid valve unit connector E36 terminals 1 and 3. Resistance : Approximately 25Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace torque converter clutch solenoid valve. AAT130A 5. CHECK TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE (OPERATION) 1. Remove torque converter clutch solenoid valve. Refer to AT-62, "Removal" . 2. Check torque converter clutch solenoid valve operation. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace torque converter clutch solenoid valve. AAT131A AT-42 DTC P1775 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID [RL4R01A] 6. CHECK CONTROL VALVE A 1. 2. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-88, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" . Check torque converter clutch control valve. – Valve, and sleeve slide along valve bore under their own weight. – Valve, and sleeve are free from burrs, dents and scratches. – Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue. – Hydraulic line is free from obstacles. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair control valve. B AT D E F SAT740H 7. CHECK MALFUNCTION G Is malfunction eliminated? Yes or No Yes >> INSPECTION END. No >> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly. H I J K L M AT-43 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES [RL4R01A] TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Component Inspection PFP:00004 ECS007IX OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH AND OVERDRIVE CANCEL SOLENOID VALVE WCIA0158E 1. CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine). Press and release overdrive control switch. Resistance : Approximately 25Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK OVERDRIVE CANCEL RELAY Refer to AT-50, "OVERDRIVE CANCEL RELAY" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace overdrive cancel relay. 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● O/D OFF indicator lamp Refer to DI-25, "WARNING LAMPS" . ● Ignition switch and fuse for overdrive hold control module and overdrive cancel solenoid Refer to PG-9, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT-44 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES [RL4R01A] 4. CHECK OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH A Check continuity between overdrive control switch terminals 1 and 2. B AT D LAT500 E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace overdrive control switch. F 5. CHECK OVERDRIVE CANCEL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT Check resistance between overdrive cancel solenoid valve terminals 1 and 2. Resistance G : Approximately 25Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace overdrive cancel solenoid valve. H I J AAT132A 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM K Check the following items: 1. Harness continuity between fuse and overdrive cancel solenoid valve 2. Harness continuity between fuse and overdrive hold control module 3. Harness continuity between overdrive cancel solenoid valve and overdrive cancel relay 4. Condition of diode 5. Harness continuity between overdrive hold control module and overdrive cancel relay 6. Harness continuity between overdrive hold control module and overdrive control switch 7. Harness continuity between overdrive hold control module and ground OK or NG OK >> Replace overdrive hold control module. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT-45 L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSES [RL4R01A] PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH AAT133A 1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT STEP 1 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine). Check voltage between ECM harness connector F29 terminal 22 and ground while moving selector lever through each position. P, N position R, D, 2, 1 position : 0V : Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> GO TO 2. AAT148A AT-46 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES [RL4R01A] 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR PNP SWITCH A 1. 2. Disconnect PNP switch harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine). Do approximately 12 volts exist between PNP switch harness connector E35 terminal 1 and body ground? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> Check 10A fuse (No. 11, located in the fuse block), harness and connector. Refer to PG-9, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" . B AT D E AAT519A 3. CHECK PNP SWITCH ● ● F Check continuity in N and P positions. With manual lever held in each position, turn manual shaft 1.5° in both directions (When manual lever is in each position, continuity normally exists within 1.5° range). If continuity does not exist equally in either direction, properly adjust PNP switch. Refer to AT-60, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment" . G H I J LAT394 K L M AAT520A OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace PNP switch. AT-47 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES [RL4R01A] 4. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR PNP RELAY 1. Reconnect PNP switch harness connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Disconnect PNP relay harness connector. 4. Put selector lever in P or N position. Do approximately 12 volts exist between PNP relay harness connector E27 terminal 2 and body ground? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 6. No >> GO TO 5. AAT521A 5. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT STEP 2 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect PNP switch harness connector E35. Check circuit continuity between PNP switch harness connector E35 terminal 2 and PNP relay harness connector E27 terminal 2. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair harness or connector. AAT522A 6. CHECK BODY GROUND CIRCUIT FOR PNP RELAY 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Does continuity exist between PNP relay E27 terminals (1, 6) and body ground? Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair harness or connector. AAT523A AT-48 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES [RL4R01A] 7. CHECK PNP RELAY A Check continuity between terminals 6 and 7. B AT D AAT124A E F G H MTBL0198 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace PNP relay. I 8. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT STEP 3 1. 2. J Turn ignition switch OFF. Check circuit continuity between ECM harness connector F27 terminal 22 and PNP relay harness connector E27 terminal 7. K Continuity should exist. If OK, check harness for short. OK or NG OK >> Replace ECM. NG >> Repair harness or connector. L M AAT524A AT-49 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES [RL4R01A] Electrical Component Inspection ECS007IY OVERDRIVE CANCEL RELAY Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5. Conditions Continuity 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No current supply No If NG, replace relay. SEF090M AT-50 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM [RL4R01A] A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM Description ● ● PFP:34950 A ECS007IZ The mechanical key interlock mechanism also operates as a shift lock: With the key switch turned to ON, the selector lever cannot be shifted from P (Park) to any other position B unless the brake pedal is depressed. With the key removed, the selector lever cannot be shifted from P to any other position. The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is placed in P. AT The shift lock and key interlock mechanisms are controlled by the ON-OFF operation of the shift lock solenoid and by the operation of the rotator and slider located inside the key cylinder, respectively. Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location ECS007J0 D E F G H I J K L AAT149A Removal and Installation ECS007J1 SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Remove lower instrument cover LH and knee protector. Remove steering column covers. Disconnect A/T device connector. Remove two screws and two nuts attaching steering column. Disconnect shift lock rod. Remove shift control cable. Remove two bolts attaching shift control tube and remove shift control tube. Remove two screws from shift lock solenoid and two screws from park position switch. AT-51 M A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM [RL4R01A] SHIFT LOCK ROD AAT683A Removal 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition key to ACC position. Unlock slider by squeezing lock tabs. Remove shift lock rod from key interlock rod. Installation and Adjustment 1. Place selector lever in P (Park) position. 2. Turn ignition key to ACC position. 3. Insert shift lock rod into slider. 4. Grab key interlock rod and push toward shift lock rod to adjust. Do not hold shift lock rod. 5. Lock slider into position. 6. Test shift lock operation. AAT163A AT-52 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM [RL4R01A] Wiring Diagram ECS007J2 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0113E AT-53 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM [RL4R01A] Diagnostic Procedure ECS007J3 SYMPTOM 1: ● Selector lever cannot be moved from P position with key in ON position and brake pedal applied. ● Selector lever can be moved from P position with key in ON position and brake pedal released. ● Selector lever can be moved from P position when key is removed from key cylinder. SYMPTOM 2: ● Ignition key cannot be removed when selector lever is set to P position. ● Ignition key can be removed when selector lever is set to any position except P. 1. CHECK SHIFT LOCK ROD Check shift lock rod for damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair shift lock rod. Refer to AT-52, "SHIFT LOCK ROD" . 2. CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION Check selector lever position indicator and selector lever for damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check selector lever. Refer to AT-60, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment" and AT61, "Control Cable Adjustment" . 3. CHECK POWER SOURCE 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) Check voltage between A/T shift lock switch (ASCD brake switch) harness connector M48 terminal 1 and ground. Voltage : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. AAT140A 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: 7.5A fuse (No. 5, located in the fuse block) ● Harness for short or open between fuse and A/T shift lock switch (ASCD brake switch) harness connector terminal 1 ● Ignition switch. Refer to PG-14, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● AT-54 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM [RL4R01A] 5. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL [A/T SHIFT LOCK SWITCH (ASCD BRAKE SWITCH)] 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) Check voltage between A/T device harness connector M35, terminal 2 (B/W) and ground. B AT D E WAT524 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. F 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM G Check the following items: ● Harness for short or open between A/T device harness connector M35 terminal 2 and A/T shift lock switch (ASCD brake switch) harness connector terminal 2 ● A/T shift lock switch (ASCD brake switch) Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2 H I J K AAT145A L M MTBL0208 Check A/T shift lock switch (ASCD brake switch) after adjusting brake pedal. Refer to BR-7, "BRAKE PEDAL AND BRACKET" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT-55 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM [RL4R01A] 7. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/T device harness connector. Check continuity between A/T device harness connector M35 terminal 1 and ground. Continuity should exist. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair harness or connector. AAT142A 8. CHECK PARK POSITION SWITCH ● Check continuity between A/T device harness connector M35 terminal 1 (B) and park position switch harness connector S1 terminal 2 (L). WAT333 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace park position switch. 9. CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID ● Check operation by applying battery voltage to A/T device connector M35 terminal 2 (B/W) and shift lock solenoid harness connector S1 terminal 2 (B). WAT334 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace shift lock solenoid. AT-56 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM [RL4R01A] 10. CHECK SHIFT LOCK OPERATION A 1. Reconnect A/T device harness connector. 2. Turn ignition switch from OFF to ON position. (Do not start engine.) 3. Recheck shift lock operation. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> 1. Perform A/T device input/output signal inspection test. 2. If NG, recheck harness connector connection. B AT D E F G H I J K L M AT-57 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE [RL4R01A] ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators PFP:00000 ECS007J4 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Drain ATF from drain plug. Remove oil pan and gasket. Remove oil strainer. Disconnect harness connector. SAT103C 5. Remove control valve assembly by removing fixing bolts. SAT714C Bolt length and location Bolt symbol mm (in) A 33 (1.30) B 45 (1.77) Be careful not to drop manual valve out of valve body. Remove solenoids and valves from valve body if necessary. Remove terminal cord assembly if necessary. ● 6. 7. AT-58 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE [RL4R01A] 8. 9. Remove accumulators A , B , C and D by applying compressed air if necessary. ● Hold each piston with a rag. Reinstall any part removed. ● Always use new sealing parts. ● Always replace oil pan bolts as they are self-sealing bolts. ● After installing control valve assembly, make sure that selector lever can be moved to all positions. A B AT SAT074BA D Rear Oil Seal Replacement 1. 2. 3. 4. ECS007J5 Remove propeller shaft from vehicle. Refer to PR-8, "Removal and Installation" . Remove rear oil seal. Install rear oil seal. ● Apply ATF before installing. Reinstall any part removed. E F G SAT614G Parking Components Inspection 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. ECS007J6 Remove propeller shaft from vehicle. Refer to PR-8, "Removal and Installation" . Support A/T assembly with a jack. Remove rear engine mounting member. Remove rear extension from transmission case. Replace parking components if necessary. Reinstall any part removed. ● Always use new sealing parts. H I J K SAT107C Governor Valve 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. ECS007J7 Remove propeller shaft from vehicle. Refer to PR-8, "Removal and Installation" . Support A/T assembly with a jack. Remove rear engine mounting member from A/T assembly. Remove rear extension from transmission case. Remove governor valve assembly. Inspect and repair governor valve assembly. Refer to AT-101, "Inspection" . M SAT108C AT-59 L ON-VEHICLE SERVICE [RL4R01A] Throttle Wire Adjustment 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. While pressing lock plate, move adjusting tube in Direction T. Release lock plate. (Adjusting tube is locked at this time.) Move throttle drum from P2 (Idling position) to P1 (Full throttle position) quickly and release. Ensure that throttle wire stroke “L” is within the specified range, between full throttle and idle. Throttle wire stroke “L” ● ● ECS007J8 : 39 - 43 mm (1.54 - 1.69 in) Adjust throttle wire stroke after accelerator wire is installed and adjusted. When connecting throttle wire to throttle drum, do not use tools. Manually hook wire. SAT551D Put mark on throttle wire for measuring wire stroke. If throttle wire stroke is improperly adjusted, the following problems may arise. ● When the throttle drum fully-open position P1 is too far toward Direction T, the shift schedule will be as shown by 2 in the figure, and the kickdown range will greatly increase. ● When the throttle drum fully-open position P1 is too far toward Direction U, the shift schedule will be as shown by 1 in the figure, and kickdown will not occur. ● SAT411 Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Remove control linkage and manual lever from manual shaft. Set manual shaft in N position. Loosen PNP switch fixing bolts. Insert pin into adjustment holes in both PNP switch and manual as near vertical as possible. Tighten PNP switch fixing bolts. Remove pin. Reinstall any part removed. Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-61, "Control Cable Adjustment" . Check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to AT-46, "PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH" . AT-60 ECS007J9 SAT081B ON-VEHICLE SERVICE [RL4R01A] Control Cable Adjustment ECS007JA A B AT D E F LCIA0294E Move the selector lever from the P position to 1 position. You should be able to feel the detents in each position. If the detents cannot be felt, the linkage needs adjustment. 1. Place selector lever in P position. 2. Loosen control cable lock nut and place manual shaft in P position. 3. Push control cable in the direction of the arrow shown in the illustration by specified force. Specified force 4. 5. 6. 7. ● ● : 19.6 N (2.0 kg, 4.4 lb) Return control cable in the opposite direction of the arrow for 1.0 mm (0.039 in). Tighten control cable lock nut. Move selector lever from P to 1 position again. Make sure that selector lever moves smoothly. Apply grease to contacting areas of selector lever and control cable. Install any part removed. Make sure that the starter operates when the selector lever is placed in the N or P position. Make sure that the transmission is locked properly when the selector lever is placed in the P position. G H I J K L M AT-61 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION [RL4R01A] REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal PFP:00000 ECS007JB AAT151A AT-62 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION [RL4R01A] CAUTION: Before separating the A/T assembly from engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor (OBD) A from the assembly. Be careful not to damage sensor edge. NOTE: To prevent oil spills, drain the A/T fluid before removing A/T assembly, Refer to MA-38, "Changing A/T B Fluid" or insert plug into rear oil seal after removing propeller shaft. 1. Disconnect battery negative terminal. 2. Remove fluid charging pipe from A/T assembly and plug opening. AT 3. Remove oil cooler pipe from A/T assembly and plug opening. 4. Remove A/T vent hose. D 5. Remove propeller shaft. Refer to PR-8, "Removal and Installation" . ● Be careful not to damage spline, sleeve yoke and rear oil seal. E 6. Remove A/T control cable from manual shaft. 7. Disconnect A/T harness connectors and vehicle speed sensor harness connector. 8. Disconnect throttle wire from A/T assembly. F 9. Remove the starter motor. Refer to SC-25, "Removal and Installation" . 10. Remove the rear plate 11. Remove bolts securing torque converter to drive plate. G ● Rotate crankshaft to gain access to securing bolts. H I SAT800C ● J If necessary, install tool to keep crankshaft from rotating Tool number : — J-45499 K L M LBIA0364E 12. Support A/T assembly with a jack. 13. Remove rear mounting bracket from body and A/T assembly. Refer to EM-47, "REMOVAL" . 14. Remove bolts securing A/T assembly to engine. 15. Pull A/T assembly backwards. ● Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping. ● Secure A/T assembly to a jack. SAT802C AT-63 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION [RL4R01A] 16. Slant and lower A/T assembly. SAT803C Installation 1. ECS007JC Check drive plate runout. CAUTION: Do not allow any magnetic materials to contact the ring gear teeth. Maximum allowable runout : Refer to EM-58, "FLYWHEEL/DRIVE PLATE RUNOUT" . If this runout is out of specification, replace drive plate with ring gear. SAT977H 2. When connecting torque converter to transmission, measure distance “A” to be certain that they are correctly assembled. Distance “A” : 26.0 mm (1.024 in) or more SAT017B 3. Install converter to drive plate. ● Rotate crankshaft to gain access to securing bolts. ● If necessary, install tool to keep crankshaft from rotating. Tool number ● : — J-45499 With converter installed, rotate crankshaft several turns to check that transmission rotates freely without binding. SAT006G AT-64 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION [RL4R01A] 4. Install the rear plate. Rear plate bolts 10 mm 14 mm A 3-4 Nm (0.3-0.4 kg-m, 3235 in-lb) 16-22 Nm (1.6 2.2kg-m, 1216 ft-lb) B AT LBIA0363E D 5. 6. Tighten bolts securing transmission. Bolt No. Tightening torque N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) 1 39 - 49 (4.0 - 5.0, 29 - 36) 43 (1.69) 2 3 - 4 (0.3 - 0.4, 2.2 - 2.9) 16 (0.63) 3 16 - 22 (1.6 - 2.2, 12 - 16) 16 (0.63) Bolt length “ mm (in) ” E F Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. G AAT153A Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-61, "Control Cable Adjustment" . 8. Adjust throttle wire. Refer to AT-60, "Throttle Wire Adjustment" . 9. Adjust PNP switch. Refer to AT-60, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment" . 10. Refill transmission with ATF and check fluid level. 11. Move selector lever through all positions to be sure that transmission operates correctly. With parking brake applied, allow engine to idle. Move selector lever through N to D, to 2, to 1 and to R. A slight shock should be felt through hand gripping the selector each time the transmission is shifted. 12. Perform road test. Refer to AT-31, "Road Test" . H 7. I J SAT638A K L M AT-65 OVERHAUL [RL4R01A] OVERHAUL Components PFP:00000 ECS007JD WAT516 AT-66 OVERHAUL [RL4R01A] A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCIA0159E AT-67 OVERHAUL [RL4R01A] Oil Channel ECS007JE WCIA0160E AT-68 OVERHAUL [RL4R01A] Locations of Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings ECS007JF A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WAT378 AT-69 OVERHAUL [RL4R01A] Disassembly 1. ECS007JG Removing torque converter by holding it firmly and turning while pulling straight out. SAT018B 2. a. b. c. Check torque converter one-way clutch. Insert Tool into spline of one-way clutch inner race. Hook bearing support unitized with one-way clutch outer race with suitable wire. Check that one-way clutch inner race rotates only clockwise with Tool while holding bearing support with wire. SAT019BA 3. Remove PNP switch from transmission case. AAT528A 4. a. b. c. Separate the oil pan and transmission case. Drain ATF from drain plug. Raise oil pan by placing wooden blocks under converter housing and adapter case. Remove oil pan and gasket. ● Always place oil pan straight down so that foreign particles inside will not move. ● Always replace oil pan bolts as they are self-sealing bolts. SAT186B AT-70 OVERHAUL [RL4R01A] 5. Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine cause of malfunction. If the fluid is very dark, smells burned, or contains foreign particles, the frictional material (clutches, band) may need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates varnish buildup. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to stick and may inhibit pump pressure. ● If frictional material is detected, replace radiator after repair of A/T. Refer to CO-14, "RADIATOR" . A B AT SAT171B D 6. Place transmission into Tool with the control valve facing up. E F G SAT522G 7. H Remove torque converter clutch solenoid valve and overdrive cancel solenoid valve connectors. I J K SAT132C 8. a. Remove oil strainer. Remove oil strainer from control valve assembly. Then remove O-ring from oil strainer. L M SAT306I AT-71 OVERHAUL [RL4R01A] b. Check oil strainer screen for damage. SAT025B 9. a. Remove control valve assembly. Straighten terminal clips to free terminal cords, then remove terminal clips. SAT307I b. Remove bolts A and B , and remove control valve assembly from transmission. Bolt mm (in) A 33 (1.30) B 45 (1.77) SAT146HA c. Remove manual valve from control valve assembly. SAT127B AT-72 OVERHAUL [RL4R01A] 10. Remove terminal cord assembly from transmission case while pushing on stopper. ● Be careful not to damage cord. ● Do not remove terminal cord assembly unless it is damaged. A B AT SAT308I D 11. Remove converter housing. a. Remove converter housing bolts. b. Remove traces of sealant. ● Be careful not to scratch converter housing. E F G SAT999A H 12. Remove O-ring from input shaft. I J K SAT995A 13. Remove oil pump assembly. a. Attach Tool to oil pump assembly and extract it evenly from transmission case. L M SAT027B AT-73 OVERHAUL [RL4R01A] b. c. Remove O-ring from oil pump assembly. Remove traces of sealant from oil pump housing. ● Be careful not to scratch pump housing. SAT028B d. Remove needle bearing and thrust washer from oil pump assembly. SAT108B 14. Remove input shaft and oil pump gasket. SAT988A 15. Remove brake band and band strut. a. Loosen lock nut and remove band servo anchor end pin from transmission case. SAT029B AT-74 OVERHAUL [RL4R01A] b. Remove brake band and band strut from transmission case. A B AT SAT986A D To prevent brake linings from cracking or peeling, do not stretch the flexible band unnecessarily. When removing the brake band, always secure it with a clip as shown in the figure at left. Leave the clip in position after removing the brake band. Check brake band facing for damage, cracks, wear and burns. ● c. E F G SAT655 H 16. Remove front side clutch and gear components. a. Remove clutch pack (reverse clutch, high clutch and front sun gear) from transmission case. I J K SAT030B b. c. Remove front bearing race from clutch pack. Remove rear bearing race from clutch pack. L M SAT374I AT-75 OVERHAUL [RL4R01A] d. Remove front planetary carrier from transmission case. SAT031B e. f. Remove front needle bearing from front planetary carrier. Remove rear bearing from front planetary carrier. SAT968A g. Remove rear sun gear from transmission case. SAT974A 17. Remove rear extension case. a. Remove rear extension case from transmission case. b. Remove rear extension gasket from transmission case. SAT309I c. Remove oil seal from rear extension case. ● Do not remove oil seal unless it is to be replaced. SAT190B AT-76 OVERHAUL [RL4R01A] 18. Remove output shaft and parking gear. a. Remove governor valve assembly. A B AT SAT120C b. D Remove rear snap ring from output shaft. E F G SAT310I c. d. H Slowly push output shaft all the way forward. ● Do not use excessive force. Remove snap ring from output shaft. I J SAT957A e. Remove output shaft and parking gear as a unit from transmission case. K L M SAT311I f. Remove parking gear from output shaft. AT-77 OVERHAUL [RL4R01A] g. Remove needle bearing from transmission case. SAT033B 19. Remove rear side clutch and gear components. a. Remove front internal gear. SAT954A b. Remove bearing race from front internal gear. SAT110B c. Remove needle bearing from rear internal gear. SAT111B d. Remove rear internal gear, forward clutch hub and overrun clutch hub as a set from transmission case. SAT951A AT-78 OVERHAUL [RL4R01A] e. f. Remove needle bearing from overrun clutch hub. Remove overrun clutch hub from rear internal gear and forward clutch hub. A B AT SAT682H g. D Remove thrust washer from overrun clutch hub. E F G SAT036B h. Remove forward clutch assembly from transmission case. H I J SAT037B 20. Remove band servo and accumulator components. a. Remove band servo retainer from transmission case. K L M SAT038B b. c. Apply compressed air to oil hole until band servo piston comes out of transmission case. ● Hold piston with a rag and gradually direct air to oil hole. Remove return springs. SAT039B AT-79 OVERHAUL [RL4R01A] d. e. Remove springs from accumulator pistons A , B , C and D . Apply compressed air to each oil hole until piston comes out. ● Hold piston with a rag and gradually direct air to oil hole. SAT040BA Identification of accumulator pistons A B C D Identification of oil holes a b c d f. Remove O-ring from each piston. SAT618GA 21. Remove throttle wire components if necessary. a. Remove throttle wire from A/T assembly. SAT135C b. c. d. Remove throttle lever shaft E-ring. Remove return spring. Remove throttle lever. SAT136C AT-80 OVERHAUL [RL4R01A] e. Remove throttle lever shaft retaining pin and throttle lever shaft. A B AT SAT137C D 22. Remove manual shaft components, if necessary. a. Hold width across flats of manual shaft (outside the transmission case) and remove lock nut from shaft. E F G SAT041B b. Remove retaining pin from transmission case. H I J SAT042B c. While pushing detent spring down, remove manual plate and parking rod from transmission case. K L M SAT935A d. Remove manual shaft from transmission case. SAT043B AT-81 OVERHAUL [RL4R01A] e. Remove spacer and detent spring from transmission case. SAT934A f. Remove oil seal from transmission case. SAT044B AT-82 OIL PUMP [RL4R01A] OIL PUMP Components PFP:15010 A ECS007JH B AT D E F LCIA0295E Disassembly 1. G ECS007JI H Loosen bolts in numerical order and remove oil pump cover. I J SAT649A 2. Remove rotor, vane rings and vanes. ● Inscribe a mark on back of rotor for identification of foreaft direction when reassembling rotor. Then remove rotor. K L M SAT650A AT-83 OIL PUMP [RL4R01A] 3. While pushing on cam ring, remove pivot pin. ● Be careful not to scratch oil pump housing. SAT651A 4. While holding cam ring and cam ring return spring, lift out cam ring return spring. ● Be careful not to damage oil pump housing. ● Hold cam ring return spring to prevent it from jumping. SAT652A 5. Remove cam ring and cam ring return spring from oil pump housing. SAT653A 6. Remove pivot pin from control piston and remove control piston assembly. SAT654A AT-84 OIL PUMP [RL4R01A] 7. Remove oil seal from oil pump housing. ● Be careful not to scratch oil pump housing. A B AT SAT655A D Inspection ECS007JJ OIL PUMP COVER, ROTOR, VANES, CONTROL PISTON, SIDE SEALS, CAM RING AND FRICTION RING ● Check for wear and damage. E F G H SAT656A SIDE CLEARANCES ● Measure side clearances between end of oil pump housing and cam ring, rotor, vanes and control piston in at least four places along their circumferences. Maximum measured values should be within specified ranges. I J K SAT657A L M SAT658A ● Before measuring side clearance, check that friction rings, O-ring, control piston side seals and cam ring return spring are removed. Standard clearance (Cam ring, rotor, vanes and control piston) ● : Refer to AT-154, "Oil Pump and Low One-way Clutch" . If not within standard clearance, replace oil pump assembly except oil pump cover assembly. AT-85 OIL PUMP [RL4R01A] SEAL RING CLEARANCE ● Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove. Standard clearance Wear limit ● : 0.10 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 0.0098 in) : 0.25 mm (0.0098 in) If not within wear limit, replace oil pump cover assembly. Assembly 1. ECS007JK Drive oil seal into oil pump housing. ● Apply ATF to outer periphery and lip surface. SAT081E 2. a. b. Install cam ring in oil pump housing as follows: Install side seal on control piston. ● Pay attention to its direction — black surface faces toward control piston. ● Apply petroleum jelly to side seal. Install control piston on oil pump. SAT654A c. Install O-ring and friction ring on cam ring. ● Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring. SAT660A d. Assemble cam ring, cam ring return spring and spring seat. Install spring by pushing it against pump housing. SAT661A AT-86 OIL PUMP [RL4R01A] e. While pushing on cam ring, install pivot pin. A B AT SAT651A D 3. Install rotor, vanes and vane rings. ● Pay attention to direction of rotor. E F G SAT662A 4. a. b. H Install oil pump housing and oil pump cover. Wrap masking tape around splines of oil pump cover assembly to protect seal. Position oil pump cover assembly in oil pump housing assembly, then remove masking tape. Tighten bolts in numerical order as shown. I J K SAT649A 5. Install seal rings carefully after packing ring grooves with petroleum jelly. Press rings down into jelly for a close fit. ● Seal rings come in two different diameters. Check fit carefully in each groove. Small dia. seal ring Large dia. seal ring ● L M : No mark : Yellow mark in area shown by arrow Do not spread gap of seal ring excessively while installing. It may deform ring. SAT663A AT-87 CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY [RL4R01A] CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY Components PFP:31705 ECS007JL LCIA0281E AT-88 CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY [RL4R01A] Disassembly 1. a. b. ECS007JM A Remove solenoids. Remove overdrive cancel solenoid valve and side plate from lower body. Remove O-ring from solenoid. B AT D AAT814 c. d. Remove torque converter clutch solenoid valve from upper body. Remove O-ring from solenoid valve. E F G SAT144G H 2. a. b. Disassemble upper and lower bodies. Place upper body facedown, and remove bolts, reamer bolts, side plate and support plates. Remove lower body and separator plate as a unit from upper body. ● Be careful not to drop orifice check valve, spring and steel balls. I J K SAT138C c. d. L Place lower body facedown, and remove separator plate. Remove orifice check valve and orifice check spring. M AAT258A AT-89 CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY [RL4R01A] e. Check to see that steel balls are properly positioned in upper body and side plate, then remove them from upper body. SAT726C Inspection ECS007JN LOWER AND UPPER BODIES ● Check to see that there are pins and retainer plates in lower body. SAT139C ● ● Check to see that there are pins and retainer plates in upper body. Be careful not to lose these parts. SAT140C ● ● Check to make sure that oil circuits are clean and free from damage. Check tube brackets and tube connectors for damage. SAT141C AT-90 CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY [RL4R01A] SEPARATOR PLATES ● A Check to make sure that separator plate is free of damage and not deformed and oil holes are clean. B AT SAT151G OVERDRIVE CANCEL SOLENOID VALVE AND TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE ● ● Check that filter is not clogged or damaged. Measure resistance. Refer to AT-44, "Component Inspection" . Assembly 1. a. ECS007JO Install upper and lower bodies. Position upper body with oil circuit facing up. Install steel balls in their proper positions. D E F G H I SAT726C b. J Install reamer bolts from bottom of upper body. K L SAT147H c. Position lower body with oil circuit facing up. Install orifice check spring, orifice check valve. D : 2.0 mm (0.079 in) SAT763G AT-91 M CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY [RL4R01A] d. e. Install separator plate on lower body. Temporarily install support plates, side plate (with steel ball) and tube brackets. SAT312I f. Temporarily assemble lower and upper bodies, using reamer bolt as a guide. ● Be careful not to dislocate or drop steel balls, orifice check spring and orifice check valve. SAT198B g. Install and temporarily tighten bolts and tube brackets in their proper locations. AAT877 AT-92 CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY [RL4R01A] Bolt length and location: A Bolt symbol Bolt length (in) 2. a. mm a b 45 (1.77) 33 (1.30) B Install solenoids. Attach O-ring and install overdrive cancel solenoid valve and side plate onto lower body. AT D E AAT815 b. 3. Attach O-ring and install torque converter clutch solenoid valve onto upper body. Tighten bolt. F G H I SAT144G J K L M AT-93 CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY [RL4R01A] CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY Components PFP:31711 ECS007JP LCIA0282E Apply ATF to all components before their installation. Numbers preceding valve springs correspond with those shown in Return Springs Chart. Refer to AT-151, "Return Springs" . AT-94 CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY [RL4R01A] Disassembly 1. ECS007JQ A Remove valves at parallel pins. ● Do not use a magnetic pick-up tool. B AT D SAT140C a. Use a wire paper clip to push out parallel pins. E F G SAT822A b. Remove parallel pins while pressing their corresponding plugs and sleeves. ● Remove plug slowly to prevent internal parts from jumping out. H I J K SAT823A c. L Place mating surface of valve facedown, and remove internal parts. ● If a valve is hard to remove, place valve body facedown and lightly tap it with a soft hammer. ● Be careful not to drop or damage valves and sleeves. M SAT824A AT-95 CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY [RL4R01A] 2. a. Remove valves at retainer plates. Pry out retainer plate with wire paper clip. SAT825A b. Remove retainer plates while holding spring. SAT826A c. Place mating surface of valve facedown, and remove internal parts. ● If a valve is hard to remove, lightly tap valve body with a soft hammer. ● Be careful not to drop or damage valves, sleeves, etc. SAT827A Inspection ECS007JR VALVE SPRINGS ● Measure free length and outer diameter of each valve spring. Also check for damage or deformation. Inspection standard ● : Refer to AT-151, "Return Springs" . Replace valve springs if deformed or fatigued. SAT829A CONTROL VALVES ● Check sliding surfaces of valves, sleeves and plugs. AT-96 CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY [RL4R01A] Assembly 1. ECS007JS A Lubricate the control valve body and all valves with ATF. Install control valves by sliding them carefully into their bores. ● Be careful not to scratch or damage valve body. B AT D SAT830A ● Wrap a small screwdriver with vinyl tape and use it to insert the valves into proper position. E F G SAT831A H ACCUMULATOR CONTROL PLUG ● ● Align protrusion of accumulator control sleeve with notch in plug. Align parallel pin groove in plug with parallel pin, and install accumulator control valve. I J K SAT833A L 1. Install parallel pins and retainer plates. M SAT140C AT-97 CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY [RL4R01A] ● ● While pushing plug, install parallel pin. Insert retainer plate while pushing spring. SAT449E AT-98 CONTROL VALVE LOWER BODY [RL4R01A] CONTROL VALVE LOWER BODY Components PFP:31713 A ECS007JT B AT D E F G H I J K L M LCIA0283E Apply ATF to all components before their installation. Numbers preceding valve springs correspond with those shown in Return Springs Chart in SDS. Refer to AT151, "Return Springs" . AT-99 CONTROL VALVE LOWER BODY [RL4R01A] Disassembly 1. 2. ECS007JU Remove valves at parallel pins. Remove valves at retainer plates. For removal procedures, refer to AT-89, "Disassembly" . SAT139C Inspection ECS007JV VALVE SPRINGS ● Check each valve spring for damage and deformation. Also measure free length and outer diameter. Inspection standard ● : Refer to AT-151, "Return Springs" . Replace valve springs if deformed or fatigued. SAT829A CONTROL VALVES ● Check sliding surfaces of control valves, sleeves and plugs for damage. Assembly ● ECS007JW Install control valves. For installation procedures, refer to AT-91, "Assembly" . SAT139C AT-100 GOVERNOR VALVE ASSEMBLY [RL4R01A] GOVERNOR VALVE ASSEMBLY Components PFP:31860 A ECS007JX B AT D E F SAT450EB G Numbers preceding valve springs correspond with those shown in AT-151, "Return Springs" . Inspection ECS007JY VALVE SPRINGS ● Measure free length and outer diameter of each valve spring. Also check for damage or deformation. Inspection standard H I : Refer to AT-151, "Return Springs" . J K SAT829A GOVERNOR VALVES AND VALVE BODY ● L Check governor valves and valve body for indication of burning or scratches. M AT-101 PARKING GEAR [RL4R01A] PARKING GEAR Inspection ● ● PFP:31486 ECS007JZ Check contacting surface of parking gear and ring groove areas for wear. Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove. Standard clearance Wear limit : 0.15 - 0.40 mm (0.0059 0.0157 in) : 0.40 mm (0.0157 in) SAT152G AT-102 REVERSE CLUTCH [RL4R01A] REVERSE CLUTCH Components PFP:31510 A ECS007K0 B AT D E F G H I AAT108A Disassembly 1. a. b. c. ECS007K1 Check operation of reverse clutch. Install seal ring onto oil pump cover and install reverse clutch. Apply compressed air to oil hole. Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring. If retaining plate does not contact snap ring, ● D-ring might be damaged. ● Oil seal might be damaged. ● Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball. K L M SAT841A 2. Remove snap ring, drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish plate. SAT842A AT-103 J REVERSE CLUTCH [RL4R01A] 3. 4. Remove snap ring from clutch drum while compressing clutch springs. ● Set Tool directly over springs. ● Do not expand snap ring excessively. Remove spring retainer and return spring. SAT620G 5. 6. Install seal ring onto oil pump cover and install reverse clutch drum. While holding piston, gradually apply compressed air to oil hole until piston is removed. ● Do not apply compressed air abruptly. Remove D-ring and oil seal from piston. SAT844A Inspection ECS007K2 REVERSE CLUTCH SNAP RING AND SPRING RETAINER ● Check for deformation, fatigue and damage. REVERSE CLUTCH RETURN SPRINGS ● Check for deformation and damage. Also, measure free length and outside diameter. Inspection standard : Refer to AT-151, "Return Springs" . SAT829A REVERSE CLUTCH DRIVE PLATES ● ● Check facing for burns, cracks and damage. Measure thickness of facing. Thickness of drive plate Standard value : 1.90 - 2.05 mm (0.0748 - 0.0807 in) Wear limit : 1.80 mm (0.0709 in) ● If not within wear limit, replace. SAT845A REVERSE CLUTCH DISH PLATE ● Check for deformation and damage. AT-104 REVERSE CLUTCH [RL4R01A] REVERSE CLUTCH PISTON ● ● ● A Shake piston to assure that balls are not seized. Apply compressed air to check ball oil hole opposite the return spring to assure that there is no air leakage. Also apply compressed air to oil hole on return spring side to assure that air leaks past ball. B AT SAT846A Assembly 1. D ECS007K3 Install D-ring and oil seal on piston. ● Apply ATF to both parts. ● Take care with the direction of oil seal. E F G SAT847A 2. Install piston assembly by turning it slowly and evenly. ● Apply ATF to inner surface of drum. H I J K SAT848A L 3. Install return springs and spring retainer. M SAT849A AT-105 REVERSE CLUTCH [RL4R01A] 4. Set Tool on spring retainer and install snap ring while compressing clutch springs. SAT620G ● Do not align snap ring gap with spring retainer stopper. SAT850A 5. 6. Install drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish plate. Install snap ring. SAT842A 7. Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring. If not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate. Specified clearance Standard Allowable limit Retaining plate : 0.5 - 0.8 mm (0.020 0.031 in) : 1.2 mm (0.047 in) : Refer to AT-104, "Inspection" . SAT852A AT-106 REVERSE CLUTCH [RL4R01A] 8. Check operation of reverse clutch. Refer to AT-104, "Inspection" . A B AT SAT841A D E F G H I J K L M AT-107 HIGH CLUTCH [RL4R01A] HIGH CLUTCH Components PFP:31410 ECS007K4 LCIA0284E Disassembly and Assembly ECS007K5 Service procedures for high clutch are essentially the same as those for reverse clutch, with the following exceptions: ● Check of high clutch operation SAT854A ● Removal and installation of return spring SAT621G AT-108 HIGH CLUTCH [RL4R01A] ● Inspection of high clutch return springs Inspection standard A : Refer to AT-151, "Return Springs" . B AT SAT829A D ● Inspection of high clutch drive plate Thickness of drive plate Standard : 1.52 - 1.67 mm (0.0598 - 0.0657 in) Wear limit : 1.40 mm (0.0551 in) E F G SAT845A ● Measurement of clearance between retaining plate and snap ring H Specified clearance Standard : 1.8 - 2.2 mm (0.071 - 0.087 in) Allowable limit : 2.8 mm (0.110 in) Retaining plate : Refer to AT-152, "Clutch and Brakes" . I J SAT858A K L M AT-109 FORWARD AND OVERRUN CLUTCHES [RL4R01A] FORWARD AND OVERRUN CLUTCHES Components PFP:31570 ECS007K6 LCIA0285E AT-110 FORWARD AND OVERRUN CLUTCHES [RL4R01A] Disassembly and Assembly ECS007K7 A Service procedures for forward and overrun clutches are essentially the same as those for reverse clutch, with the following exceptions: ● Check of forward clutch operation B AT D SAT860A ● Check of overrun clutch operation E F G SAT861A ● Removal of forward clutch drum Remove forward clutch drum from transmission case by holding snap ring. H I J K SAT865A L ● – Removal of forward clutch and overrun clutch pistons While holding overrun clutch piston, gradually apply compressed air to oil hole. M SAT862A AT-111 FORWARD AND OVERRUN CLUTCHES [RL4R01A] – Remove overrun clutch from forward clutch. SAT863A ● Removal and installation of return springs SAT148H ● Inspection of forward clutch and overrun clutch return springs Inspection standard : Refer to AT-151, "Return Springs" . SAT829A ● Inspection of forward clutch drive plates Thickness of drive plate Standard : 1.52 - 1.67 mm (0.0598 - 0.0657 in) Wear limit : 1.40 mm (0.0551 in) SAT845A AT-112 FORWARD AND OVERRUN CLUTCHES [RL4R01A] ● Inspection of overrun clutch drive plates A Thickness of drive plate Standard : 1.90 - 2.05 mm (0.0748 - 0.0807 in) Wear limit : 1.80 mm (0.0709 in) B AT SAT845A D ● – • Installation of forward clutch piston and overrun clutch piston Install forward clutch piston by turning it slowly and evenly. Apply ATF to inner surface of clutch drum. E F G SAT741G • – • H Align notch in forward clutch piston with groove in forward clutch drum. Install overrun clutch by turning it slowly and evenly. Apply ATF to inner surface of forward clutch piston. I J SAT153G ● Measurement of clearance between retaining plate and snap ring of overrun clutch L Specified clearance Standard : 1.0 - 1.4 mm (0.039 - 0.055 in) Allowable limit : 2.0 mm (0.079 in) Retaining plate : Refer to AT-153, "OVERRUN CLUTCH" . M SAT869A AT-113 K FORWARD AND OVERRUN CLUTCHES [RL4R01A] ● Measurement of clearance between retaining plate and snap ring of forward clutch Specified clearance Standard : 0.35 - 0.75 mm (0.0138 - 0.0295 in) Allowable limit : 1.85 mm (0.728 in) Retaining plate : Refer to AT-153, "FORWARD CLUTCH" . SAT870A AT-114 LOW & REVERSE BRAKE [RL4R01A] LOW & REVERSE BRAKE Components PFP:31645 A ECS007K8 B AT D E F G H I AAT111A Disassembly 1. a. b. c. ECS007K9 Check operation of low and reverse brake. Install seal ring onto oil pump cover and install reverse clutch. Apply compressed air to oil hole. Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring. If retaining plate does not contact snap ring: ● D-ring might be damaged. ● Oil seal might be damaged. ● Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball. K L M SAT872A 2. Remove snap ring, low & reverse brake drive plates, driven plates and dish plate. SAT873A AT-115 J LOW & REVERSE BRAKE [RL4R01A] 3. 4. 5. Remove low one-way clutch inner race, spring retainer and return spring from transmission case. Remove seal rings from low one-way clutch inner race. Remove needle bearing from low one-way clutch inner race. SAT154G 6. 7. Remove low & reverse brake piston using compressed air. Remove oil seal and D-ring from piston. SAT876A Inspection ECS007KA LOW & REVERSE BRAKE SNAP RING AND SPRING RETAINER ● ● Check for deformation, or damage. Replace if necessary. LOW & REVERSE BRAKE RETURN SPRINGS ● Check for deformation or damage. Also measure free length and outside diameter. Inspection standard : Refer to AT-151, "Return Springs" . SAT829A LOW & REVERSE BRAKE DRIVE PLATES ● ● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. Measure thickness of facing. Thickness of drive plate Standard value : 1.52 - 1.67 mm (0.0598 - 0.0657 in) Wear limit : 1.4 mm (0.055 in) ● If not within wear limit, replace. SAT845A AT-116 LOW & REVERSE BRAKE [RL4R01A] LOW ONE-WAY CLUTCH INNER RACE ● ● ● ● A Check frictional surface of inner race for wear or damage. Install new seal rings onto low one-way clutch inner race. Be careful not to expand seal ring gap excessively. Measure seal ring-to-groove clearance. B Inspection standard Standard value : 0.10 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in) Allowable limit : 0.25 mm (0.0098 in) ● If not within allowable limit, replace low one-way clutch inner race. Assembly 1. AT SAT155G D ECS007KB E Install needle bearing onto one-way clutch inner race. ● Pay attention to its direction — black surface faces to rear side. ● Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washers. F G SAT112B 2. Install oil seal and D-ring onto piston. Apply ATF to oil seal and D-ring. H I ● J K SAT879A 3. Install piston by rotating it slowly and evenly. Apply ATF to inner surface of transmission case. ● M SAT880A AT-117 L LOW & REVERSE BRAKE [RL4R01A] 4. 5. 6. Install return springs, spring retainer and low one-way clutch inner race onto transmission case. Install dish plate, low & reverse brake drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate. Install snap ring on transmission case. SAT881A 7. Check operation of low & reverse brake clutch piston. Refer to AT-115, "Disassembly" . SAT872A 8. Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring. If not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate. Specified clearance Standard : 0.5 - 0.8 mm (0.020 - 0.031 in) Allowable limit : 2.3 mm (0.091 in) Retaining plate : Refer to AT-153, "LOW & REVERSE BRAKE" . SAT885A 9. Install low one-way clutch inner race seal ring. ● Apply petroleum jelly to seal ring. ● Make sure seal rings are pressed firmly into place and held by petroleum jelly. SAT884A AT-118 FORWARD CLUTCH DRUM ASSEMBLY [RL4R01A] FORWARD CLUTCH DRUM ASSEMBLY Components PFP:31571 A ECS007KC B AT D E F SAT886AA Disassembly 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. G ECS007KD H Remove snap ring from forward clutch drum. Remove side plate from forward clutch drum. Remove low one-way clutch from forward clutch drum. Remove snap ring from forward clutch drum. Remove needle bearing from forward clutch drum. I J SAT887A Inspection ECS007KE FORWARD CLUTCH DRUM ● ● K L Check spline portion for wear or damage. Check frictional surfaces of low one-way clutch and needle bearing for wear or damage. M SAT892A AT-119 FORWARD CLUTCH DRUM ASSEMBLY [RL4R01A] NEEDLE BEARING AND LOW ONE-WAY CLUTCH ● Check frictional surface for wear or damage. SAT893A Assembly 1. 2. ECS007KF Install needle bearing in forward clutch drum. Install snap ring onto forward clutch drum. SAT149H 3. Install low one-way clutch onto forward clutch drum by pushing the roller in evenly. SAT894A Install low one-way clutch with flange facing rearward. Install side plate onto forward clutch drum. Install snap ring onto forward clutch drum. ● 4. 5. SAT895A AT-120 REAR INTERNAL GEAR AND FORWARD CLUTCH HUB [RL4R01A] REAR INTERNAL GEAR AND FORWARD CLUTCH HUB Components PFP:31450 A ECS007KG B AT D E F LCIA0286E Disassembly 1. 2. 3. 4. G ECS007KH H Remove rear internal gear by pushing forward clutch hub forward. Remove thrust washer from rear internal gear. Remove snap ring from forward clutch hub. Remove end bearing. I J SAT897A 5. 6. Remove forward one-way clutch and end bearing as a unit from forward clutch hub. Remove snap ring from forward clutch hub. K L M SAT287G AT-121 REAR INTERNAL GEAR AND FORWARD CLUTCH HUB [RL4R01A] Inspection ECS007KI REAR INTERNAL GEAR AND FORWARD CLUTCH HUB ● ● ● Check gear for excessive wear, chips or cracks. Check frictional surfaces of forward one-way clutch and thrust washer for wear or damage. Check spline for wear or damage. SAT902A SNAP RING AND END BEARING ● Check for deformation or damage. SAT903A Assembly 1. 2. ECS007KJ Install snap ring onto forward clutch hub. Install end bearing. SAT901A 3. 4. 5. Install forward one-way clutch onto clutch hub. ● Install forward one-way clutch with flange facing rearward. Install end bearing. Install snap ring onto forward clutch hub. SAT904A AT-122 REAR INTERNAL GEAR AND FORWARD CLUTCH HUB [RL4R01A] 6. Install thrust washer onto rear internal gear. ● Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer. ● Securely insert pawls of thrust washer into holes in rear internal gear. A B AT SAT906A D 7. Position forward clutch hub in rear internal gear. E F G SAT907A 8. H After installing, check to assure that forward clutch hub rotates clockwise. I J K SAT905A L M AT-123 BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY [RL4R01A] BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY Components PFP:31615 ECS007KK AAT112A Disassembly 1. 2. 3. ECS007KL Block one oil hole in O/D servo piston retainer and the center hole in O/D band servo piston. Apply compressed air to the other oil hole in piston retainer to remove O/D band servo piston from retainer. Remove D-ring from O/D band servo piston. SAT909A 4. Remove band servo piston assembly from servo piston retainer by pushing it forward. SAT910A AT-124 BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY [RL4R01A] 5. Place piston stem end on a wooden block. While pushing servo piston spring retainer down, remove E-ring. A B AT SAT911A D 6. Remove servo piston spring retainer, return spring C and piston stem from band servo piston. E F G SAT912A 7. 8. 9. 10. H Remove E-ring from band servo piston. Remove servo cushion spring retainer from band servo piston. Remove D-rings from band servo piston. Remove O-rings from servo piston retainer. I J K SAT914A Inspection ECS007KM PISTONS, RETAINERS AND PISTON STEM ● L Check frictional surfaces for abnormal wear or damage. M SAT915A AT-125 BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY [RL4R01A] RETURN SPRINGS ● Check for deformation or damage. Measure free length and outer diameter. Inspection standard : Refer toAT-151, "Return Springs" . SAT916AA Assembly 1. ECS007KN Install O-rings onto servo piston retainer. ● Apply ATF to O-rings. ● Pay attention to position of each O-ring. SAT917A 2. Install servo cushion spring retainer onto band servo piston. SAT918A 3. 4. Install E-ring onto servo cushion spring retainer. Install D-rings onto band servo piston. ● Apply ATF to D-rings. SAT920A AT-126 BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY [RL4R01A] 5. Install servo piston spring retainer, return spring C and piston stem onto band servo piston. A B AT SAT912A D 6. Place piston stem end on a wooden block. While pushing servo piston spring retainer down, install E-ring. E F G SAT921A 7. H Install band servo piston assembly onto servo piston retainer by pushing it inward. I J K SAT922A 8. Install D-ring on O/D band servo piston. ● Apply ATF to D-ring. L M SAT923A AT-127 BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY [RL4R01A] 9. Install O/D band servo piston onto O/D servo piston retainer by pushing it inward. SAT924A AT-128 PARKING PAWL COMPONENTS [RL4R01A] PARKING PAWL COMPONENTS Components PFP:31991 A ECS007KO B AT D E F LCIA0287E Disassembly 1. G ECS007KP H Slide return spring to the front of rear extension flange. I J SAT226H 2. Remove return spring, pawl spacer and parking pawl from rear extension. K L M SAT227H 3. Remove parking pawl shaft from rear extension. AT-129 PARKING PAWL COMPONENTS [RL4R01A] 4. Remove parking actuator support from rear extension. SAT228H Inspection ECS007KQ PARKING PAWL AND PARKING ACTUATOR SUPPORT ● Check contact surface of parking rod and parking gear for wear. AAT888 Assembly 1. 2. ECS007KR Install parking actuator support onto rear extension. Insert parking pawl shaft into rear extension. SAT229H 3. Install return spring, pawl spacer and parking pawl onto parking pawl shaft. SAT227H AT-130 PARKING PAWL COMPONENTS [RL4R01A] 4. Bend return spring upward and install it onto rear extension. A B AT SAT226H D E F G H I J K L M AT-131 ASSEMBLY [RL4R01A] ASSEMBLY Assembly (1) 1. a. b. c. PFP:00000 ECS007KS Install manual shaft components. Install oil seal onto manual shaft. ● Apply ATF to oil seal. ● Wrap threads of manual shaft with masking tape. Insert manual shaft and oil seal as a unit into transmission case. Remove masking tape. SAT931A d. Push oil seal evenly and install it onto transmission case. SAT932A e. Align groove in shaft with drive pin hole; then drive pin into position as shown in figure at left. SAT933A f. Install detent spring and spacer. SAT934A AT-132 ASSEMBLY [RL4R01A] g. While pushing detent spring down, install manual plate onto manual shaft. A B AT SAT935A D h. Install lock nuts onto manual shaft. E F G SAT936A 2. a. b. Install throttle lever components. Install throttle lever shaft. Align groove in shaft with drive pin hole, then drive pin into position as shown in figure at left. H I J SAT148C c. K Install throttle lever, return spring, spring retainer and E-ring. L M SAT149C d. Install throttle wire. SAT135C AT-133 ASSEMBLY [RL4R01A] ● Apply ATF to O-ring. SAT150C 3. a. Install accumulator piston. Install O-rings onto accumulator piston. ● Apply ATF to O-rings. Accumulator piston Orings : Refer to AT-152, "Accumulator O-ring" . SAT937AA b. Install return spring for accumulator A onto transmission case. Free length of return spring : Refer to AT-151, "Return Springs" . SAT938A c. Install accumulator pistons A , B , C and D . SAT939AA ● Apply ATF to transmission case. AT-134 ASSEMBLY [RL4R01A] 4. a. Install band servo piston. Install return springs onto band servo piston. A B AT SAT941A D b. c. Install band servo piston onto transmission case. ● Apply ATF to O-ring of band servo piston and transmission case. Install gasket for band servo onto transmission case. E F G SAT942A d. Install O/D servo piston retainer onto transmission case. H I J SAT940A 5. a. Install rear side clutch and gear components. Place transmission case in vertical position. K L M SAT943A b. Slightly lift forward clutch drum assembly and slowly rotate it clockwise until its hub passes fully over the clutch inner race inside transmission case. SAT944A AT-135 ASSEMBLY [RL4R01A] c. Check to be sure that rotation direction of forward clutch assembly is correct. SAT945A d. Install thrust washer onto front of overrun clutch hub. ● Apply petroleum jelly to the thrust washer. ● Insert pawls of thrust washer securely into holes in overrun clutch hub. SAT946A e. Install overrun clutch hub onto rear internal gear assembly. SAT947A f. Install needle bearing onto rear of overrun clutch hub. ● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. SAT697H g. Check that overrun clutch hub rotates as shown while holding forward clutch hub. SAT949A AT-136 ASSEMBLY [RL4R01A] h. i. Place transmission case into horizontal position. Install rear internal gear, forward clutch hub and overrun clutch hub as a unit onto transmission case. A B AT SAT156G j. Install needle bearing onto rear internal gear. Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. Install bearing race onto rear of front internal gear. ● Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race. ● Securely engage pawls of bearing race with holes in front internal gear. D ● k. E F G SAT953A l. Install front internal gear on transmission case. H I J SAT954A 6. a. Install output shaft and parking gear. Insert output shaft from rear of transmission case while slightly lifting front internal gear. ● Do not force output shaft against front of transmission case. L M SAT956A b. Carefully push output shaft against front of transmission case. Install snap ring on front of output shaft. ● Check to be sure output shaft cannot be removed in rear direction. SAT957A AT-137 K ASSEMBLY [RL4R01A] c. Install needle bearing on transmission case. ● Pay attention to its direction — black side faces the rear. ● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. SAT044E d. Install parking gear on transmission case. SAT311I e. Install snap ring on rear of output shaft. ● Check to be sure output shaft cannot be removed in forward direction. SAT310I f. Install governor valve assembly on oil distributor. SAT120C 7. a. Install rear extension case. Install oil seal on rear extension case. ● Apply ATF to oil seal. SAT528G AT-138 ASSEMBLY [RL4R01A] b. Install rear extension gasket on transmission case. A B AT SAT963A c. D Install parking rod on transmission case. E F G SAT964A d. Install rear extension case on transmission case. Tighten bolts to specified torque. H : 20 - 25 N·m (2.0 - 2.5 kg-m, 14 - 18 ft-lb) I J SAT309I 8. a. Install front side clutch and gear components. Install rear sun gear on transmission case. ● Pay attention to its direction. K L M SAT974A b. c. Install needle bearing on front of front planetary carrier. ● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. Install needle bearing on rear of front planetary carrier. ● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. ● Pay attention to its direction — black side faces the front. SAT967A AT-139 ASSEMBLY [RL4R01A] d. While rotating forward clutch drum clockwise, install front planetary carrier on forward clutch drum. SAT969A ● Check that portion A of front planetary carrier protrudes approximately 2 mm (0.08 in) beyond portion B of forward clutch assembly. SAT970A e. f. Install bearing races on front and rear of clutch pack. ● Apply petroleum jelly to bearing races. ● Securely engage pawls of bearing races with holes in clutch pack. Place transmission case in vertical position. SAT971A g. Install clutch pack into transmission case. SAT973A Adjustment ECS007KT When any parts listed in the following table are replaced, total end play or reverse clutch end play must be adjusted. Item Part name Total end play Reverse clutch end play Transmission case ● ● Low one-way clutch inner race ● ● AT-140 ASSEMBLY [RL4R01A] Item Part name Total end play Reverse clutch end play Overrun clutch hub ● ● Rear internal gear ● ● Rear planetary carrier ● ● Rear sun gear ● ● Front planetary carrier ● ● Front sun gear ● ● High clutch hub ● ● High clutch drum ● ● Oil pump cover ● ● Reverse clutch drum — ● 1. A B AT D E Adjust total end play. F Total end play “T1 ” : 0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in) G H SAT975A a. With original needle bearing installed, place J34291-1 (bridge), J34291-2 (legs) and the J34291-5 (gauging cylinder) onto oil pump. The long ends of legs should be placed firmly on machined surface of oil pump assembly, and gauging cylinder should rest on top of the needle bearing. Lock gauging cylinder in place with set screw. I J K L SAT976A b. Install J34291-23 (gauging plunger) into gauging cylinder. M SAT977A AT-141 ASSEMBLY [RL4R01A] c. With original bearing race installed inside reverse clutch drum, place shim selecting gauge with its legs on machined surface of transmission case (no gasket) and allow gauging plunger to rest on bearing race. Lock gauging plunger in place with set screw. SAT978A d. Remove Tool and use feeler gauge to measure gap between gauging cylinder and gauging plunger. This measurement should give exact total end play. Total end play “T1 ” ● : 0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in) If end play is out of specification, decrease or increase thickness of oil pump cover bearing race as necessary. Available oil pump cover bearing race : Refer to AT-154, "Total End Play" . SAT979A 2. Adjust reverse clutch drum end play. Reverse clutch drum end play “T2 ” : 0.55 - 0.90 mm (0.0217 0.0354 in) SAT636G a. Place J34291-1 (bridge), J34291-2 (legs) and J34291-5 (gauging cylinder) on machined surface of transmission case (no gasket) and allow gauging cylinder to rest on front thrust surface of reverse clutch drum. Lock cylinder in place with set screw. SAT981A b. Install J34291-23 (gauging plunger) into gauging cylinder. AAT125A AT-142 ASSEMBLY [RL4R01A] c. With original thrust washer installed on oil pump, place shim setting gauge legs onto machined surface of oil pump assembly and allow gauging plunger to rest on thrust washer. Lock plunger in place with set screw. A B AT SAT983A d. Use feeler gauge to measure gap between gauging plunger and gauging cylinder. This measurement should give you exact reverse clutch drum and play. Reverse clutch drum end play “T2 ” ● : 0.55 - 0.90 mm (0.0217 0.0354 in) : Refer to AT-154, "Reverse Clutch Drum End Play" . Assembly (2) 1. 2. a. E F If end play is out of specification, decrease or increase thickness of oil pump thrust washer as necessary. Available oil pump thrust washer D G SAT984A ECS007KU Place transmission case into horizontal position. Install brake band and band strut. Install band strut on brake band. ● Apply petroleum jelly to band strut. H I J K SAT985A b. L Place brake band around reverse clutch drum, and insert band strut into end of band servo piston stem. M SAT986A AT-143 ASSEMBLY [RL4R01A] c. Install anchor end pin on transmission case. Then, tighten anchor end pin just enough so that reverse clutch drum (clutch pack) will not tilt forward. SAT987A 3. Install input shaft on transmission case. ● Pay attention to its direction — O-ring groove side faces front. SAT988A 4. 5. a. b. Install gasket on transmission case. Install oil pump assembly. Install needle bearing on oil pump assembly. ● Apply petroleum jelly to the needle bearing. Install selected thrust washer on oil pump assembly. ● Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer. SAT989A c. Carefully install seal rings into grooves and press them into the petroleum jelly so that they are a tight fit. SAT990A AT-144 ASSEMBLY [RL4R01A] d. Install O-ring on oil pump assembly. ● Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring. A B AT SAT991A D e. Apply petroleum jelly to mating surface of transmission case and oil pump assembly. E F G SAT992A f. Install oil pump assembly. ● Install two converter housing securing bolts in bolt holes in oil pump assembly as guides. H I J SAT993A ● Insert oil pump assembly to the specified position in transmission, as shown at left. K L M SAT994A AT-145 ASSEMBLY [RL4R01A] 6. Install O-ring on input shaft. ● Apply ATF to O-rings. SAT114B 7. a. Install converter housing. Apply Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent around bolt holes in converter housing. Refer to GI-42, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . ● Do not apply too much sealant. SAT397C b. c. Apply Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent to seating surfaces of bolts that secure front of converter housing. Refer to GI-42, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . Install converter housing on transmission case. SAT158G 8. a. Adjust brake band. Tighten anchor end pin to specified torque. Anchor end pin : 4 - 6 N·m (0.4 - 0.6 kg-m, 35 - 52 in-lb) b. Back off anchor end pin two and a half turns. SAT001B AT-146 ASSEMBLY [RL4R01A] c. While holding anchor end pin, tighten lock nut. A B AT SAT002B D 9. a. b. Install terminal cord assembly. Install O-ring on terminal cord assembly. ● Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring. Compress terminal cord assembly stopper and install terminal cord assembly on transmission case. E F G SAT316I H 10. Install control valve assembly. a. Install accumulator piston return springs B , C and D . Free length of return springs : Refer to AT-151, "Return Springs" . I J K SAT004BA b. Install manual valve on control valve. ● Apply ATF to manual valve. L M SAT005B c. d. Install control valve assembly on transmission case. Install connector tube brackets and tighten bolts A and B . ● Check that terminal assembly harness does not catch. Bolt mm (in) A 33 (1.30) B 45 (1.77) SAT448EA AT-147 ASSEMBLY [RL4R01A] e. f. Install O-ring on oil strainer. ● Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring. Install oil strainer on control valve. SAT306I g. Securely fasten terminal harness with clips. SAT307I 11. Install oil pan. a. Attach a magnet to oil pan. SAT011B b. c. d. Install new oil pan gasket on transmission case. Install oil pan and bracket on transmission case. ● Always replace oil pan bolts as they are self-sealing bolts. ● Before installing bolts, remove traces of sealant and oil from mating surface and thread holes. ● Tighten four bolts in a crisscross pattern to prevent dislocation of gasket. Tighten drain plug. SAT099H AT-148 ASSEMBLY [RL4R01A] 12. a. b. c. Install park/neutral position (PNP) switch. Check that manual shaft is in 1 position. Temporarily install PNP switch on manual shaft. Move manual shaft to N. A B AT SAT299I D d. i. ii. e. f. Use a 4 mm (0.16 in) pin for this adjustment. Insert the pin straight into the manual shaft adjustment hole. Rotate PNP switch until the pin can also be inserted straight into hole in PNP switch. Tighten PNP switch fixing bolts. Remove pin from adjustment hole after adjusting PNP switch. E F G SAT081B 13. Install torque converter. a. Pour ATF into torque converter. ● Approximately 2 liters (2-1/8 US qt, 1-3/4 Imp qt) of fluid are required for a new torque converter. ● When reusing old torque converter, add the same amount of fluid as was drained. H I J SAT015BA b. K Install torque converter while aligning notches and oil pump. L M SAT016B c. Measure distance A to check that torque converter is in proper position. Distance “A” : 26.0 mm (1.024 in) or more SAT017B AT-149 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RL4R01A] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specifications PFP:00030 ECS007KV Automatic transmission model RL4R01A Transmission model code number 49X11 Stall torque ratio 2.0 : 1 Transmission gear ratio 1st 2.785 2nd 1.545 Top 1.000 O/D 0.694 Reverse 2.272 Nissan Matic “D” (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Genuine Nissan Automatic Transmission Fluid (Canada)*1 Recommended fluid Fluid capacity 7.9 (8-3/8, 7) (US qt, Imp qt) *1: Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . Shift Schedule ECS007KW VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) Throttle position D1 → D2 D2 → D3 D3 → D4 D4 → D3 D3 → D2 D2 → D1 12 → 11 Full throttle 46 - 50 (29 31) 88 - 96 (55 60) — 126 - 136 (78 - 85) 80 - 88 (50 55) 41 - 45 (25 28) 41 - 45 (25 28) Half throttle 29 - 33 (18 21) 56 - 64 (35 40) 105 - 114 (65 - 71) 60 - 70 (37 43) 26 - 32 (16 20) 12 - 16 (7 10) 41 - 45 (25 28) VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING AND RELEASING LOCK-UP D4 (O/D ON) Throttle position Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) Lock-up ON Lock-up OFF 4/8 105 - 113 (65 - 70) 61 - 69 (38 - 43) 3/8 76 - 84 (47 - 52) 55 - 63 (34 - 39) 2/8 58 - 66 (36 - 41) 55 - 63 (34 - 39) 1/8 58 - 66 (36 - 41) 55 - 63 (34 - 39) Stall Revolution Stall revolution ECS007KX rpm 2,100 - 2,300 Line Pressure Engine speed rpm ECS007KY Line pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) D position (Overdrive control switch ON and OFF) 2 and 1 positions R position Idle 471 - 510 (4.8 - 5.2, 68 - 74) 883 - 961 (9.0 - 9.8, 128 - 139) 736 - 775 (7.5 - 7.9, 107 - 112) Stall 912 - 991 (9.3 - 10.1, 132 - 144) 883 - 961 (9.0 - 9.8, 128 - 139) 1,442 - 1,520 (14.7 - 15.5, 209 - 220) Governor Pressure ECS007KZ Vehicle speed Governor pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) 0 km/h (0 MPH) 0 (0, 0) 29 km/h (18 MPH) 119.6 - 123.6 (1.22 - 1.26, 17 - 18) AT-150 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RL4R01A] Vehicle speed Governor pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) 57 km/h (35 MPH) 235.4 - 284.4 (2.40 - 2.90, 34 - 41) 86 km/h (53 MPH) 351.1 - 409.9 (3.58 - 4.18, 51 - 59) A Return Springs ECS007L0 B Unit: mm (in) Item Parts Upper body Control valve Lower body Governor valve Part No.* AT Free length Outer diameter 1 4th speed cut valve spring 31756-48X06 23.5 (0.925) 7.4 (0.2913) 2 Pressure regulator valve spring 31742-48X23 51.2 (2.016) 12.1 (0.476) 3 Pressure modifier valve spring 31742-48X13 40.83 (1.6075) 8.0 (0.315) 4 1-2 shift valve spring 31762-48X00 43.4 (1.709) 6.0 (0.236) 5 2-3 shift valve spring 31762-48X14 47.4 (1.866) 9.0 (0.354) 6 3-4 shift valve spring 31762-48X06 44.03 (1.7335) 8.0 (0.315) 7 Accumulator control valve spring 31742-48X24 30.3 (1.193) 8.0 (0.315) — 3-2 downshift valve spring — — — 8 2-3 throttle modifier valve spring 31742-41X21 33.0 (1.299) 6.5 (0.256) 9 4-2 relay valve spring 31756-41X00 29.1 (1.146) 6.95 (0.2736) 1 0 Torque converter clutch control valve spring 31742-48X07 20.0 (0.787) 5.45 (0.2146) 1 Throttle valve & detent valve spring 31802-48X02 34.23 (1.3476) 11.0 (0.433) 2 Kickdown modifier valve spring 31756-48X12 42.8 (1.685) 7.0 (0.276) 3 1st reducing valve spring 31756-48X04 34.1 (1.343) 7.0 (0.276) 4 31742-48X21 33.2 (1.307) 7.7 (0.303) 5 Overrun clutch reducing valve spring 31742-48X05 31.0 (1.220) 5.2 (0.205) 6 3-2 timing valve spring 31742-48X15 23.0 (0.906) 7.0 (0.276) 7 Torque converter relief valve spring 31742-41X23 38.0 (1.496) 9.0 (0.354) 8 4-2 sequence valve spring 31756-41X00 29.1 (1.146) 6.95 (0.2736) 1 Primary valve spring 31742-48X11 19.1 (0.752) 9.05 (0.3563) 2 Secondary governor valve I spring 31742-48X09 30.58 (1.2039) 9.2 (0.362) 3 Secondary governor valve II spring 31742-48X10 16.79 (0.6610) 9.0 (0.354) E F G H Reverse clutch 16 pcs 31521-41X02 (Assembly) 19.7 (0.7756) 11.6 (0.457) High clutch 10 pcs 31521-41X03 (Assembly) 24.2 (0.9528) 11.6 (0.457) Forward clutch (Overrun clutch) 20 pcs 31521-41X04 (Assembly) 35.77 (1.4083) 9.7 (0.382) Low & reverse brake 18 pcs 31655-41X00 (Assembly) 22.3 (0.878) 11.2 (0.4409) Spring A 31605-41X05 45.6 (1.795) 34.3 (1.350) Spring B 31605-41X00 53.8 (2.118) 40.3 (1.587) Spring C 31605-41X01 29.7 (1.1693) 27.6 (1.087) Band servo D AT-151 I J K L M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RL4R01A] Item Parts Accumulator Part No.* Free length Outer diameter Accumulator A 31605-41X02 43.0 (1.693) 18.0 (0.709) Accumulator B 31605-41X15 66.0 (2.598) 20.8 (0.819) Accumulator C 31605-51X01 45.0 (1.772) 29.3 (1.154) Accumulator D 31605-41X06 58.4 (2.299) 17.3 (0.681) *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Accumulator O-ring ECS007L1 Diameter mm (in) Accumulator A B C D Small diameter end 29 (1.14) 32 (1.26) 45 (1.77) 29 (1.14) Large diameter end 45 (1.77) 50 (1.97) 50 (1.97) 45 (1.77) Clutch and Brakes ECS007L2 REVERSE CLUTCH Code number 49X11 Number of drive plates 2 Number of driven plates 2 Thickness of drive plate (in) Clearance mm mm (in) Standard 1.90 - 2.05 (0.0748 - 0.0807) Wear limit 1.80 (0.0709) Standard 0.5 - 0.8 (0.020 - 0.031) Allowable limit 1.2 (0.047) Thickness of retaining plate Thickness mm (in) Part No.* 4.8 (0.189) 5.0 (0.197) 5.2 (0.205) 5.4 (0.213) 5.6 (0.220) 31537-42X02 31537-42X03 31537-42X04 31537-42X05 31537-42X06 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. HIGH CLUTCH Code number 49X11 Number of drive plates 5 Number of driven plates 5 Thickness of drive plate (in) Clearance mm mm (in) Standard 1.52 - 1.67 (0.0598 - 0.0657) Wear limit 1.40 (0.0551) Standard 1.8 - 2.2 (0.071 - 0.087) Allowable limit 3.2 (0.126) Thickness of retaining plate *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. AT-152 Thickness mm (in) Part No.* 3.4 (0.134) 3.6 (0.142) 3.8 (0.150) 4.0 (0.157) 4.2 (0.165) 4.4 (0.173) 4.6 (0.181) 4.8 (0.189) 31537-41X71 31537-41X61 31537-41X62 31537-41X63 31537-41X64 31537-41X65 31537-41X66 31537-41X67 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RL4R01A] FORWARD CLUTCH Code number Number of drive plates 5 Number of driven plates 5 Thickness of drive plate (in) Clearance A 49X11 mm mm (in) B Standard 1.52 - 1.67 (0.0598 - 0.0657) Wear limit 1.40 (0.0551) Standard 0.35 - 0.75 (0.0138 - 0.0295) Allowable limit AT 1.75 (0.069) Thickness of retaining plate Thickness mm (in) Part No.* 8.0 (0.315) 8.1 (0.319) 8.2 (0.323) 8.3 (0.327) 8.4 (0.331) 8.5 (0.335) 8.6 (0.339) 8.7 (0.343) 8.8 (0.346) 8.9 (0.350) 9.0 (0.354) 9.1 (0.358) 9.2 (0.362) 31537-41X00 31537-42X60 31537-41X01 31537-42X61 31537-41X02 31537-42X62 31537-41X03 31537-42X63 31537-41X04 31537-42X64 31537-41X05 31537-42X65 31537-41X06 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. D E F G H OVERRUN CLUTCH Code number 49X11 Number of drive plates Number of driven plates Thickness of drive plate (in) Clearance I 3 5 mm mm (in) Standard 1.90 - 2.05 (0.0748 - 0.0807) Wear limit 1.80 (0.0709) Standard 1.0 - 1.4 (0.039 - 0.055) Allowable limit K 2.0 (0.079) Thickness of retaining plate Thickness mm (in) Part No.* 4.2 (0.165) 4.4 (0.173) 4.6 (0.181) 4.8 (0.189) 5.0 (0.197) 31537-41X80 31537-41X81 31537-41X82 31537-41X83 31537-41X84 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. LOW & REVERSE BRAKE Code number 49X11 Number of drive plates 5 Number of driven plates 7 Thickness of drive plate (in) Clearance mm (in) mm Standard 1.52 - 1.67 (0.0598 - 0.0657) Wear limit 1.40 (0.0551) Standard 0.5 - 0.8 (0.020 - 0.031) Allowable limit 1.8 (0.071) AT-153 J L M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RL4R01A] Thickness mm (in) Part No.* 7.2 (0.283) 7.4 (0.291) 7.6 (0.299) 7.8 (0.307) 8.0 (0.315) 8.2 (0.323) 8.4 (0.331) 8.6 (0.339) 8.8 (0.346) 9.0 (0.354) 9.2 (0.362) 31667-41X13 31667-41X14 31667-41X07 31667-41X08 31667-41X00 31667-41X01 31667-41X02 31667-41X03 31667-41X04 31667-41X05 31667-41X06 Thickness of retaining plate *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. BRAKE BAND Code number 49X11 Anchor end pin nut tightening torque Anchor end pin tightening torque N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) 40 - 51 (4.1 - 5.2, 30 - 37) N·m (kg-m, in-lb) 4 - 6 (0.4 - 0.6, 35 - 52) Number of returning revolutions for anchor end pin 2.5 Oil Pump and Low One-way Clutch Oil pump clearance mm (in) Seal ring clearance mm (in) ECS007L3 Cam ring — oil pump housing Standard 0.01 - 0.024 (0.0004 - 0.0009) Rotor, vanes and control piston — oil pump housing Standard 0.03 - 0.044 (0.0012 - 0.0017) Standard 0.10 - 0.25 (0.0039 - 0.0098) Allowable limit 0.25 (0.0098) Total End Play ECS007L4 Total end play “T1 ” 0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in) Thickness of oil pump cover bearing race Thickness mm (in) Part No.* 0.8 (0.031) 1.0 (0.039) 1.2 (0.047) 1.4 (0.055) 1.6 (0.063) 1.8 (0.071) 2.0 (0.079) 31435-41X01 31435-41X02 31435-41X03 31435-41X04 31435-41X05 31435-41X06 31435-41X07 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Parking Gear ECS007L5 Standard Seal ring — ring groove clearance mm (in) 0.15 - 0.20 (0.006 - 0.008) Allowable limit 0.20 (0.008) Reverse Clutch Drum End Play Reverse clutch drum end play “T2 ” Thickness of oil pump thrust washer ECS007L6 0.55 - 0.90 mm (0.0217 - 0.0354 in) Thickness mm (in) Part No.* 0.9 (0.035) 1.1 (0.043) 1.3 (0.051) 1.5 (0.059) 1.7 (0.067) 1.9 (0.075) 31528-21X01 31528-21X02 31528-21X03 31528-21X04 31528-21X05 31528-21X06 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Removal and Installation ECS007L7 AT-154 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RL4R01A] Number of returning revolutions for lock nut Manual control cable Lock nut tightening torque lb) Distance between end of converter housing and torque converter N·m (kg-m, ft- mm (in) 1 A 10.8 - 12.7 (1.09 - 1.29, 8.0 - 9.3) 26.0 (1.024) or more B AT D E F G H I J K L M AT-155 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX [RE4R01A] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC PFP:00000 ECS007L8 ALPHABETICAL INDEX FOR DTC DTC Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II GST*1 Reference page A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 AT-270 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 AT-276 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 AT-281 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 AT-286 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 AT-298 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 AT-255 ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 AT-266 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 AT-306 O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC P1760 AT-329 PNP SW/CIRC P0705 AT-249 SFT SOL A/CIRC*2 P0750 AT-311 SFT SOL B/CIRC*2 P0755 AT-316 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 AT-293 TP SEN/CIRC A/T*2 P1705 AT-321 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*3 P0720 AT-261 ● *1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012. ● *2: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates. ● *3: The MIL illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at the same time. AT-156 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX [RE4R01A] P NO. INDEX FOR DTC A DTC Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II GST*1 Reference page P0705 PNP SW/CIRC AT-249 P0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC AT-255 P0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*3 AT-261 P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG AT-266 P0731 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN AT-270 P0732 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN AT-276 P0733 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN AT-281 P0734 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN AT-286 P0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC AT-293 P0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN AT-298 P0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC AT-306 P0750 SFT SOL A/CIRC*2 AT-311 P0755 SFT SOL B/CIRC*2 AT-316 P1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T*2 AT-321 P1760 O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC AT-329 B AT D E F G H ● *1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012. ● *2: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates. ● *3: The MIL illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at the same time. I J K L M AT-157 PRECAUTIONS [RE4R01A] PFP:00001 PRECAUTIONS Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ECS007L9 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system may include seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. If equipped with dual stage front air bag modules, the SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. The vehicle may be equipped with a passenger air bag deactivation switch. Because no rear seat exists where a rear-facing child restraint can be placed, the switch is designed to turn off the passenger air bag so that a rear-facing child restraint can be used in the front passenger seat. The switch is located in the center of the instrument panel, near the ashtray. When the switch is turned to the ON position, the passenger air bag is enabled and could inflate for certain types of collision. When the switch is turned to the OFF position, the passenger air bag is disabled and will not inflate. A passenger air bag OFF indicator on the instrument panel lights up when the passenger air bag is switched OFF. The driver air bag always remains enabled and is not affected by the passenger air bag deactivation switch. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. ● The vehicle may be equipped with a passenger air bag deactivation switch which can be operated by the customer. When the passenger air bag is switched OFF, the passenger air bag is disabled and will not inflate. When the passenger air bag is switched ON, the passenger air bag is enabled and could inflate for certain types of collision. After SRS maintenance or repair, make sure the passenger air bag deactivation switch is in the same position (ON or OFF) as when the vehicle arrived for service. Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of A/T and Engine ECS007LA The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration. CAUTION: ● Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal before any repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will cause the MIL to light up. ● Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will cause the MIL to light up due to an open circuit (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease, dirt, bent terminals, etc.). ● Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. Interference of the harness with a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to a short circuit. ● Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube may cause the MIL to light up due to a malfunction of the EGR system or fuel injection system, etc. ● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the TCM and ECM before returning the vehicle to the customer. AT-158 PRECAUTIONS [RE4R01A] Precautions ● ECS007LB A Before connecting or disconnecting the TCM harness connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative battery terminal. Failure to do so may damage the TCM, because battery voltage is applied to TCM even if ignition switch is turned off. B AT D SEF289H ● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or from TCM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or break). Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on TCM pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors. E F G AAT470A ● Before replacing TCM, perform TCM input/output signal inspection and determine whether TCM functions properly or not. Refer to AT-242, "TCM INSPECTION TABLE" . H I J K MEF040DA L ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform “DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. The DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” if the repair is completed. Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the transmission. It is important to prevent the internal parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter. Disassembly should be done in a clean work area. SAT964I Use lint-free cloth or towels for wiping parts clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere with the operation of the transmission. Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly. All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or reassembly. Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the transmission is disassembled. It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated. AT-159 M PRECAUTIONS [RE4R01A] ● ● ● ● ● ● ● The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced. Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent springs and small parts from becoming scattered or lost. Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight. Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings and seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Do not use grease. Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling. Clean or replace ATF cooler if excessive foreign material is found in oil pan or clogging strainer. Refer to AT-160, "ATF COOLER SERVICE" . After overhaul, refill the transmission with new ATF. When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the fluid is drained. Old A/T fluid will remain in torque converter and ATF cooling system. Always follow the procedures when changing A/T fluid. Refer to MA-37, "Checking A/T Fluid" . Service Notice or Precautions ECS007LC FAIL-SAFE The TCM has an electronic Fail-Safe (limp home mode). This allows the vehicle to be driven even if a major electrical input/output device circuit is damaged. Under Fail-Safe, the vehicle always runs in third gear, even with a shift lever position of 1, 2 or D. The customer may complain of sluggish or poor acceleration. When the ignition key is turned ON following Fail-Safe operation, O/D OFF indicator lamp blinks for about 8 seconds. Refer to AT-198, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . The blinking of the O/D OFF indicator lamp for about 8 seconds will appear only once and be cleared. The customer may resume normal driving conditions. Always follow the “Work Flow”. Refer to AT-208, "Work Flow" . The SELF-DIAGNOSIS results will be as follows: The first SELF-DIAGNOSIS will indicate damage to the vehicle speed sensor or the revolution sensor. During the next SELF-DIAGNOSIS, performed after checking the sensor, no damages will be indicated. TORQUE CONVERTER SERVICE The torque converter should be replaced under any of the following conditions: ● External leaks in the hub weld area. ● Converter hub is scored or damaged. ● Converter pilot is broken, damaged or fits poorly into crankshaft. ● Steel particles are found after flushing the cooler and cooler lines. ● Pump is damaged or steel particles are found in the converter. ● Vehicle has TCC shudder and/or no TCC apply. Replace only after all hydraulic and electrical diagnoses have been made (Converter clutch material may be glazed). ● Converter is contaminated with engine coolant containing antifreeze. ● Internal failure of stator roller clutch. ● Heavy clutch debris due to overheating (blue converter). ● Steel particles or clutch lining material found in fluid filter or on magnet when no internal parts in unit are worn or damaged — indicates that lining material came from converter. The torque converter should not be replaced if: ● The fluid has an odor, is discolored, and there is no evidence of metal or clutch facing particles. ● The threads in one or more of the converter bolt holes are damaged. ● Transmission failure did not display evidence of damaged or worn internal parts, steel particles or clutch plate lining material in unit and inside the fluid filter. ● Vehicle has been exposed to high mileage (only). The exception may be where the torque converter clutch dampener plate lining has seen excess wear by vehicles operated in heavy and/or constant traffic, such as taxi, delivery or police use. ATF COOLER SERVICE If A/T fluid contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.) or if an A/T is repaired, overhauled, or replaced, inspect and clean the A/T oil cooler mounted in the radiator or replace radiator. Flush cooler lines using clean- AT-160 PRECAUTIONS [RE4R01A] ing solvent and compressed air after repair. Check Service Bulletins for latest A/T oil cooler cleaning procedure. For radiator replacement refer to CO-30, "RADIATOR" . A OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSIS A/T self-diagnosis is performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. The results can be read through the blinking pattern of the O/D OFF indicator or the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Refer to the table on B AT-189 for the indicator used to display each self-diagnostic result. ● The self-diagnostic results indicated by the MIL are automatically stored in both the ECM and TCM memAT ories. Always perform the procedure “HOW TO ERASE DTC”. Refer to AT-187, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" to complete the repair and avoid unnecessary blinking of the MIL. ● The following self-diagnostic items can be detected using ECM self-diagnostic results mode* only when D the O/D OFF indicator lamp does not indicate any malfunctions. – Park/neutral position (PNP) switch E – A/T 1st, 2nd, 3rd, or 4th gear function – A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up) *: For details of OBD-II, refer to EC-619, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM" (VG33E only) or ECF 1220, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM" (VG33ER only). ● Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slidelocking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-4, "HARNESS CONNECTOR" . G ● Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● Refer to GI-13, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" . ● Refer to PG-9, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" for power distribution circuit. When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● Refer toGI-9, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" . ● Refer to GI-25, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" . ECS007LD H I J K L M AT-161 PREPARATION [RE4R01A] PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 ECS007LE The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Description Tool name ST2505S001 (J34301-C) Oil pressure gauge set 1 ST25051001 ( — ) Oil pressure gauge 2 ST25052000 ( — ) Hose 3 ST25053000 ( — ) Joint pipe 4 ST25054000 ( — ) Adapter 5 ST25055000 ( — ) Adapter Measuring line pressure ZZA0600D ST07870000 (J37068) Transmission case stand Disassembling and assembling A/T a: 182 mm (7.17 in) b: 282 mm (11.10 in) c: 230 mm (9.06 in) d: 100 mm (3.94 in) NT421 KV31102100 (J37065) Torque converter one-way clutch check tool Checking one-way clutch in torque converter NT098 ST25850000 (J25721-A) Sliding hammer Removing oil pump assembly a: 179 mm (7.05 in) b: 70 mm (2.76 in) c: 40 mm (1.57 in) dia. d: M12 x 1.75P NT422 KV31102400 (J34285 and J34285-87) Clutch spring compressor Removing and installing clutch return springs a: 320 mm (12.60 in) b: 174 mm (6.85 in) NT423 AT-162 PREPARATION [RE4R01A] Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name ST33200000 (J26082) Drift Description A Installing oil pump housing oil seal Installing rear oil seal a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia. b: 44.5 mm (1.752 in) dia. B AT NT091 (J34291) Shim setting gauge set Selecting oil pump cover bearing race and oil pump thrust washer D E NT101 F G H I J K L M AT-163 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4R01A] OVERALL SYSTEM A/T Electrical Parts Location PFP:00000 ECS007LF WAT494 AT-164 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4R01A] Circuit Diagram ECS007LG A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0090E AT-165 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4R01A] Cross-sectional View ECS007LH LCIA0288E AT-166 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4R01A] Hydraulic Control Circuit ECS007LI A B AT D E F G H I J K L M LCIA0264E AT-167 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4R01A] Shift Mechanism ECS007LJ The automatic transmission uses compact, dual planetary gear systems to improve power-transmission efficiency, simplify construction and reduce weight. It also employs an optimum shift control and superwide gear ratios. They improve starting performance and acceleration during medium and high-speed operation. Two one-way clutches are also employed: one is used for the forward clutch and the other for the low clutch. These one-way clutches, combined with four accumulators, reduce shifting shock to a minimum. CONSTRUCTION SAT509I 1. Torque converter clutch piston 2. Torque converter 3. Oil pump 4. Input shaft 5. Brake band 6. Reverse clutch 7. High clutch 8. Front pinion gear 9. Front sun gear 10. Front internal gear 11. Front planetary carrier 12. Rear sun gear 13. Rear pinion gear 14. Rear internal gear 15. Rear planetary carrier 16. Forward clutch 17. Forward one-way clutch 18. Overrun clutch 21. Parking pawl 19. Low one-way clutch 20. Low & reverse brake 22. Parking gear 23. Output shaft AT-168 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4R01A] FUNCTION OF CLUTCH AND BRAKE Clutch and brake components Abbr. A Function Reverse clutch 6 R/C To transmit input power to front sun gear 9 . High clutch 7 H/C To transmit input power to front planetary carrier 11 . Forward clutch 16 F/C To connect front planetary carrier 11 with forward one-way clutch 17 . Overrun clutch 18 O/C To connect front planetary carrier 11 with rear internal gear 14 . Brake band 5 B/B To lock front sun gear 9 . Forward one-way clutch 17 F/O.C When forward clutch 16 is engaged, to stop rear internal gear 14 from rotating in opposite direction against engine revolution. B Low one-way clutch 19 L/O.C To stop front planetary carrier 11 from rotating in opposite direction against engine revolution. Low & reverse brake 20 L & R/B To lock front planetary carrier 11 . AT D E CLUTCH AND BAND CHART Band servo Shift position Reverse clutch High clutch Forward clutch Overrun clutch 2nd apply 3rd releas e 4th apply Forward oneway clutch Low oneway clutch Low & revers e brake F Lock-up Remarks G P PARK POSITION R REVERSE POSITION N NEUTRAL POSITION 1st *1D B 2nd *1A B 3rd *1A 4th C C *3C C B 1st D B 2nd A B *5 B 2nd B Automatic shift 1⇔2⇔3 ⇔4 B Automatic shift 1⇔2 B Locks (held stationary) in 1st speed 1⇐2 2 1st 1 ● *1: Operates when overdrive control switch is being set in OFF position. ● *2: Oil pressure is applied to both 2nd “apply” side and 3rd “release” side of band servo piston. However, brake band does not contract because oil pressure area on the “release” side is greater than that on the “apply” side. ● *3: Oil pressure is applied to 4th “apply” side in condition *2 above, and brake band contracts. ● *4: A/T will not shift to 4th when overdrive control switch is set in OFF position. ● *5: Operates when overdrive control switch is OFF. ● : Operates. ● A: Operates when throttle opening is less than 3/16, activating engine brake. ● B: Operates during “progressive” acceleration. ● C: Operates but does not affect power transmission. ● D: Operates when throttle opening is less than 3/16, but does not affect engine brake. AT-169 I B D*4 *2C H J K L M OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4R01A] POWER TRANSMISSION P and N Positions ● ● P position Similar to the N position, no control members operate. The parking pawl interconnected with the select lever engages with the parking gear to mechanically hold the output shaft so that the power train is locked. N position No control members operate. Power from the input shaft is not transmitted to the output shaft since the clutch does not operate. SAT039J AT-170 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4R01A] 11 Position A B AT D E F G H I J K L M SAT100J Forward clutch Forward one-way clutch Overrun clutch Low and reverse brake As overrun clutch engages, rear internal gear is locked by the operation of low and reverse brake. This is different from that of D1 and 21 . Engine brake Overrun clutch always engages, therefore engine brake can be obtained when decelerating. AT-171 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4R01A] D1 and 21 Positions SAT096J Forward one-way clutch Forward clutch Low one-way clutch Rear internal gear is locked to rotate counterclockwise because of the functioning of these three clutches. (Start-up at D1 ) Overrun clutch engagement conditions (Engine brake) D1 : Overdrive control switch in OFF Throttle opening less than 3/16 21 : Throttle opening less than 3/16 At D1 and 21 positions, engine brake is not activated due to free turning of low one-way clutch. AT-172 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4R01A] D2 , 22 and 12 Positions A B AT D E F G H I J K L M SAT097J Forward clutch Forward one-way clutch Brake band Rear sun gear drives rear planetary carrier and combined front internal gear. Front internal gear now rotates around front sun gear accompanying front planetary carrier. As front planetary carrier transfers the power to rear internal gear through forward clutch and forward one-way clutch, this rotation of rear internal gear increases the speed of rear planetary carrier compared with that of the 1st speed. Overrun clutch engagement conditions D2 : Overdrive control switch in OFF Throttle opening less than 3/16 22 : Throttle opening less than 3/16 12 : Always engaged AT-173 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4R01A] D3 Position SAT098J High clutch Forward clutch Forward one-way clutch Input power is transmitted to front planetary carrier through high clutch. And front planetary carrier is connected to rear internal gear by operation of forward clutch and forward one-way clutch. This rear internal gear rotation and another input (the rear sun gear) accompany rear planetary carrier to turn at the same speed. Overrun clutch engagement conditions D3 : Overdrive control switch in OFF Throttle opening less than 3/16 AT-174 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4R01A] D4 (O/D) Position A B AT D E F G H I J K L M SAT099J High clutch Brake band Forward clutch (Does not affect power transmission) Input power is transmitted to front carrier through high clutch. This front planetary carrier turns around the sun gear which is fixed by brake band and makes front internal gear (output) turn faster. Engine brake At D4 position, there is no one-way clutch in the power transmission line and engine brake can be obtained when decelerating. AT-175 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4R01A] R Position SAT101J Reverse clutch Low and reverse brake Front planetary carrier is stationary because of the operation of low and reverse brake. Input power is transmitted to front sun gear through reverse clutch, which drives front internal gear in the opposite direction. Engine brake As there is no one-way clutch in the power transmission line, engine brake can be obtained when decelerating. AT-176 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4R01A] Control System ECS007LK A OUTLINE The automatic transmission senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors. It always controls the optimum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks. SENSORS TCM ACTUATORS PNP switch Throttle position sensor Closed throttle position switch Wide open throttle position switch Engine speed signal A/T fluid temperature sensor Revolution sensor Vehicle speed sensor Overdrive control switch ASCD control unit Stop lamp switch (VG33ER only) Turbine revolution sensor (VG33ER only) Shift control Line pressure control Lock-up control Overrun clutch control Timing control Fail-safe control Self-diagnosis CONSULT-II communication line Duet-EA control Shift solenoid valve A Shift solenoid valve B Overrun clutch solenoid valve Torque converter clutch solenoid valve Line pressure solenoid valve O/D OFF indicator lamp B AT D E F CONTROL SYSTEM G H I J K L M WAT495 AT-177 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4R01A] TCM FUNCTION The function of the TCM is to: ● Receive input signals sent from various switches and sensors. ● Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, and engine brake operation. ● Send required output signals to the respective solenoids. INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL OF TCM Sensors and solenoid valves Input Output Function PNP switch Detects select lever position and sends a signal to TCM. Throttle position sensor Detects throttle valve position and sends a signal to TCM. Closed throttle position switch Detects throttle valve's fully-closed position and sends a signal to TCM. Wide open throttle position switch Detects a throttle valve position of greater than 1/2 of full throttle and sends a signal to TCM. Engine speed signal From ECM. A/T fluid temperature sensor Detects transmission fluid temperature and sends a signal to TCM. Revolution sensor Detects output shaft rpm and sends a signal to TCM. Vehicle speed sensor Used as an auxiliary vehicle speed sensor. Sends a signal when revolution sensor (installed on transmission) malfunctions. Overdrive control switch Sends a signal, which prohibits a shift to D4 (overdrive) position, to the TCM. ASCD control unit Sends the cruise signal and D4 (overdrive) cancellation signal from ASCD control unit to TCM. Turbine revolution sensor (VG33ER only) Sends the input shaft revolution signal. Stop lamp switch (VG33ER only) Sends the lock-up release signal to the TCM at the time of D4 (lock-up) Shift solenoid valve A/B Selects shifting point suited to driving conditions in relation to a signal sent from TCM. Line pressure solenoid valve Regulates (or decreases) line pressure suited to driving conditions in relation to a signal sent from TCM. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve Regulates (or decreases) lock-up pressure suited to driving conditions in relation to a signal sent from TCM. Overrun clutch solenoid valve Controls an “engine brake” effect suited to driving conditions in relation to a signal sent from TCM. O/D OFF indicator lamp Shows TCM faults, when A/T control components malfunction. Control Mechanism ECS007LL LINE PRESSURE CONTROL TCM has the various line pressure control characteristics to meet the driving conditions. An ON-OFF duty signal is sent to the line pressure solenoid valve based on TCM characteristics. Hydraulic pressure on the clutch and brake is electronically controlled through the line pressure solenoid valve to accommodate engine torque. This results in smooth shift operation. Normal Control The line pressure to throttle opening characteristics is set for suitable clutch operation. SAT003J AT-178 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4R01A] Back-up Control (Engine brake) A If the selector lever is shifted to 2 position while driving in D4 (O/D) or D3 , great driving force is applied to the clutch inside the transmission. Clutch operating pressure (line pressure) must be increased to deal with this driving force. B AT SAT004J D During Shift Change The line pressure is temporarily reduced corresponding to a change in engine torque when shifting gears (that is, when the shift solenoid valve is switched for clutch operation) to reduce shifting shock. E F G SAT005J H At Low Fluid Temperature ● ● Fluid viscosity and frictional characteristics of the clutch facing change with fluid temperature. Clutch engaging or band-contacting pressure is compensated for, according to fluid temperature, to stabilize shifting quality. The line pressure is reduced below 60°C (140°F) to prevent shifting shock due to low viscosity of automatic transmission fluid when temperature is low. I J K L SAT006J M ● Line pressure is increased to a maximum irrespective of the throttle opening when fluid temperature drops to −10°C (14°F). This pressure rise is adopted to prevent a delay in clutch and brake operation due to extreme drop of fluid viscosity at low temperature. SAT007J SHIFT CONTROL The shift is regulated entirely by electronic control to accommodate vehicle speed and varying engine operations. This is accomplished by electrical signals transmitted by the revolution sensor and throttle position sensor. This results in improved acceleration performance and fuel economy. AT-179 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4R01A] Control of Shift Solenoid Valves A and B The TCM activates shift solenoid valves A and B according to signals from the throttle position sensor and revolution sensor to select the optimum gear position on the basis of the shift schedule memorized in the TCM. The shift solenoid valve performs simple ON-OFF operation. When set to ON, the drain circuit closes and pilot pressure is applied to the shift valve. [Relation between shift solenoid valves A and B and gear positions] SAT008J Gear position Shift solenoid valve D 1 , 21 , 11 D 2 , 2 2 , 12 D3 D4 (O/D) N-P A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) ON (Closed) B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) Control of Shift Valves A and B SAT047J Pilot pressure generated by the operation of shift solenoid valves A and B is applied to the end face of shift valves A and B. The drawing shows the operation of shift valve B. When the shift solenoid valve is “ON”, pilot pressure applied to the end face of the shift valve overcomes spring force, moving the valve upward. LOCK-UP CONTROL The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is locked to eliminate torque converter slip to increase power transmission efficiency. The solenoid valve is controlled by an ON-OFF duty signal sent from the TCM. The signal is converted to oil pressure signal which controls the torque converter clutch piston. Conditions for Lock-up Operation When vehicle is driven in 4th gear position, vehicle speed and throttle opening are detected. If the detected values fall within the lock-up zone memorized in the TCM, lock-up is performed. Overdrive control switch ON Selector lever Gear position Vehicle speed sensor Throttle position sensor Closed throttle position switch A/T fluid temperature sensor OFF D position D3 D4 More than set value Less than set opening OFF More than 40°C (104°F) AT-180 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4R01A] Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Control A The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM. The plunger closes the drain circuit during the OFF period, and opens the circuit during the ON period. If the percentage of OFF-time increases in one cycle, the pilot pressure drain time is reduced and pilot pressure remains high. B AT SAT010J The torque converter clutch piston is designed to slip to adjust the ratio of ON-OFF, thereby reducing lock-up shock. OFF-time INCREASING ↓ Amount of drain DECREASING ↓ Pilot pressure HIGH ↓ Lock-up RELEASING D E F G SAT011J H Torque Converter Clutch Control Valve Operation I J K SAT048J Lock-up Released The OFF-duration of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is long, and pilot pressure is high. The pilot pressure pushes the end face of the torque converter clutch control valve in combination with spring force to move the valve to the left. As a result, converter pressure is applied to chamber A (torque converter clutch piston release side). Accordingly, the torque converter clutch piston remains unlocked. Lock-up Applied When the OFF-duration of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is short, pilot pressure drains and becomes low. Accordingly, the control valve moves to the right by the pilot pressure of the other circuit and converter pressure. As a result, converter pressure is applied to chamber B, keeping the torque converter clutch piston applied. Also smooth lock-up is provided by transient application and release of the lock-up. OVERRUN CLUTCH CONTROL (ENGINE BRAKE CONTROL) Forward one-way clutch is used to reduce shifting shocks in downshifting operations. This clutch transmits engine torque to the wheels. However, drive force from the wheels is not transmitted to the engine because the one-way clutch rotates idle. This means the engine brake is not effective. The overrun clutch operates when the engine brake is needed. AT-181 L M OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4R01A] Overrun Clutch Operating Conditions SAT014J Gear position D position D1 , D2 , D3 gear position 2 position 21 , 22 gear position 1 position 11 , 12 gear position Throttle opening Less than 3/16 At any position Overrun Clutch Solenoid Valve Control The overrun clutch solenoid valve is operated by an ON-OFF signal transmitted by the TCM to provide overrun clutch control (engine brake control). When this solenoid valve is ON, the pilot pressure drain port closes. When it is OFF, the drain port opens. During the solenoid valve ON pilot pressure is applied to the end face of the overrun clutch control valve. SAT015J Overrun Clutch Control Valve Operation When the solenoid valve is ON, pilot pressure A is applied to the overrun clutch control valve. This pushes up the overrun clutch control valve. The line pressure is then shut off so that the clutch does not engage. When the solenoid valve is OFF, pilot pressure A is not generated. At this point, the overrun clutch control valve moves downward by spring force. As a result, overrun clutch operation pressure is provided by the overrun clutch reducing valve. This causes the overrun clutch to engage. In the 1 position, the overrun clutch control valve remains pushed down so that the overrun clutch is engaged at all times. SAT049J AT-182 OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4R01A] Control Valve ECS007LM A FUNCTION OF CONTROL VALVE Valve name ● Pressure regulator valve ● Pressure regulator plug ● Pressure regulator sleeve plug Function Regulate oil discharged from the oil pump to provide optimum line pressure for all driving conditions. Pressure modifier valve Used as a signal supplementary valve to the pressure regulator valve. Regulates pressure-modifier pressure (signal pressure) which controls optimum line pressure for all driving conditions. Modifier accumulator piston Smooths hydraulic pressure regulated by the pressure modifier valve to prevent pulsations. Pilot valve Regulates line pressure to maintain a constant pilot pressure level which controls lock-up mechanism, overrun clutch, 3-2 timing required for shifting. Accumulator control valve Accumulator control sleeve Regulate accumulator back-pressure to pressure suited to driving conditions. Manual valve Directs line pressure to oil circuits corresponding to select positions. Hydraulic pressure drains when the shift lever is in Neutral. Shift valve A Simultaneously switches three oil circuits using output pressure of shift solenoid valve A to meet driving conditions (vehicle speed, throttle opening, etc.). Provides automatic downshifting and up-shifting (1st → 2nd → 3rd → 4th gears/4th → 3rd → 2nd → 1st gears) in combination with shift valve B. Shift valve B Simultaneously switches three oil circuits using output pressure of shift solenoid valve B in relation to driving conditions (vehicle speed, throttle opening, etc.). Provides automatic downshifting and up-shifting (1st → 2nd → 3rd → 4th gears/4th → 3rd → 2nd → 1st gears) in combination with shift valve A. B AT D E F G H Shuttle shift valve S Switches hydraulic circuits to provide 3-2 timing control and overrun clutch control in relation to the throttle opening. Inactivates the overrun clutch to prevent interlocking in 4th gear when the throttle is wide open. Overrun clutch control valve Switches hydraulic circuits to prevent engagement of the overrun clutch simultaneously with application of the brake band in 4th gear. (Interlocking occurs if the overrun clutch engages during D4 gear operation.) J 4-2 relay valve Memorizes that the transmission is in 4th gear. Prevents the transmission from downshifting from 4th gear to 3rd and then to 2nd in combination with 4-2 sequence valve and shift valves A and B when downshifting from 4th to 2nd gear. K 4-2 sequence valve Prevents band servo pressure from draining before high clutch operating pressure and band servo releasing pressure drain (from the same circuit) during downshifting from 4th to 2nd gear. Servo charger valve An accumulator and a one-way orifice are used in the 2nd gear band servo oil circuit to dampen shifting shock when shifting from 1st to 2nd gear. To maintain adequate flow rate when downshifting from 4th or 3rd gear to 2nd gear, the servo charger valve directs 2nd gear band servo hydraulic pressure to the circuit without going through the one-way orifice when downshifting from 3rd or a higher gear. 3-2 timing valve Prevents a late operation of the brake band when shifting selector lever from D to 1 or 2 position while driving in D3 . 1 reducing valve Reduces low & reverse brake pressure to dampen engine-brake shock when downshifting from the 1 position 2nd gear to 1st gear. Overrun clutch reducing valve Reduces oil pressure directed to the overrun clutch and prevents engine-brake shock. In 1 and 2 positions, line pressure acts on the overrun clutch reducing valve to increase the pressure-regulating point, with resultant engine brake capability. Torque converter relief valve Prevents an excessive rise in torque converter pressure. AT-183 I L M OVERALL SYSTEM [RE4R01A] Valve name Function Torque converter clutch control valve, torque converter clutch control plug and torque converter clutch control sleeve Activate or inactivate the lock-up function. Also provide smooth lock-up through transient application and release of the lock-up system. Shuttle shift valve D Switches hydraulic circuits so that output pressure of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve acts on the lock-up valve in the D position of 2nd, 3rd and 4th gears. (In the D position 1st gear, lock-up is inhibited.) ● Lock-up control is not affected in D position 2nd, 3rd or 4th gears, unless output pressure of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is generated by a signal from the control unit. AT-184 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4R01A] ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Introduction PFP:00000 A ECS007LN The A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems. The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD-II) performed by the TCM in combination B with the ECM. The malfunction is indicated by the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) and is stored as a DTC in the ECM memory but not the TCM memory. The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the O/D OFF indicator lamp. The malfunction is stored in the TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD-II self-diagnostic items. For detail, AT refer to AT-190, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT TEST MODE" . OBD-II Function for A/T System ECS007LO The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD-II) functions for the A/T system. One function is to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The signal is sent to the ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part. The other function is to indicate a diagnostic result by means of the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) on the instrument panel. Sensors, switches and solenoid valves are used as sensing elements. The MIL automatically illuminates in One or Two Trip Detection Logic when a malfunction is sensed in relation to A/T system parts. One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II D E F ECS007LP ONE TRIP DETECTION LOGIC If a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, the MIL will illuminate and the malfunction will be stored in the ECM memory as a DTC. The TCM is not provided with such a memory function. G TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC H When a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, it is stored in the ECM memory as a 1st trip DTC (diagnostic trouble code) or 1st trip freeze frame data. At this point, the MIL will not illuminate. — First Trip If the same malfunction as that experienced during the first test drive is sensed during the second test drive, the MIL will illuminate. — Second Trip A/T-related parts for which the MIL illuminates during the first or second test drive are listed below. I MIL Items One trip detection Shift solenoid valve A — DTC: P0750 (1108) X Shift solenoid valve B — DTC: P0755 (1201) X Throttle position sensor or switch — DTC: P1705 (1206) X Except above J Two trip detection K X L The “trip” in the “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed during vehicle operation. OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) M ECS007LQ HOW TO READ DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods. 1. ● ● ( with CONSULT-II or GST) CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0705, P0710, P0720, P0725, etc. These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012. (CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.) 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. Output of the diagnostic trouble code indicates that the indicated circuit has a malfunction. However, in case of the Mode II and GST they do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring or occurred in the past and returned to normal. CONSULT-II can identify them as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if available) is recommended. AT-185 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4R01A] A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in SELFDIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC. SAT014K If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”. SAT015K If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “[1t]”. SAT016K Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data The ECM has a memory function, which stores the driving condition such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle speed at the moment the ECM detects a malfunction. Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data, and the data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II or GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For detail, refer to EC-675, "CONSULT-II Function" (VG33E only) or EC-1276, "CONSULT-II Function" (VG33ER only). Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data of freeze frame data) can be stored in the ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the following priorities to update the data. Priority 1 2 3 Items Freeze frame data Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306 (0701, 0603 - 0608) Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171 (0115), P0172 (0114), P0174 (0209), P0175 (0210) Except the above items (Includes A/T related items) 1st trip freeze frame data AT-186 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4R01A] Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM memory is erased. A HOW TO ERASE DTC The diagnostic trouble code can be erased by CONSULT-II, GST or ECM DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE as B described following. ● If the battery terminal is disconnected, the diagnostic trouble code will be lost within 24 hours. ● When you erase the DTC, using CONSULT-II or GST is easier and quicker than switching the mode AT selector on the ECM. The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared from the ECM memory when erasing DTC related to OBD-II. For details, refer to EC-632, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" (VG33E only) or EC-1233, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFOR- D MATION" (VG33ER only). ● Diagnostic trouble codes (DTC) E ● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes (1st trip DTC) ● Freeze frame data ● 1st trip freeze frame data F ● System readiness test (SRT) codes ● Test values HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH CONSULT-II) ● 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. If a DTC is displayed for both ECM and TCM, it needs to be erased for both ECM and TCM. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 5 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. Turn CONSULT-II ON and touch “A/T”. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. Touch “ERASE”, (The DTC in the TCM will be erased), then touch “BACK” twice. Touch “ENGINE”. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. G H I J K L M AT-187 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4R01A] 7. Touch “ERASE”, (The DTC in the ECM will be erased). SAT017K HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST) 1. 2. 3. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 5 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. Perform “OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)”. Refer to AT-198, "OBD-II SELFDIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.) Select Mode 4 with Generic Scan Tool (GST). For details, refer to EC-685, "Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function" (VG33E only) or EC-1286, "Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function" (VG33ER only). HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS) 1. 2. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 5 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. Perform “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)”. Refer to AT-198, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.) AT-188 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4R01A] Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) 1. 2. ECS007LR A The malfunction indicator lamp will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is for checking the lamp. ● If the malfunction indicator lamp does not light up, refer to DI25, "WARNING LAMPS" or EC-634, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" (VG33E only) or EC-1235, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" (VG33ER only). B AT When the engine is started, the malfunction indicator lamp should go off. SAT964I If the lamp remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an emission-related (OBD-II) malfunction. For detail, refer to EC-619, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM" (VG33E only) or EC-1220, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM" (VG33ER only). CONSULT-II E ECS007LS After performing “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II)” [Refer to AT-189, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II)" ], place check marks for results on the Diagnostic Worksheet. Refer to AT-205, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" . Reference pages are provided following the items. NOTICE: 1. The CONSULT-II electrically displays shift timing and lock-up timing (that is, operation timing of each solenoid). Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the CONSULT-II display. If the difference is noticeable, mechanical parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunctioning. Check mechanical parts using applicable diagnostic procedures. 2. Shift schedule (which implies gear position) displayed on CONSULT-II and that indicated in Service Manual may differ slightly. This occurs because of the following reasons: – Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance, – Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point where shifts start, and – Gear position displayed on CONSULT-II indicates the point where shifts are completed. 3. Shift solenoid valve “A” or “B” is displayed on CONSULT-II at the start of shifting. Gear position is displayed upon completion of shifting (which is computed by TCM). 4. Additional CONSULT-II information can be found in the Operation Manual supplied with the CONSULT-II unit. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II) 1. D G H I J K L Turn on CONSULT-II and touch “ENGINE” for OBD-II detected items or touch “A/T” for TCM self-diagnosis. If A/T is not displayed, check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-246, "Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN" . If result is NG, refer to PG-9, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" . M SAT014K AT-189 F ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4R01A] 2. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. Display shows malfunction experienced since the last erasing operation. CONSULT-II performs REAL-TIME SELF-DIAGNOSIS. Also, any malfunction detected while in this mode will be displayed at real time. SAT987J SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT TEST MODE Detected items (Screen terms for CONSULT-II, “SELFDIAG RESULTS” test mode) TCM self-diagnosis Available by O/D OFF OBD-II (DTC) Available by malfunc- Malfunction is detected when ... “A/T” “ENGINE” PNP position switch circuit — ● PNP SW/CIRC Revolution sensor VHCL SPEED SEN·A/T ● VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT Vehicle speed sensor (Meter) VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR ● ● A/T 1ST GR FNCTN A/T 2nd gear function — ● A/T 2ND GR FNCTN A/T 3rd gear function — ● A/T 3RD GR FNCTN A/T 4th gear function — ● A/T 4TH GR FNCTN A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up) — ● SFT SOL A/CIRC Shift solenoid valve B SHIFT SOLENOID/V B ● SFT SOL B/CIRC Overrun clutch solenoid valve OVERRUN CLUTCH S/V ● A/T TCC S/V FNCTN Shift solenoid valve A SHIFT SOLENOID/V A tion indicator lamp*2, “ENGINE” on CONSULT-II or GST — P0705 TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor. X P0720 TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor. X — A/T cannot be shifted to the 1st gear position even if electrical circuit is good. — P0731*1 A/T cannot be shifted to the 2nd gear position even if electrical circuit is good. — P0732*1 A/T cannot be shifted to the 3rd gear position even if electrical circuit is good. — P0733*1 A/T cannot be shifted to the 4th gear position even if electrical circuit is good. — P0734*1 — P0744*1 TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. X P0750 TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. X P0755 TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. X P1760 TCM does not receive the correct voltage signal (based on the gear position) from the switch. — A/T 1st gear function — indicator lamp or “A/T” on CONSULT-II O/R CLUCH SOL/ CIRC ● A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good. AT-190 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4R01A] Detected items (Screen terms for CONSULT-II, “SELFDIAG RESULTS” test mode) TCM self-diagnosis Available by O/D OFF OBD-II (DTC) Available by malfunc- Malfunction is detected when ... “A/T” B “ENGINE” indicator lamp or “A/T” on CONSULT-II T/C clutch solenoid valve T/C CLUTCH SOL/V ● TCC SOLENOID/ CIRC Line pressure solenoid valve LINE PRESSURE S/ V ● L/PRESS SOL/CIRC Throttle position sensor Throttle position switch THROTTLE POSI SEN ● ● ENGINE SPEED SIG A/T fluid temperature sensor BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN ● ATF TEMP SEN/ CIRC Turbine revolution sensor (VG33ER only) TURBINE REV X D P0745 E TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor. X P1705 TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the ECM. X P0725 TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor. X P0710 ● TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor. ● TCM memory (RAM) is malfunctioning. X — — — — — K ● TCM memory (EEP ROM) is malfunctioning. — — — L ● INITIAL START — No failure (NO DTC IS DETECTED FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED**) G J TCM memory (ROM) is malfunctioning. — Initial start F I ● TCM (EEP ROM) CONT UNIT (EEP ROM) TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. AT P0740 — TCM (ROM) CONTROL UNIT (ROM) X tion indicator lamp*2, “ENGINE” on CONSULT-II or GST H — TCM (RAM) CONTROL UNIT (RAM) TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. TP SEN/CIRC A/T Engine speed signal A ● This is not a malfunction message (Whenever shutting off a power supply to the control unit, this message appears on the screen). X — X X No failure has been detected. X: Applicable —: Not applicable *1: These malfunctions cannot be displayed by MIL if another malfunction is assigned to MIL. *2: Refer to EC-634, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" (VG33E only) or EC-1235, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" (VG33ER only). AT-191 M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4R01A] DATA MONITOR MODE (A/T) Monitor item Item Display Vehicle speed sensor 1 (A/ T) (Revolution sensor) VHCL/S SE·A/T [km/h] or [mph] Vehicle speed sensor 2 (Meter) VHCL/S SE·MTR [km/h] or [mph] Throttle position sensor A/T fluid temperature sensor TCM input signals X THRTL POS SEN [V] — X — FLUID TEMP SE [V] Battery voltage BATTERY VOLT [V] Engine speed ENGINE SPEED [rpm] X X Turbine revolution sensor (VG33ER only) TURBINE REV [rpm] Overdrive control switch OVERDRIVE SW [ON/OFF] PN position switch R position switch D position switch 2 position switch 1 position switch ASCD cruise signal ● Vehicle speed computed from signal of revolution sensor is displayed. When racing engine in P or N position with vehicle stationary, CONSULT-II data may not indicate 0 km/h (0 mph). ● Vehicle speed computed from signal of vehicle speed sensor is displayed. Vehicle speed display may not be accurate under approx. 10 km/h (6 mph). It may not indicate 0 km/h (0 mph) when vehicle is stationary. ● Throttle position sensor signal voltage is displayed. ● A/T fluid temperature sensor signal voltage is displayed. ● Signal voltage lowers as fluid temperature rises. ● Source voltage of TCM is displayed. ● Engine speed, computed from engine speed signal, is displayed. Engine speed display may not be accurate under approx. 800 rpm. It may not indicate 0 rpm even when engine is not running. ● Turbine revolution computed from signal of turbine revolution sensor is displayed. Error may occur under approx. 800 rpm and will not indicate 0 rpm even if engine is not running. ● ON/OFF state computed from signal of overdrive control SW is displayed. ● ON/OFF state computed from signal of PN position SW is displayed. ● ON/OFF state computed from signal of R position SW is displayed. ● ON/OFF state computed from signal of D position SW is displayed. ● ON/OFF status, computed from signal of 2 position SW, is displayed. ● ON/OFF status, computed from signal of 1 position SW, is displayed. ● Status of ASCD cruise signal is displayed. ON ... Cruising state OFF ... Normal running state — — X X — X — PN POSI SW [ON/OFF] X — R POSITION SW [ON/OFF] X — D POSITION SW [ON/OFF] X — 2 POSITION SW [ON/OFF] X — 1 POSITION SW [ON/OFF] X — ASCD - CRUISE [ON/OFF] X Remarks — X X Description Main signals — AT-192 ● This is displayed even when no ASCD is mounted. ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4R01A] Monitor item Item ASCD - O/D cut signal Kickdown switch Closed throttle position switch Wide open throttle position switch Stop lamp switch (VG33ER only) Display ASCD - O/D CUT [ON/OFF] KICKDOWN SW [ON/OFF] CLOSED THL/ SW [ON/OFF] W/O THRL/PSW [ON/OFF] TCM input signals X X X X Selector lever position Throttle position Line pressure duty Torque converter clutch solenoid valve duty VEHICLE SPEED [km/h] or [mph] THROTTLE POSI [/8] LINE PRES DTY [%] — — Shift solenoid valve B SHIFT S/V B [ON/OFF] ● This is displayed even when no kickdown switch is equipped. ● ON/OFF status, computed from signal of closed throttle position SW, is displayed. — — ● Selector lever position data, used for computation by TCM, is displayed. ● Vehicle speed data, used for computation by TCM, is displayed. ● Throttle position data, used for computation by TCM, is displayed. X X — X — — Control value of torque converter clutch solenoid valve, computed by TCM from each input signal, is displayed. ● Control value of shift solenoid valve A, computed by TCM from each input signal, is displayed. ● Control value of shift solenoid valve B, computed by TCM from each input signal, is displayed. X X AT-193 E F G H ● A specific value used for control is displayed if failsafe is activated due to error. I J K ● A specific value used for control is displayed if failsafe is activated due to error. Control value of line pressure solenoid valve, computed by TCM from each input signal, is displayed. ● X D ON/OFF status is displayed. ON...Brake pedal is depressed. OFF...Brake pedal switch is released. Gear position data used for computation by TCM, is displayed. X AT ON/OFF status, computed from signal of wide open throttle position SW, is displayed. ● X TCC S/V DUTY [%] SHIFT S/V A [ON/OFF] ON/OFF status, computed from signal of kickdown SW, is displayed. ● — Shift solenoid valve A ● — SLCT LVR POSI — Vehicle speed This is displayed even when no ASCD is mounted. ● — B ● — GEAR A Status of ASCD O/D release signal is displayed. ON ... O/D released OFF ... O/D not released — BRAKE SW [ON/OFF] Remarks ● ● X Gear position Description Main signals L M Control value of solenoid is displayed even if solenoid circuit is disconnected. The “OFF” signal is displayed if solenoid circuit is shorted. ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4R01A] Monitor item Item Overrun clutch solenoid valve Self-diagnosis display lamp (O/D OFF indicator lamp) Display TCM input signals Description Main signals OVERRUN/C S/ V [ON/OFF] — X SELF-D DP LMP [ON/OFF] — X ● Control value of overrun clutch solenoid valve computed by TCM from each input signal is displayed. ● Control status of O/D OFF indicator lamp is displayed. Remarks X: Applicable —: Not applicable DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE WITH CONSULT-II CONSULT-II Setting Procedure CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication. ● For details, refer to the separate “CONSULT-II Operations Manual”. BBIA0369E 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector. The data link connector is located in instrument lower panel on driver side. Turn ignition switch ON. LEC104A 4. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. WKIA1606E AT-194 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4R01A] 5. Touch “A/T”. A B AT SAT014K D 6. Touch “DTC WORK SUPPORT”. E F G SAT971J 7. H Touch select item menu (1ST, 2ND, etc.). I J K SAT018K 8. Touch “START”. L M SAT589J AT-195 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4R01A] 9. Perform driving test according to “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” in “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”. SAT019K ● When testing conditions are satisfied, CONSULT-II screen changes from “OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”. SAT591J 10. Stop vehicle. If “NG” appears on the screen, malfunction may exist. Go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”. SAT592J SAT593J 11. Perform test drive to check gear shift feeling in accordance with instructions displayed. SAT594J AT-196 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4R01A] 12. Touch “YES” or “NO”. A B AT SAT595J D 13. CONSULT-II procedure ended. E F G SAT596J H I J K SAT593J If “NG” appears on the screen, a malfunction may exist. Go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”. DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE DTC work support item L Description Following items for “A/T 1st gear function (P0731)” can be confirmed. 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 ● Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted or not) ● Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG) Following items for “A/T 2nd gear function (P0732)” can be confirmed. 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 ● ● Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted or not) ● Shift solenoid valve A ● Shift solenoid valve B ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit ● Shift solenoid valve B ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit ● Shift solenoid valve A ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG) Following items for “A/T 3rd gear function (P0733)” can be confirmed. 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 Check item ● Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted or not) ● Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG) AT-197 M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4R01A] DTC work support item Description ● Shift solenoid valve A ● Shift solenoid valve B ● Overrun clutch solenoid valve ● Line pressure solenoid valve ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit Following items for “A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up) (P0744)” can be confirmed. ● Torque converter clutch solenoid valve Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted or not) ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit Following items for “A/T 4th gear function (P0734)” can be confirmed. 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 ● ● TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 Check item ● ● Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted or not) Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG) Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG) Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II ECS007LT OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH GST) Refer to EC-685, "Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function" (VG33E only) or EC-1286, "Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function" (VG33ER only), . OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS) Refer to EC-634, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" (VG33E only) or EC-1235, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" VG33ER only). TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS) 1. CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP 1. 2. 3. 4. Selector lever in P position. Start the engine. Warm engine to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Wait at least 5 seconds. Turn ignition switch to ON position (Do not start engine). SAT967I 5. Does O/D OFF indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds? WAT496 Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Go to AT-356, "1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On" . AT-198 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4R01A] 2. JUDGEMENT PROCEDURE STEP 1 A Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Depress shift lock release button. B Move selector lever from P to D position. Turn ignition switch to ON position. Do not start engine. Depress and hold overdrive control switch in OFF position (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be ON) until AT directed to release the switch (If O/D OFF indicator lamp does not come on, go to step 3 on AT-387 ). 6. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. 7. Turn ignition switch to ON position (Do not start engine). D 8. Release the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be OFF). – Wait for more than 2 seconds after ignition switch ON. E 9. Move selector lever to 2 position. 10. Depress and release the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be ON). F 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. SAT968I G 11. Depress and hold the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be OFF) until directed to release the switch. H >> GO TO 3. I J SAT969I K L M AT-199 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4R01A] 3. JUDGEMENT PROCEDURE STEP 2 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Move selector lever to 1 position. Release the overdrive control switch. Depress and release the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be ON). Depress and release the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be OFF). Depress and hold the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be ON) until directed to release the switch. Depress accelerator pedal fully and release. SAT970I 7. Release the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will begin to flash ON and OFF). >> GO TO 4. SAT981F 4. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE Check O/D OFF indicator lamp. Refer to AT-201, "JUDGEMENT OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (VG33E ONLY)" or AT-202, "JUDGEMENT OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (VG33ER ONLY)" . WAT496 >> DIAGNOSIS END. AT-200 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4R01A] JUDGEMENT OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (VG33E ONLY) A O/D OFF indicator lamp: All judgement flickers are same. 1st judgement flicker is longer than others. B AT SAT436F SAT437F All circuits that can be confirmed by self-diagnosis are OK. Revolution sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-261, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" . 2nd judgement flicker is longer than others. D 3rd judgement flicker is longer than others. E F SAT439F SAT441F Vehicle speed sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go toAT-340, "DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR" . Throttle position sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-321, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" . G 4th judgement flicker is longer than others. 5th judgement flicker is longer than others. H I SAT443F SAT445F Shift solenoid valve A circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go toAT-311, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" . Shift solenoid valve B circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-316, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" . 6th judgement flicker is longer than others. 7th judgement flicker is longer than others. J K L SAT447F SAT449F Overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-329, "DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" . Torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-293, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" . 8th judgement flicker is longer than others. 9th judgement flicker is longer than others. SAT451F SAT453F A/T fluid temperature sensor is disconnected or TCM power source circuit is damaged. Þ Go to AT-334, "DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE)" . Engine speed signal circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-266, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" . AT-201 M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4R01A] O/D OFF indicator lamp: Flickers as shown below. 10th judgement flicker is longer than others. SAT455F SAT457F Line pressure solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-306, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" . Battery power is low. Battery has been disconnected for a long time. Battery is connected conversely. (When reconnecting TCM connectors. — This is not a problem.) Lamp comes on. SAT367J PNP switch, overdrive control switch or throttle position switch circuit is disconnected or TCM is damaged. Þ Go to AT-387, "21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches Circuit Checks)" . t1 = 2.5 seconds t2 = 2.0 seconds t3 = 1.0 second t4 = 1.0 second JUDGEMENT OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (VG33ER ONLY) O/D OFF indicator lamp: All judgement flickers are same. 1st judgement flicker is longer than others. LAT425 LAT426 All circuits that can be confirmed by self-diagnosis are OK. Revolution sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-261, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" . 2nd judgement flicker is longer than others. 3rd judgement flicker is longer than others. LAT427 LAT428 Vehicle speed sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-340, "DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR" . Throttle position sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-321, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" . AT-202 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [RE4R01A] O/D OFF indicator lamp: 4th judgement flicker is longer than others. 5th judgement flicker is longer than others. A B AT LAT429 LAT430 Shift solenoid valve A circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-311, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" . Shift solenoid valve B circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-316, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" . 6th judgement flicker is longer than others. 7th judgement flicker is longer than others. D E LAT431 LAT432 Overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-329, "DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" . Torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-293, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" . 8th judgement flicker is longer than others. 9th judgement flicker is longer than others. F G H I LAT433 LAT434 A/T fluid temperature sensor is disconnected or TCM power source circuit is damaged. Þ Go to AT-334, "DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE)" . Engine speed signal circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-266, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" . J 10th judgement flicker is longer than others. 11th judgement flicker is longer than others. K L LAT435 SAT455F Þ Go to AT-344, "DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR (VG33ER ONLY)" . Line pressure solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Þ Go to AT-306, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" . Flickers as shown below. Lamp comes on. SAT457F SAT367J Battery power is low. Battery has been disconnected for a long time. Battery is connected conversely. (When reconnecting TCM connectors. — This is not a problem.) t1 = 2.5 seconds t2 = 2.0 seconds t3 = 1.0 second PNP switch, overdrive control switch or throttle position switch circuit is disconnected or TCM is damaged. Þ Go to AT-387, "21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches Circuit Checks)" . t4 = 1.0 second AT-203 M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION [RE4R01A] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION Introduction PFP:00000 ECS007LU The TCM receives a signal from the vehicle speed sensor, throttle position sensor or PNP switch and provides shift control or lock-up control via A/T solenoid valves. The TCM also communicates with the ECM by means of a signal sent from sensing elements used with the OBD-related parts of the A/T system for malfunction-diagnostic purposes. The TCM is capable of diagnosing malfunctioning parts while the ECM can store malfunctions in its memory. Input and output signals must always be correct and stable in the operation of the A/T system. The A/T system must be in good operating condition and be free of valve seizure, solenoid valve malfuncAAT473A tion, etc. It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts. A visual check only may not find the cause of the problems. A road test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should be performed. Follow the “Work Flow”. Refer to AT-208, "Work Flow" . Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cusSAT632I tomer can supply good information about such problems, especially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” should be used. Refer to AT-205, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" . Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first. This will help troubleshoot driveability problems on an electronically controlled engine vehicle. Also check related Service bulletins. SEF234G AT-204 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION [RE4R01A] DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET Information From Customer A KEY POINTS ● WHAT..... Vehicle & A/T model ● WHEN..... Date, Frequencies ● WHERE..... Road conditions ● HOW..... Operating conditions, Symptoms Customer name MR/MS B AT Model & Year VIN Trans. model Engine Mileage Incident Date Manuf. Date In Service Date Frequency ❏ Continuous Symptoms ❏ Vehicle does not move. ❏ No up-shift ❏ Intermittent ( times a day) (❏ Any position (❏ 1st → 2nd ❏ No down-shift D ❏ 2nd → 3rd (❏ O/D → 3rd ❏ Particular position) E ❏ 3rd → O/D) ❏ 3rd → 2nd ❏ 2nd → 1st) F ❏ Lockup malfunction ❏ Shift point too high or too low. ❏ Shift shock or slip (❏ N → D ❏ Lockup ❏ Any drive position) G ❏ Noise or vibration ❏ No kickdown H ❏ No pattern select ❏ Others ( O/D OFF indicator lamp Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) ) I Blinks for about 8 seconds. ❏ Continuously lit ❏ Not lit ❏ Continuously lit ❏ Not lit J K L M AT-205 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION [RE4R01A] Diagnostic Worksheet 1. ❏ Read the Fail-safe Remarks and listen to customer complaints. AT-160 2. ❏ CHECK A/T FLUID AT-211 ❏ Leakage (Follow specified procedure) ❏ Fluid condition ❏ Fluid level 3. Perform STALL TEST and LINE PRESSURE TEST. ❏ Stall test — Mark possible damaged components/others. ❏ Torque converter one-way clutch ❏ Reverse clutch ❏ Forward clutch ❏ Overrun clutch ❏ Forward one-way clutch AT-211, AT214 ❏ Low & reverse brake ❏ Low one-way clutch ❏ Engine ❏ Line pressure is low ❏ Clutches and brakes except high clutch and brake band are OK ❏ Line pressure test — Suspected parts: 4. ❏ Perform all ROAD TEST and mark required procedures. AT-216 41. AT-217 Check before engine is started. ❏ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE - Mark detected items. ❏PNP switch, AT-249 . ❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor, AT-255 . ❏ Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor), AT-261 . ❏ Engine speed signal, AT-266 . ❏ Torque converter clutch solenoid valve, AT-293 . ❏ Line pressure solenoid valve, AT-306 . ❏ Shift solenoid valve A, AT-311 . ❏ Shift solenoid valve B, AT-316 . ❏ Throttle position sensor, AT-321 . ❏ Overrun clutch solenoid valve, AT-329 . ❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor and TCM power source, AT-334 . ❏ PNP, overdrive control and throttle position switches, AT-353 . ❏ Vehicle speed sensor·MTR, AT-340 . ❏ Turbine revolution sensor (VG33ER only), AT-344 . ❏ Control unit (RAM), control unit (ROM), AT-349 . ❏ Control unit (EEP ROM), AT-351 . ❏ Battery ❏ Others 42. Check at idle AT-218 ❏ 1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On, AT-356 . ❏ 2. Engine Cannot Be Started In P And N Position,AT-358 . ❏ 3. In P Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or Backward When Pushed, AT-359 . ❏ 4. In N Position, Vehicle Moves, AT-360 . ❏ 5. Large Shock. N → R Position, AT-362 . ❏ 6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position,AT-364 . ❏ 7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 Or 1 Position, AT-367 . AT-206 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION [RE4R01A] 4. 43. Cruise test AT-219 AT-223 Part-1 ❏ 8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 , AT-369 . ❏ 9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2 , AT-372 . ❏ 10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 →D3 , AT-374 . ❏ 11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 →D4 , AT-376 . ❏ 12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up, AT-378 . ❏ 13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition, AT-379 . ❏ 14. Lock-up Is Not Released, AT-381 . ❏ 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 ), AT-382 . Part-2 A B AT AT-226 D ❏ 9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2 , AT-372 . ❏ 10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 →D3 , AT-374 . ❏ 11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 →D4 , AT-376 . ❏ 16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1 , AT-383 . Part-3 E AT-228 ❏ 17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 →D3 When Overdrive Control Switch ON → OFF, AT-385 ❏ 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 →D3 ), AT-382 . ❏ 18. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 →22 , When Selector Lever D → 2 Position, AT-386 . ❏ 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 →D3 ), AT-382 . ❏ 19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 →11 , When Selector Lever 2 → 1 Position, AT-387 . ❏ 20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake, AT-387 . ❏ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE — Mark detected items. F G ❏ PNP switch, AT-249 . ❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor, AT-255 . ❏ Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor), AT-261 . ❏ Engine speed signal, AT-266 . ❏ Torque converter clutch solenoid valve, AT-293 . ❏ Line pressure solenoid valve, AT-306 . ❏ Shift solenoid valve A, AT-311 . ❏ Shift solenoid valve B, AT-316 . ❏ Throttle position sensor,AT-321 . ❏ Overrun clutch solenoid valve, AT-329 . ❏ A/T fluid temperature sensor and TCM power source, AT-334 . ❏ PNP, overdrive control and throttle position switches, AT-353 . ❏ Vehicle speed sensor·MTR, AT-340 . ❏ Turbine revolution sensor (VG33ER only), AT-344 . ❏ Control unit (RAM), control unit (ROM), AT-349 . ❏ Control unit (EEP ROM), AT-351 . ❏ Battery ❏ Battery ❏ Others H I J K L 5. ❏ For self-diagnosis NG items, inspect each component. Repair or replace the damaged parts. AT-190 6. ❏ Perform all ROAD TEST and re-mark required procedures. AT-216 7. ❏ Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for following MIL indicating items and check out NG items. Refer to EC-620, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information" (VG33E only) or EC-1221, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information" (VG33ER only). EC-683 (VG33E only) or EC-1284 (VG33ER only) ❏ DTC (P0731, 1103) A/T 1st gear function, AT-270 . ❏ DTC (P0732, 1104) A/T 2nd gear function, AT-276 . ❏ DTC (P0733, 1105) A/T 3rd gear function, AT-281 . ❏ DTC (P0734, 1106) A/T 4th gear function, AT-286 . ❏ DTC (P0744, 1107) A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up), AT-298 . 8. ❏ Perform the Diagnostic Procedures for all remaining items marked NG. Repair or replace the damaged parts. Refer to the Symptom Chart when you perform the procedures, (The chart also shows some other possible symptoms and the component inspection orders). AT-189 AT-230 9. ❏ Erase DTC from TCM and ECM memories. AT-187 AT-207 M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION [RE4R01A] Work Flow ECS007LV HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR QUICK AND ACCURATE REPAIR A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate. In general, each customer feels differently about a problem. It is important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a customer complaint. Make good use of the two sheets provided, “Information From Customer”, AT-205 , and “Diagnostic Worksheet”, AT-206 , to perform the best troubleshooting possible. AT-208 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION [RE4R01A] WORK FLOW CHART A B AT D E F G H I J K L M LCIA0289E *1: AT-205 *2: AT-206 *3: AT-160 *4: AT-211 *5: AT-211, AT-214 *6: AT-216 *7: AT-189 *8: AT-185 *9: AT-198 *10 : AT-249 *11: AT-351 *12 : AT-353 AT-209 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION [RE4R01A] *13 : AT-387 *14 : AT-230 *15 : AT-187 *16 : AT-249 *17 : AT-351 *18 : EC-620 (VG33E), EC-1221 (VG33ER) AT-210 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4R01A] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION A/T Fluid Check PFP:00000 A ECS007LW FLUID LEAKAGE CHECK 1. 2. 3. 4. Clean area suspected of leaking. — for example, mating surface of converter housing and transmission B case. Start engine, apply foot brake, place selector lever in D position and wait a few minutes. Stop engine. AT Check for fresh leakage. FLUID CONDITION CHECK D Fluid color Suspected problem Dark or black with burned odor Wear of frictional material Milky pink Water contamination — Road water entering through filler tube or breather Varnished fluid, light to dark brown and tacky Oxidation — Over or under filling, — Overheating E F SAT638A G FLUID LEVEL CHECK Refer to MA-37, "Checking A/T Fluid" . H Stall Test ECS007LX STALL TEST PROCEDURE 1. 2. Check A/T fluid and engine oil levels. If necessary, add fluid or oil. Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes or until engine oil and ATF reach operating temperature. ATF operating temperature I J : 50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F) K SAT647B 3. 4. ● Set parking brake and block wheels. Install a tachometer where it can be seen by driver during test. It is good practice to put a mark on point of specified engine rpm on indicator. M SAT513G AT-211 L TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4R01A] 5. 6. 7. ● Start engine, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in D position. Accelerate to wide open throttle gradually while applying foot brake. Quickly note the engine stall revolution and immediately release throttle. During test, never hold throttle wide open for more than 5 seconds. Stall revolution VG33E : 2,450 - 2,650 rpm VG33ER : 2,420 - 2,620 rpm SAT514G 8. 9. Move selector lever to N position. Cool off ATF. ● Run engine at idle for at least one minute. 10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 with selector lever in 2, 1 and R positions. SAT771B JUDGEMENT OF STALL TEST The test result and possible damaged components relating to each result are shown in the illustration. In order to pinpoint the possible damaged components, follow the WORK FLOW. Refer to AT-208, "Work Flow" . NOTE: Stall revolution is too high in D or 2 position: ● Slippage occurs in 1st gear but not in 2nd and 3rd gears. ..... Low one-way clutch slippage ● Slippage occurs at the following gears: 1st through 3rd gears in D position and engine brake functions. 1st and 2nd gears in 2 position and engine brake functions with accelerator pedal released (fully closed throttle). ..... Forward clutch or forward one-way clutch slippage Stall revolution is too high in R position: ● Engine brake does not function in 1 position. ..... Low & reverse brake slippage ● Engine brake functions in 1 position. ..... Reverse clutch slippage Stall revolution within specifications: ● Vehicle does not achieve speed of more than 80 km/h (50 MPH). ..... One-way clutch seizure in torque converter housing CAUTION: Be careful since automatic fluid temperature increases abnormally. ● Slippage occurs in 3rd and 4th gears in D position. ..... High clutch slippage ● Slippage occurs in 2nd and 4th gear in D position. ..... Brake band slippage AT-212 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4R01A] Stall revolution less than specifications: ● Poor acceleration during starts. ..... One-way clutch seizure in torque converter A B AT D E F G H I J K L M LCIA0265E AT-213 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4R01A] Line Pressure Test ECS007LY LINE PRESSURE TEST PORTS ● ● Location of line pressure test ports. Always replace line pressure plugs as they are self-sealing bolts. SAT209GA LINE PRESSURE TEST PROCEDURE 1. 2. Check A/T fluid and engine oil levels. If necessary, add fluid or oil. Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes or until engine oil and ATF reach operating temperature. ATF operating temperature : 50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F) SAT647B 3. Install pressure gauge to corresponding line pressure port. SAT518GB SAT519GB AT-214 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4R01A] 4. ● Set parking brake and block wheels. Continue to depress brake pedal fully while line pressure test is being performed at stall speed. A B AT SAT513G D 5. ● Start engine and measure line pressure at idle and stall speed. When measuring line pressure at stall speed, follow the stall test procedure. Line pressure E : Refer to AT-497, "Line Pressure" . F G SAT493G JUDGEMENT OF LINE PRESSURE TEST H Judgement Line pressure is low in all positions. Line pressure is low in particular position. Suspected parts ● Oil pump wear ● Control piston damage ● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking ● Spring for pressure regulator valve damaged ● Fluid pressure leakage between oil strainer and pressure regulator valve ● Clogged strainer ● Fluid pressure leakage between manual valve and particular clutch ● For example, line pressure is: — Low in R and 1 positions, but — Normal in D and 2 positions. Then, fluid leakage exists at or around low and reverse brake circuit. Refer to AT-498, "Clutches and Brakes" . At idle Line pressure is high. Line pressure is low. At stall speed ● Maladjustment of throttle position sensor ● Fluid temperature sensor damaged ● Line pressure solenoid valve sticking ● Short circuit of line pressure solenoid valve circuit ● Pressure modifier valve sticking ● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking ● Open in dropping resistor circuit ● Maladjustment of throttle position sensor ● Line pressure solenoid valve sticking ● Short circuit of line pressure solenoid valve circuit ● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking ● Pressure modifier valve sticking ● Pilot valve sticking AT-215 I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4R01A] Road Test ECS007LZ DESCRIPTION ● ● – – – The purpose of the test is to determine overall performance of A/ T and analyze causes of problems. The road test consists of the following three parts: Check before engine is started Check at idle Cruise test SAT786A ● ● Before road test, familiarize yourself with all test procedures and items to check. Conduct tests on all items until specified symptom is found. Troubleshoot items which check out No Good after road test. Refer to AT-185, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION" and AT-353, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS" . SAT496G AT-216 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4R01A] 1. CHECK BEFORE ENGINE IS STARTED A 1. CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP 1. 2. 3. 4. B Park vehicle on flat surface. Move selector lever to P position. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Wait at least 5 seconds. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) AT D E SAT967I 5. F Does O/D OFF indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds? G H I J WAT496 Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Go to AT-356, "1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On" . K 2. CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP L Does O/D OFF indicator lamp flicker for about 8 seconds? M WAT496 Yes or No Yes >> Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-198, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . No >> GO TO 3. AT-217 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4R01A] 3. CHECK NG ITEM 1. 2. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Perform self-diagnosis and note NG items. Refer to AT-198, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . >> Go to AT-358, "2. Engine Cannot Be Started In P and N Position" . 2. CHECK AT IDLE 1. CHECK ENGINE START 1. Park vehicle on flat surface. 2. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. 3. Move selector lever to P or N position. 4. Turn ignition switch to start position. 5. Is engine started? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Go to AT-358, "2. Engine Cannot Be Started In P and N Position" . 2. CHECK ENGINE START 1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. 2. Move selector lever to D, 1, 2 or R position. 3. Turn ignition switch to start position. 4. Is engine started? Yes or No Yes >> Go toAT-358, "2. Engine Cannot Be Started In P and N Position" . No >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK VEHICLE MOVE 1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. 2. Move selector lever to P position. 3. Release parking brake. 4. Push vehicle forward or backward. 5. Does vehicle move when it is pushed forward or backward? Yes or No Yes >> Go to AT-359, "3. In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or Backward When Pushed" . No >> GO TO 4. SAT796A AT-218 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4R01A] 4. CHECK VEHICLE MOVE A 1. Apply parking brake. 2. Move selector lever to N position. 3. Turn ignition switch to START position and start engine. 4. Release parking brake. 5. Does vehicle move forward or backward? Yes or No Yes >> Go to AT-360, "4. In N Position, Vehicle Moves" . No >> GO TO 5. B AT D 5. CHECK SHIFT SHOCK 1. Apply foot brake. 2. Move selector lever to R position. 3. Is there large shock when changing from N to R position? Yes or No Yes >> Go to AT-362, "5. Large Shock. N → R Position" . No >> GO TO 6. E F G H SAT082J I 6. CHECK VEHICLE REVERSE MOVEMENT 1. Release foot brake for several seconds. 2. Does vehicle creep backward when foot brake is released? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 7. No >> Go to AT-364, "6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position" . J K 7. CHECK VEHICLE FORWARD MOVEMENT L 1. Move selector lever to D, 2 and 1 position and check if vehicle creeps forward. 2. Does vehicle creep forward in all three positions? Yes or No Yes >> Go to AT-219, "3. CRUISE TEST" . No >> Go to AT-367, "7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 Or 1 Position" . M 3. CRUISE TEST ● Check all items listed in Parts 1 through 3. SAT601J AT-219 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4R01A] With CONSULT-II ● ● Using CONSULT-II, conduct a cruise test and record the result. Print the result and ensure that shifts and lock-ups take place as per “Shift Schedule”. CONSULT-II Setting Procedure 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect “CONSULT-II” to data link connector. The data link connector is located in instrument lower panel on driver side. Turn ignition switch ON. LEC104A 4. Touch “START”. SAT586J 5. Touch “A/T”. SAT014K 6. Touch “DATA MONITOR”. SAT971J AT-220 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4R01A] 7. 8. Touch “MAIN SIGNALS” or “TCM INPUT SIGNALS”. See “Numerical Display”, “Bar Chart Display”, or “Line Graph Display”. A B AT SAT175K D 9. Touch “SETTING” to set recording condition (“AUTO TRIG” or “MANU TRIG”) and touch “BACK”. 10. Touch “START”. E F G SAT973J H 11. When performing cruise test touch “STORE DATA”. I J K SAT134K 12. After finishing cruise test part 1, touch “STOP”. L M SAT135K AT-221 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4R01A] 13. Touch “STORE” and touch “BACK”. SAT987J SAT974J 14. 15. 16. 17. Touch “DISPLAY”. Touch “PRINT”. Check the monitor data printed out. Continue cruise test part 2 and 3. SAT975J Without CONSULT-II ● Throttle position sensor can be checked by measuring voltage across terminals 41 and 42 of TCM. AAT474A AT-222 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4R01A] Cruise Test — Part 1 A 1. CHECK STARTING GEAR (D1 ) POSITION 1. ATF operating temperature 2. 3. 4. 5. B Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes to warm engine oil and ATF up to operating temperature. : 50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F) Park vehicle on flat surface. Set overdrive control switch to ON position. Move selector lever to P position. Start engine. AT D E F SAT001J G 6. Move selector lever to D position. H I J SAT952I 7. 8. K Accelerate vehicle by constantly depressing accelerator pedal halfway. Does vehicle start from D1 ? L Read gear position. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Go to AT-369, "8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" . M SAT953I AT-223 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4R01A] 2. CHECK SHIFT UP (D1 TO D2 ) Does A/T shift from D1 to D2 at the specified speed? Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed. Specified speed when shifting from D1 to D2 : Refer to AT-496, "Shift Schedule" . Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> Go to AT-372, "9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2" . SAT954I 3. CHECK SHIFT UP (D2 TO D3 ) Does A/T shift from D2 to D3 at the specified speed? Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed. Specified speed when shifting from D2 to D3 : Refer to AT-496, "Shift Schedule" . Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> Go to AT-374, "10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3" . SAT955I 4. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4 ) Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed? Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed. Specified speed when shifting from D3 to D4 : Refer to AT-496, "Shift Schedule" . Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> Go to AT-376, "11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4" . SAT956I AT-224 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4R01A] 5. CHECK LOCK-UP (D4 TO D4 L/U) A Does A/T perform lock-up at the specified speed? Read vehicle speed, throttle position when lock-up duty becomes 94%. Specified speed when lock-up occurs B : Refer to AT-496, "Shift Schedule" . Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 6. No >> Go to AT-378, "12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up" . AT D SAT957I E 6. CHECK HOLD LOCK-UP F Does A/T hold lock-up condition for more than 30 seconds? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 7. No >> Go to AT-379, "13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition" . 7. CHECK LOCK-UP OFF (D4 G L/U TO D4 ) H 1. Release accelerator pedal. 2. Is lock-up released when accelerator pedal is released? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 8. No >> Go to AT-381, "14. Lock-up Is Not Released" . I J K SAT958I 8. CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D4 1. 2. L TO D3 ) Decelerate vehicle by applying foot brake lightly. Does engine speed return to idle smoothly when A/T is shifted from D4 to D3 ? M Read gear position and engine speed. Yes or No Yes >> 1. Stop vehicle. 2. Go to AT-226, "Cruise Test — Part 2" . No >> Go to AT-382, "15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 )" . SAT959I AT-225 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4R01A] Cruise Test — Part 2 1. CHECK STARTING GEAR (D1 ) POSITION 1. 2. 3. 4. Confirm overdrive control switch is in ON position. Confirm selector lever is in D position. Accelerate vehicle by half throttle again. Does vehicle start from D1 ? Read gear position. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Go to AT-383, "16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1" . SAT495G 2. CHECK SHIFT UP AND SHIFT DOWN (D3 1. 2. 3. TO D4 TO D2 ) Accelerate vehicle to 80 km/h (50 MPH) as shown in illustration. Release accelerator pedal and then quickly depress it fully. Does A/T shift from D4 to D2 as soon as accelerator pedal is depressed fully? Read gear position and throttle position. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> Go to AT-372, "9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2" . SAT404H 3. CHECK SHIFT UP (D2 TO D3 ) Does A/T shift from D2 to D3 at the specified speed? Read gear position, throttle position and vehicle speed. Specified speed when shifting from D2 to D3 : Refer to AT-496, "Shift Schedule" . Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> Go to AT-374, "10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3" . SAT960I AT-226 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4R01A] 4. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4 ) AND ENGINE BRAKE A Release accelerator pedal after shifting from D2 to D3 . Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 and does vehicle decelerate by engine brake? B Read gear position, throttle position and vehicle speed. Yes or No Yes >> 1. Stop vehicle. 2. Go to AT-228, "Cruise Test — Part 3" . No >> Go to AT-376, "11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4" . AT D SAT405H E F G H I J K L M AT-227 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4R01A] Cruise Test — Part 3 1. VEHICLE SPEED D4 1. 2. 3. POSITION Confirm overdrive control switch is in ON position. Confirm selector lever is in D position. Accelerate vehicle using half-throttle to D4 . >> GO TO 2. SAT812A 2. CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D4 1. 2. 3. TO D3 ) Release accelerator pedal. Set overdrive control switch to OFF position while driving in D4 . Does A/T shift from D4 to D3 (O/D OFF)? Read gear position and vehicle speed. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> Go to AT-385, "17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D3 , When Overdrive Control Switch ON → OFF" . SAT999I 3. CHECK ENGINE BRAKE Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> Go to AT-382, "15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 )" . SAT999I AT-228 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4R01A] 4. CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D3 1. 2. TO D2 ) A Move selector lever from D to 2 position while driving in D3 (O/D OFF). Does A/T shift from D3 (O/D OFF) to 22 ? B Read gear position. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> Go to AT-386, "18. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → 22 , When Selector Lever D → 2 Position" . AT D SAT791GA E 5. CHECK ENGINE BRAKE F Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 6. No >> Go to AT-382, "15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 )" . G H I SAT791GA 6. CHECK SHIFT DOWN (22 TO 11 ) J 1. Move selector lever from 2 to 1 position while driving in 22 . 2. Does A/T shift from 22 to 11 position? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 7. No >> Go to AT-387, "19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11 , When Selector Lever 2 → 1 Position" . K L M SAT778B 7. CHECK ENGINE BRAKE Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake? Yes or No Yes >> 1. Stop vehicle. 2. Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-198, "TCM SELFDIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . No >> Go to AT-387, "20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake" . SAT778B AT-229 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4R01A] Symptom Chart ECS007M0 Numbers are arranged in order of inspection. Perform inspections starting with number one and work up. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item 1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) Torque converter is not locked up. ON vehicle OFF vehicle No Lock-up Engagement/ TCC Inoperative ON vehicle OFF vehicle ON vehicle VG33ER only EC-646 EC-1247 AT-261, AT-340 3. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-405 4. Engine speed signal AT-266 5. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-255 6. Line pressure test AT-214 7. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-293 8. Control valve assembly AT-431 9. Torque converter AT-414 1. Fluid level AT-211 EC-646 AT-255 4. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-255 5. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-306 6. Control valve assembly AT-255 7. Torque converter AT-414 2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-261, AT-340 3. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve Shift Shock ON vehicle OFF vehicle EC-1247 EC-646 AT-255 4. Control valve assembly Sharp shock in shifting from N to D position. EC-1247 3. Line pressure test 1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) Lock-up point is extremely high or low. AT-378 VG33E only 2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR 2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) Torque converter clutch piston slip. Reference Page AT-255 1. Engine idling rpm EC-604 EC-1205 2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) EC-646 EC-1247 3. Line pressure test AT-255 4. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-255 5. Engine speed signal AT-266 6. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-306 7. Control valve assembly AT-255 8. Accumulator N-D AT-255 9. Turbine revolution sensor 10. Forward Clutch AT-230 AT-344 AT-453 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4R01A] Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item 1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) Too sharp a shock in change from D1 to D2 . ON vehicle OFF vehicle ON vehicle VG33E only VG33ER only EC-646 EC-1247 2. Line pressure test AT-255 3. Accumulator servo release AT-255 4. Control valve assembly AT-255 5. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-255 6. Brake band AT-470 1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) Too sharp a shock in change from D2 to D3 . Reference Page A B AT D EC-1247 EC-646 2. Line pressure test AT-255 3. Control valve assembly AT-255 4. High clutch AT-450 5. Brake band AT-306 E OFF vehicle 1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) Shift Shock Too sharp a shock in change from D3 to D4 . ON vehicle OFF vehicle Gear change shock felt during deceleration by releasing accelerator pedal. Large shock changing from 12 to 11 in 1 position. EC-1247 EC-646 2. Line pressure test AT-255 3. Control valve assembly AT-255 4. Brake band AT-306 5. Overrun clutch AT-306 1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) G H EC-1247 EC-646 I 2. Line pressure test AT-255 3. Overrun clutch solenoid valve AT-329 4. Control valve assembly AT-255 ON vehicle 1. Control valve assembly AT-255 ON vehicle 2. Low & reverse brake AT-458 ON vehicle F J K L M AT-231 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4R01A] Items Symptom Too high a gear change point from D1 to D2 , from D2 to D3 , from D3 to D4 . AT-372, AT374 , AT-376 Gear change directly from D1 to D3 occurs. Improper Shift Timing Too high a change point from D4 to D3 , from D3 to D2 , from D2 to D1 . Kickdown does not operate when depressing pedal in D4 within kickdown vehicle speed. Improper Shift Timing Condition Diagnostic Item 1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) ON vehicle ON vehicle OFF vehicle 2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR Kickdown operates or engine overruns when depressing pedal in D4 beyond kickdown vehicle speed limit. ON vehicle Gear change from 22 to 23 in 2 position. ON vehicle Gear change from 11 to 12 in 1 position. ON vehicle VG33ER only EC-646 EC-1247 AT-261, AT-340 AT-311 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-316 1. Fluid level AT-414 2. Accumulator servo release AT-255 3. Brake band AT-306 2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR 1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) ON vehicle VG33E only 3. Shift solenoid valve A 1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) ON vehicle Reference Page 2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR EC-646 EC-1247 AT-261, AT-340 EC-646 EC-1247 AT-261, AT-340 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-311 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-316 1. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR 2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) AT-261, AT-340 EC-1247 EC-646 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-311 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-316 1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-405 1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-405 2. Manual control linkage adjustment AT-405 AT-232 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4R01A] Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference Page VG33E only 1. Fluid level 2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) Failure to change gear from D4 to D3 . ON vehicle OFF vehicle No Down Shift Failure to change gear from D3 to D2 or from D4 to D2 . OFF vehicle Failure to change gear from D2 to D1 or from D3 to D1 . ON vehicle EC-1247 EC-646 AT-450 4. Shift solenoid valve A AT-311 5. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-306 6. Control valve assembly AT-255 7. Low & reverse brake AT-450 8. Overrun clutch AT-306 1. Fluid level AT-414 AT-311 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-316 5. Control valve assembly AT-255 6. High clutch AT-450 7. Brake band AT-306 1. Fluid level AT-414 AT D E F G H EC-1247 EC-646 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-311 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-316 5. Control valve assembly AT-255 I J 6. Low one-way clutch OFF vehicle B EC-1247 EC-646 3. Shift solenoid valve A 2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) A AT-414 3. Overrun clutch solenoid valve 2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) ON vehicle VG33ER only 7. High clutch AT-450 8. Brake band AT-306 K L M AT-233 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4R01A] Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference Page VG33E only 1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment Failure to change from D3 to 22 when changing lever into 2 position. AT-386 2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) ON vehicle OFF vehicle No Down Shift Does not change from 12 to 11 in 1 position. ON vehicle OFF vehicle Failure to change gear from D1 to D2 . ON vehicle No Up Shift Failure to change gear from D2 to D3 . ON vehicle EC-1247 EC-646 AT-450 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-316 5. Shift solenoid valve A AT-311 6. Control valve assembly AT-255 7. Manual control linkage adjustment AT-405 8. Brake band AT-306 9. Overrun clutch AT-306 1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-405 2. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-261, AT-340 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-311 4. Control valve assembly AT-255 5. Overrun clutch solenoid valve AT-450 6. Overrun clutch AT-306 7. Low & reverse brake AT-450 1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-405 2. Manual control linkage adjustment AT-405 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-311 4. Control valve assembly AT-255 AT-261, AT-340 6. Brake band AT-306 1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-405 2. Manual control linkage adjustment AT-405 3. Shift solenoid valve B AT-316 4. Control valve assembly AT-255 5. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR OFF vehicle AT-405 3. Overrun clutch solenoid valve 5. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR OFF vehicle VG33ER only AT-261, AT-340 6. High clutch AT-450 7. Brake band AT-306 AT-234 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4R01A] Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference Page VG33E only Failure to change gear from D3 to D4 . ON vehicle 1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-405 2. Manual control linkage adjustment AT-405 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-311 4. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR OFF vehicle A/T does not shift to D4 when driving with overdrive control switch ON. ON vehicle Slips/Will Not Engage Vehicle will not run in R position (but runs in D, 2 and 1 positions). Clutch slips. Very poor acceleration. AT-364 AT-255 6. Brake band AT-306 Vehicle will not run in D and 2 positions (but runs in 1 and R positions). 2. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-405 3. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR AT-261, AT-340 AT-450 6. Control valve assembly AT-255 7. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-255 8. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-306 9. Brake band AT-306 10. Overrun clutch AT-306 1. Manual control linkage adjustment AT-405 2. Line pressure test AT-255 3. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-306 4. Control valve assembly AT-255 5. Reverse clutch AT-306 6. High clutch AT-450 7. Forward clutch AT-306 8. Overrun clutch AT-306 9. Low & reverse brake AT-450 ON vehicle 1. Manual control linkage adjustment AT-405 OFF vehicle 2. Low one-way clutch AT-463 AT-235 E F 5. Overrun clutch solenoid valve OFF vehicle D EC-1247 EC-646 AT-311 ON vehicle B AT 4. Shift solenoid valve A OFF vehicle A AT-261, AT-340 5. A/T fluid temperature sensor 1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) No Up Shift VG33ER only G H I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4R01A] Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference Page VG33E only Vehicle will not run in D, 1, 2 positions (but runs in R position). Clutch slips. Very poor acceleration. AT-367 ON vehicle OFF vehicle 1. Fluid level AT-414 2. Line pressure test AT-255 3. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-306 4. Control valve assembly AT-255 5. Accumulator N-D AT-255 6. Reverse clutch AT-306 7. High clutch AT-450 8. Forward clutch AT-306 9. Forward one-way clutch AT-306 10. Low one-way clutch AT-306 1. Fluid level AT-414 2. Manual control linkage adjustment AT-405 3. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) ON vehicle Slips/Will Not Engage Clutches or brakes slip somewhat in starting. OFF vehicle No creep at all. AT-364, AT367 Almost no shock or clutches slipping in change from D1 to D2 . ON vehicle OFF vehicle OFF vehicle EC-1247 EC-646 4. Line pressure test AT-255 5. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-306 6. Control valve assembly AT-255 7. Accumulator N-D AT-255 8. Forward clutch AT-306 9. Reverse clutch AT-306 10. Low & reverse brake AT-450 11. Oil pump AT-426 12. Torque converter AT-414 1. Fluid level AT-414 2. Line pressure test AT-255 3. Control valve assembly AT-255 4. Forward clutch AT-306 5. Oil pump AT-306 6. Torque converter AT-414 1. Fluid level AT-414 2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) ON vehicle VG33ER only EC-646 EC-1247 3. Line pressure test AT-255 4. Accumulator servo release AT-255 5. Control valve assembly AT-255 6. Brake band AT-306 AT-236 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4R01A] Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference Page VG33E only 1. Fluid level Almost no shock or slipping in change from D2 to D3 . ON vehicle OFF vehicle Slips/Will Not Engage Almost no shock or slipping in change from D3 to D4 . ON vehicle OFF vehicle Races extremely fast or slips in changing from D4 to D3 when depressing pedal. 2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) OFF vehicle EC-1247 EC-646 AT-255 4. Control valve assembly AT-255 5. High clutch AT-450 6. Forward clutch AT-306 1. Fluid level AT-414 2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) A AT-414 3. Line pressure test B AT D EC-1247 EC-646 3. Line pressure test AT-255 4. Control valve assembly AT-255 5. High clutch AT-450 6. Brake band AT-306 1. Fluid level AT-414 2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) ON vehicle VG33ER only E F G EC-1247 EC-646 3. Line pressure test AT-255 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-306 5. Control valve assembly AT-255 6. High clutch AT-450 7. Forward clutch AT-306 H I J K L M AT-237 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4R01A] Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference Page VG33E only 1. Fluid level Races extremely fast or slips in changing from D4 to D2 when depressing pedal. 2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) ON vehicle OFF vehicle Slips/Will Not Engage Races extremely fast or slips in changing from D3 to D2 when depressing pedal. OFF vehicle Races extremely fast or slips in changing from D4 or D3 to D1 when depressing pedal. OFF vehicle ON vehicle Slips/Will Not Engage Vehicle will not run in any position. OFF vehicle EC-1247 EC-646 AT-255 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-306 5. Shift solenoid valve A AT-311 6. Control valve assembly AT-255 7. Brake band AT-306 8. Forward clutch AT-306 1. Fluid level AT-414 EC-1247 EC-646 3. Line pressure test AT-255 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-306 5. Control valve assembly AT-255 6. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-255 7. Brake band AT-306 8. Forward clutch AT-306 9. High clutch AT-450 1. Fluid level AT-414 2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) ON vehicle AT-414 3. Line pressure test 2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) ON vehicle VG33ER only EC-1247 EC-646 3. Line pressure test AT-255 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-306 5. Control valve assembly AT-255 6. Forward clutch AT-306 7. Forward one-way clutch AT-306 8. Low one-way clutch AT-306 1. Fluid level AT-414 2. Manual control linkage adjustment AT-406 3. Line pressure test AT-255 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-306 5. Oil pump AT-306 6. High clutch AT-450 7. Brake band AT-306 8. Low & reverse brake AT-450 9. Torque converter AT-414 10. Parking pawl components AT-475 AT-238 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4R01A] Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference Page VG33E only Engine cannot be started in P and N positions. AT-358 Engine starts in positions other than P and N. AT-358 1. Ignition switch and starter ON vehicle ON vehicle NOT USED Transmission noise in P and N positions. ON vehicle AT-405 3. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-405 1. Manual control linkage adjustment AT-405 2. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-405 1. Fluid level AT-414 2. Line pressure test AT-255 3. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) EC-646 E AT-261, AT-340 5. Engine speed signal AT-266 6. Oil pump AT-306 7. Torque converter AT-414 1. Manual control linkage adjustment AT-405 OFF vehicle 2. Parking pawl components AT-414 Vehicle runs in N position. AT-360 ON vehicle F G H I J OFF vehicle ON vehicle Vehicle braked when shifting into R position. OFF vehicle Engine stops when shifting lever into R, D, 2 and 1. AT EC-1247 ON vehicle Excessive creep. B D Vehicle moves when changing into P position or parking gear does not disengage when shifted out of P position. AT-359 NOT USED A SC-9 2. Manual control linkage adjustment 4. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR OFF vehicle VG33ER only ON vehicle ON vehicle OFF vehicle 1. Manual control linkage adjustment AT-405 2. Forward clutch AT-306 3. Reverse clutch AT-306 4. Overrun clutch AT-306 1. Fluid level AT-414 2. Manual control linkage adjustment AT-405 3. Line pressure test AT-255 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-306 5. Control valve assembly AT-255 6. High clutch AT-450 7. Brake band AT-306 8. Forward clutch AT-306 9. Overrun clutch AT-306 K L M 1. Engine idling rpm EC-604 EC-1205 1. Engine idling rpm EC-604 EC-1205 2. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-255 3. Control valve assembly AT-255 4. Torque converter AT-414 AT-239 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4R01A] Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference Page VG33E only ON vehicle Vehicle braked by gear change from D1 to D2 . NOT USED OFF vehicle 1. Fluid level AT-414 2. Reverse clutch AT-306 3. Low & reverse brake AT-450 4. High clutch AT-450 5. Low one-way clutch AT-306 Vehicle braked by gear change from D2 to D3 . ON vehicle 1. Fluid level AT-414 OFF vehicle 2. Brake band AT-306 Vehicle braked by gear change from D3 to D4 . ON vehicle 1. Fluid level AT-414 2. Overrun clutch AT-306 3. Forward one-way clutch AT-306 4. Reverse clutch AT-306 1. Fluid level AT-414 2. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-405 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-311 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-316 5. Control valve assembly AT-255 6. Reverse clutch AT-306 7. High clutch AT-450 8. Brake band AT-306 9. Low & reverse brake AT-450 10. Oil pump AT-306 11. Torque converter AT-414 ON vehicle 1. Fluid level AT-414 ON vehicle 2. Torque converter AT-414 1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch adjustment AT-405 2. Manual control linkage adjustment AT-405 OFF vehicle ON vehicle Maximum speed not attained. Acceleration poor. OFF vehicle Transmission noise in D, 2, 1 and R positions. NOT USED VG33ER only 3. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) Engine brake does not operate in “1” position. AT-387 ON vehicle OFF vehicle 4. Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR EC-1247 EC-646 AT-261, AT-340 5. Shift solenoid valve A AT-311 6. Control valve assembly AT-255 7. Overrun clutch solenoid valve AT-450 8. Overrun clutch AT-306 9. Low & reverse brake AT-450 AT-240 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION [RE4R01A] Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference Page VG33E only 1. Fluid level ON vehicle Transmission overheats. OFF vehicle ON vehicle NOT USED ATF shoots out during operation. White smoke emitted from exhaust pipe during operation. OFF vehicle ON vehicle Offensive smell at fluid charging pipe. Engine is stopped at R, D, 2 and 1 positions. OFF vehicle ON vehicle VG33ER only AT-414 2. Engine idling rpm EC-604 EC-1205 3. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) EC-646 EC-1247 4. Line pressure test AT-255 5. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-306 6. Control valve assembly AT-255 7. Oil pump AT-306 8. Reverse clutch AT-306 9. High clutch AT-450 10. Brake band AT-306 11. Forward clutch AT-306 12. Overrun clutch AT-306 13. Low & reverse brake AT-450 14. Torque converter AT-414 1. Fluid level AT-414 2. Reverse clutch AT-306 3. High clutch AT-450 4. Brake band AT-306 5. Forward clutch AT-306 6. Overrun clutch AT-306 7. Low & reverse brake AT-450 1. Fluid level AT-414 2. Torque converter AT-414 3. Oil pump AT-306 4. Reverse clutch AT-445 5. High clutch AT-450 6. Brake band AT-306 7. Forward clutch AT-306 8. Overrun clutch AT-306 9. Low & reverse brake AT-450 1. Fluid level AT-414 2. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-255 3. Shift solenoid valve B AT-316 4. Shift solenoid valve A AT-311 5. Control valve assembly AT-255 AT-241 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4R01A] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION TCM Terminals and Reference Value PFP:00000 ECS007M1 PREPARATION ● Measure voltage between each terminal and terminal 25 or 48 by following “TCM INSPECTION TABLE”. AAT475A TCM HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT AAT494A TCM INSPECTION TABLE (Data are reference values.) Terminal No. 1 2 3 Wire color GY/R BR/Y G/OR Item When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine. 1.5 - 2.5V When depressing accelerator pedal fully after warming up engine. 0V Line pressure solenoid valve (with dropping resistor) When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine. 4 - 14V When depressing accelerator pedal fully after warming up engine. 0V Torque converter clutch solenoid valve When A/T performs lock-up. Battery voltage When A/T does not perform lock-up. 0V Line pressure solenoid valve 5*1 PU/W DT1 6*1 P/B DT2 7*1 G/R DT3 8*1,*3 R/Y DT5 9*1,*3 W/G DT4 — — — — — — — — — — — — — or 10 W/R Judgement standard (Approx.) Condition When turning ignition switch to ON. Battery voltage When turning ignition switch to OFF. 0V Power source AT-242 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4R01A] Terminal No. Wire color Item Judgement standard (Approx.) Condition When shift solenoid valve A operates (When driving in D1 or D4 ). 11 12 13 15*1 16 17 18 L/W L/Y Y Y/G BR/W OR/B B/Y Shift solenoid valve A Shift solenoid valve B O/D OFF indicator lamp OBD-II — Closed throttle position switch (in throttle position switch) Wide open throttle position switch (in throttle position switch) ASCD cruise signal or A Battery voltage B When shift solenoid valve A does not operate (When driving in D2 or D3 ). 0V When shift solenoid valve B operates (When driving in D1 or D2 ). Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve B does not operate (When driving in D3 or D4 ). 0V When setting overdrive control switch in OFF position. 0V When setting overdrive control switch in ON position. Battery voltage AT D E F — — When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine. Battery voltage When depressing accelerator pedal after warming up engine. 0V When depressing accelerator pedal more than half-way after warming up engine. Battery voltage When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine. 0V When ASCD cruise is being performed (“CRUISE” light comes on). Battery voltage When ASCD cruise is not being performed, (“CRUISE” light does not comes on). 0V When turning ignition switch to ON Battery voltage G H I J K L 19 W/R Power source (Same as No. 10) When turning ignition switch to OFF 0V M 20 22 24 L/B R GY Overrun clutch solenoid valve Overdrive control switch ASCD O/D cut signal AT-243 When overrun clutch solenoid valve operates. Battery voltage When overrun clutch shift solenoid valve does not operates. 0V When setting overdrive control switch in OFF position 0V When setting overdrive control switch in ON position Battery voltage When ASCD permits O/D. 5 - 8V When ASCD requires O/D to be OFF. 0V TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4R01A] Terminal No. Wire color 25 B/Y 26 27 G/B G/W Item Ground — PNP switch 1 position PNP switch 2 position or 28 29 R/Y Y Judgement standard (Approx.) Condition Power source (Memory back-up) Revolution sensor (Measure in AC range) — 0V When setting selector lever to 1 position. Battery voltage When setting selector lever to other position. 0V When setting selector lever to 2 position. Battery voltage When setting selector lever to other position. 0V When turning ignition switch to ON. Battery voltage When turning ignition switch to OFF. Battery voltage When vehicle cruises at 30 km/h (19 MPH). 1V or more Voltage rises gradually in response to vehicle speed. When vehicle parks. 0V 30*2 Y/R DATA LINK CONNECTOR data in — — — 31*2 GY/L DATA LINK CONNECTOR data out — — — 32 34 35 36 B/W L Y/R G/R Throttle position sensor (Power source) PNP switch D position PNP switch R position PNP switch P or N position 38*3 Y Turbine revolution sensor (measured in AC range) 39 P/L Engine speed signal AT-244 Ignition switch ON 4.5 - 5.5V Ignition switch OFF 0V When setting selector lever to D position. Battery voltage When setting selector lever to other position. 0V When setting selector lever to R position. Battery voltage When setting selector lever to other position. 0V When setting selector lever to P or N position. Battery voltage When setting selector lever to other position. 0V When engine runs at approximately 1,000 rpm. 1.2V When engine runs at idle speed. 0.5 - 2.5V TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION [RE4R01A] Terminal No. Wire color Item Judgement standard (Approx.) Condition Vehicle speed sensor When moving vehicle at 2 to 3 km/h (1 to 2 MPH) for 1m (3 ft) or more. Voltage varies between less than 1V and more than 4.5V OR/L Throttle position sensor When depressing accelerator pedal slowly after warming up engine (Voltage rises gradually in response to throttle position). Fully-closed throttle: 0.5V - 0.7V Fully-open throttle: 4V 42 BR Throttle position sensor (Ground) 45*3 BR/R Stop lamp switch 40 41 47 48 G/B R/B B/Y — — A/T fluid temperature sensor Ground (Same as No. 25) — *1: These terminals are connected to the ECM. *2: These terminals are connected to the Data link connector for CONSULT-II. *3: VG33ER only. A B AT D 0V When brake pedal is depressed. Battery voltage When brake pedal is released. 0V When ATF temperature is 20°C (68°F). 1.5V When ATF temperature is 80°C (176°F). 0.5V G 0V H — E F I J K L M AT-245 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY [RE4R01A] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN PFP:00000 ECS007M2 WCWA0146E AT-246 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY [RE4R01A] TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Terminal Wire color Item No. 10 W/R A Judgement standard (Approx.) Condition When turning ignition switch to ON Power source When turning ignition switch to OFF 19 W/R Power source (Same as No. 10) Battery voltage B 0V AT or Same as No. 10 D 25 B/Y Ground R/Y Power source (Memory backup) B/Y Ground (Same as No. 25) When turning ignition switch to ON When turning ignition switch to OFF 28 48 or 0V 0V E When turning ignition switch to OFF Battery voltage When turning ignition switch to ON Battery voltage When turning ignition switch to ON 0V When turning ignition switch to OFF 0V Diagnostic Procedure F ECS007M3 1. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE 1. 2. 3. 4. H Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) Check voltage between TCM harness connectors M77, M78 terminals (10, 19, 28) and ground. Voltage : Battery voltage I J Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Check voltage between TCM harness connector M78 terminal 28 and ground. Voltage G K : Battery voltage OK or NG AAT476A OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the following items: ● Harness for open or short between fuse block J/B harness connectors M26, M27 and TCM harness connectors M77, M78 ● Ignition switch and fuse Refer to PG-9, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" . AT-247 L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY [RE4R01A] 2. CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check continuity between TCM harness connector M78 terminals (25, 48) and ground. Continuity should exist. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. AAT477A AT-248 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH [RE4R01A] DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH Description ● ● PFP:32006 A ECS007M4 The PNP switch assembly includes a transmission range switch. The transmission range switch detects the selector position and sends a signal to the TCM. B AT D AAT478A E TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Terminal Wire color Item No. 26 G/B 27 G/W 34 L 35 Y 36 G/R Judgement standard (Approx.) Condition PNP switch 1 position PNP switch 2 position PNP switch D position PNP switch R position PNP switch P or N position When setting selector lever to 1 position. Battery voltage When setting selector lever to other positions. 0V When setting selector lever to 2 position. Battery voltage When setting selector lever to other positions. 0V When setting selector lever to D position. Battery voltage When setting selector lever to other positions. 0V When setting selector lever to R position. Battery voltage When setting selector lever to other positions. 0V When setting selector lever to P or N position. Battery voltage When setting selector lever to other positions. 0V : PNP SW/CIRC : P0705 H I K L M Malfunction is detected when ... TCM does not receive the correct voltage signal from the switch based on the gear position. Check item (Possible cause) ● Harness or connectors (The PNP switch circuit is open or shorted) ● PNP switch DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. 1. G J ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC Diagnostic trouble code F With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. AT-249 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH [RE4R01A] 2. 3. ● Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.3V Selector lever: D position (O/D ON or OFF) With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. SAT014K SEF949Y AT-250 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH [RE4R01A] Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW ECS007M5 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0092E AT-251 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH [RE4R01A] Diagnostic Procedure ECS007M6 1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITH CONSULT-II) With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch to ON position (Do not start engine). 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out P, R, N, D, 2 and 1 position switches moving selector lever to each position. Check the signal of the selector lever position is indicated properly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following items: ● PNP switch Refer to AT-254, "PNP SWITCH" . ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and PNP switch (Main harness) ● Harness for short or open between PNP switch and TCM (Main harness) ● Diode (P position) AT-252 SAT701J DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH [RE4R01A] 2. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) A Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch to ON position (Do not start engine). 2. Check voltage between TCM harness connector M78 terminals (26, 27, 34, 35, 36) and ground while moving selector lever through each position. B AT D E AAT480A F G H I AAT479A Does battery voltage exist (B) or non-existent (0)? Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> Check the following items: ● PNP switch Refer to AT-254, "PNP SWITCH" . ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and PNP switch ● Harness for short or open between PNP switch connector E34 and TCM connector M78 ● Diode (P position) J K L M 3. CHECK DTC Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-249, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. AT-253 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH [RE4R01A] Component Inspection ECS007M7 PNP SWITCH 1. Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2 and between terminals 3 and (4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9) while moving manual shaft through each position. Lever position Terminal No. P 1-2 3-4 R 3-5 N 1-2 D 2 1 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-6 SAT517GB AAT482A 2. 3. If NG, check again with manual control linkage disconnected from manual shaft of A/T assembly. Refer to step 1. If OK on step 2, adjust manual control linkage. Refer to AT-406, "Manual Control Linkage Adjustment" . AAT551A 4. 5. 6. If NG on step 2, remove PNP switch from A/T and check continuity of PNP switch terminals. Refer to step 1. If OK on step 4, adjust PNP switch. Refer to AT-405, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment" . If NG on step 4, replace PNP switch. AAT481A AT-254 DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT [RE4R01A] DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT Description PFP:31940 A ECS007M8 The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and sends a signal to the TCM. B AT D SAT342HA E CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE F G H SAT021J Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Monitor item Condition Specification (Approx.) Cold [20°C (68°F)] ↓ Hot [80°C (176°F)] A/T fluid temperature sensor 1.5V ↓ 0.5V I 2.5kΩ ↓ 0.3kΩ J TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Terminal Wire color Item No. 42 BR 47 R/B Judgement standard (Approx.) Condition Throttle position sensor (Ground) — — L A/T fluid temperature sensor When ATF temperature is 20°C (68°F). 1.5V When ATF temperature is 80°C (176°F). 0.5V ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC Diagnostic trouble code : ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC K Malfunction is detected when.... TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor. : P0710 Check item (Possible cause) ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● A/T fluid temperature sensor DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. AT-255 M DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT [RE4R01A] With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 10 minutes (Total: It is not necessary to maintain continuously). CMPS·RPM (REF): 450 rpm or more VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V Selector lever: D position (O/D ON) SAT014K ● With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. SEF949Y AT-256 DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT [RE4R01A] Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS ECS007M9 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0147E AT-257 DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT [RE4R01A] Diagnostic Procedure ECS007MA 1. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR WITH TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment. Check resistance between terminal cord assembly connector E72 terminals 6 and 7 when A/T is cold [20°C (68°F)]. AAT483A Is resistance approx. 2.5 kΩ? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check the following items: – A/T fluid temperature sensor Refer to AT-260, "A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR" . – Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open AT-258 DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT [RE4R01A] 2. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR A With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out the value of “FLUID TEMP SE”. B AT D E SAT614J Voltage Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)] : Approximately 1.5V → 0.5V G Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. F H Check voltage between TCM harness connector M78 terminal 47 and ground while warming up A/T. I J K AAT484A Voltage Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)] : Approximately 1.5V → 0.5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following item: ● Harness for short or open between TCM and terminal cord assembly (Main harness) 3. CHECK DTC Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-255, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. AT-259 L M DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT [RE4R01A] Component Inspection ECS007MB A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR ● ● For removal, refer to “AT-407, "Removal" . Check resistance between A/T fluid temperature sensor terminals 6 and 7 while changing temperature as shown at left. Temperature °C (°F) Resistance (Approx.) 20 (68) 2.5 kΩ 80 (176) 0.3 kΩ AAT485A AT-260 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) [RE4R01A] DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) Description PFP:32702 A ECS007MC The revolution sensor detects the revolution of the output shaft parking pawl lock gear and emits a pulse signal. The pulse signal is sent to the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed. B AT D AAT478A E TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Terminal Wire color Item No. 29 Y 42 BR Judgement standard (Approx.) Condition Revolution sensor (Measure in AC range) When vehicle cruises at 30 km/h (19 MPH). 1V or more Voltage rises gradually in response to vehicle speed. When vehicle parks. 0V — 0V Throttle position sensor (Ground) F G H I J ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC Diagnostic trouble code : VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT Malfunction is detected when ... TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor. : P0720 Check item (Possible cause) ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Revolution sensor K L DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. AT-261 M DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) [RE4R01A] 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. ● With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Drive vehicle and check for an increase of “VHCL/S SE·MTR” value. If the check result is NG, go to AT-264, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the check result is OK, go to following step. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. VHCL SPEED SE: 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V Selector lever: D position (O/D ON) Driving condition: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. If the check result is NG, go to AT-264, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the check result is OK, go to following step. Maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. CMPS·RPM (REF): 3,500 rpm or more THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V Selector lever: D position (O/D ON) Driving condition: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. SAT014K SAT971J With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. SEF949Y AT-262 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) [RE4R01A] Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T ECS007MD A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0148E AT-263 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) [RE4R01A] Diagnostic Procedure ECS007ME 1. CHECK REVOLUTION SENSOR Refer to AT-265, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace revolution sensor. 2. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·A/T” while driving. Check the value changes according to driving speed. SAT614J Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Check voltage between TCM harness connector M78 terminal 29 (Y) and ground while driving. (Measure with AC range) Voltage At 0 km/h (0 MPH) At 30 km/h (19 MPH) (Voltage rises gradually in response to vehicle speed.) : 0V : 1V or more OK or NG LCIA0290E OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following items: ● Harness for short or open between TCM and revolution sensor (Main harness) ● Harness for short or open between revolution sensor harness connector E73 and ECM harness connector M78 ● Ground circuit for ECM Refer to AT-246, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY" . AT-264 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) [RE4R01A] 3. CHECK DTC A Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-261, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . B OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. AT 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. Component Inspection ECS007MF REVOLUTION SENSOR ● ● D For removal, refer to AT-407, "Removal" . Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2. Terminal No. 1 E Resistance 2 500 - 650Ω F G AAT487A H I J K L M AT-265 DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL [RE4R01A] DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL Description PFP:24825 ECS007MG The engine speed signal is sent from the ECM to the TCM. TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Terminal Wire color Item No. 39 P/L Judgement standard (Approx.) Condition Engine speed signal When engine runs at idle speed. 0.5 - 2.5V ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC Diagnostic trouble code : ENGINE SPEED SIG Malfunction is detected when ... TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from ECM. Check item (Possible cause) ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) : P0725 DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds. VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V Selector lever: D position (O/D ON) ● SAT014K With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. SEF949Y AT-266 DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL [RE4R01A] Wiring Diagram — AT — ENGSS ECS007MH A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0149E AT-267 DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL [RE4R01A] Diagnostic Procedure ECS007MI 1. CHECK DTC WITH ECM Perform diagnostic test mode II (self-diagnostic results) for engine control. Check ignition signal circuit condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check ignition signal circuit for engine control. Refer to EC-1134 (VG33E only) or EC-1710 (VG33ER only), “IGNITION SIGNAL”. 2. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out the value of “ENGINE SPEED”. Check engine speed changes according to throttle position. Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. SAT645J 2. Check voltage between TCM harness connector M78 terminal 39 and ground. AAT488A Does battery voltage (idle speed) 0.5 - 2.5V? Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> Check the following items: ● Harness for short or open between TCM connector M78 and ECM connector F29 ● Resistor ● Ignition coil Refer to EC-1134 (VG33E only) or EC-1710 (VG33ER only), “IGNITION SIGNAL”. AT-268 DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL [RE4R01A] 3. CHECK DTC A Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-266, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . B OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. AT 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. D E F G H I J K L M AT-269 DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION [RE4R01A] DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION Description ● ● ● PFP:31940 ECS007MJ This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM self-diagnosis. This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction. This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into first gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. Gear position 1 2 3 4 Shift solenoid valve A Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Terminal Wire color Item No. 11 L/W 12 L/Y Judgement standard (Approx.) Condition Shift solenoid valve A Shift solenoid valve B When shift solenoid valve A operates. (When driving in D1 or D4 ) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve A does not operate. (When driving in D2 or D3 ) 0V When shift solenoid valve B operates. (When driving in D1 or D2 ) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve B does not operate. (When driving in D3 or D4 ) 0V ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows: Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor B: Engine speed signal from ECM C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes If the actual gear position is higher than the position (1st) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be more than normal. In case the ratio exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction. This malfunction will be caused when either shift solenoid valve A is stuck open or shift solenoid valve B is stuck open. Gear position supposed by TCM 1 2 3 4 In case of gear position with no malfunctions 1 2 3 4 In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve A stuck open 2* 2 3 3 In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck open 4* 3 3 4 *: P0731 is detected. Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when ... : A/T 1ST GR FNCTN A/T cannot be shifted to the 1st gear position even if electrical circuit is good. : P0731 AT-270 Check item (Possible cause) ● Shift solenoid valve A ● Shift solenoid valve B ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION [RE4R01A] DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITIONS: Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy of test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. 1. 2. 3. 4. – 5. – – 6. 7. B AT D SAT014K With CONSULT-II Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is within the range below. FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down the fluid). Select “1ST GR FNCTN P0731” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”. SAT971J Accelerate vehicle to 17 to 23 km/h (11 to 14 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely. THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1/8 (at all times during step 4) Selector lever: D position (O/D ON) Check that “GEAR” shows 2 after releasing pedal. Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7/8 of “THROTTLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 17 to 23 km/h (11 to 14 MPH) until “TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds) If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to AT274, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to the SAT021J following step. Check that “GEAR” shows 1 when depressing accelerator pedal to WOT. If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0731 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”. Stop vehicle. Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting referring to the table below.) Vehicle condition No malfunction exists Malfunction for P0731 exists. 8. A Gear on actual transmission shift pattern when screen is changed to 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 1→2→3→4 2→2→3→3 4→3→3→4 Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.) Refer to AT-274, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Refer to AT-496, "Shift Schedule" . AT-271 E F G H I J K L M DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION [RE4R01A] ● With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. AT-272 DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION [RE4R01A] Wiring Diagram — AT — 1ST ECS007MK A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0150E AT-273 DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION [RE4R01A] Diagnostic Procedure ECS007ML 1. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-431, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" . Check shift solenoid valve operation. – Shift solenoid valve A – Shift solenoid valve B Refer to AT-275, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly. 1. 2. 2. CHECK CONTROL VALVE 1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-431, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" . 2. Check to ensure that: – Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight. – Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches. – Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue. – Hydraulic line is free from obstacles. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair control valve assembly. SAT367H 3. CHECK DTC Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-271, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly. AT-274 DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION [RE4R01A] Component Inspection ECS007MM A SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A AND B ● For removal, refer toAT-431, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" . B AT D SAT649I Resistance Check ● E Check resistance between terminals (2 or 3) and ground. Solenoid valve Terminal No. Shift solenoid valve A 3 Shift solenoid valve B 2 Resistance (Approx.) F Ground 20 - 40Ω G Operation Check ● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminals (2 or 3) and ground. H I J SAT648I K L M AT-275 DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION [RE4R01A] DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION Description ● ● ● PFP:31940 ECS007MN This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM self-diagnosis. This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction. This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into second gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. Gear position 1 2 3 4 Shift solenoid valve A Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Terminal Wire color Item No. 12 L/Y Judgement standard (Approx.) Condition Shift solenoid valve B When shift solenoid valve B operates. (When driving in “D1 ” or “D2 ”) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve B does not operate. (When driving in “D3 ” or “D4 ”) 0V ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows: Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor B: Engine speed signal from ECM C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes If the actual gear position is higher than the position (2nd) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be more than normal. In case the ratio exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction. This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve B is stuck open. Gear position supposed by TCM 1 2 3 4 In case of gear position with no malfunctions 1 2 3 4 In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck open 4 3* 3 4 *: P0732 is detected. Diagnostic trouble code : A/T 2ND SIGNAL Check item (Possible cause) Malfunction is detected when ... A/T cannot be shifted to the 2nd gear position even if electrical circuit is good. : P0732 AT-276 ● Shift solenoid valve B ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION [RE4R01A] DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITIONS: Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy of test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. 1. 2. 3. 4. – 5. – – 6. 7. ● B AT D SAT014K With CONSULT-II Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is within the range below. FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down SAT971J the fluid). Select “2ND GR FNCTN P0732” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”. Accelerate vehicle to 50 to 55 km/h (31 to 34 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely. THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1/8 (at all times during step 4) Selector lever: D position (O/D ON) Check that “GEAR” shows 3 or 4 after releasing pedal. Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7/8 of “THROTTLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 50 to 55 km/h (31 to 34 SAT021J MPH) until “TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.) If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to AT-279, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to following step. Check that “GEAR” shows 2 when depressing accelerator pedal to WOT. If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0732 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”. Stop vehicle. Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting referring to the table below.) Vehicle condition Gear on actual transmission shift pattern when screen is changed to 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 No malfunction exists 1→2→3→4 Malfunction for P0732 exists. 4→3→3→4 8. A Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.) Refer to AT-279, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Refer to AT-496, "Shift Schedule" . With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. AT-277 E F G H I J K L M DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION [RE4R01A] Wiring Diagram — AT — 2ND ECS007MO WCWA0096E AT-278 DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION [RE4R01A] Diagnostic Procedure ECS007MP A 1. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . Check shift solenoid valve operation. – Shift solenoid valve B Refer to AT-320, "SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly. 1. 2. AT D 2. CHECK CONTROL VALVE E 1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-431, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" . 2. Check to ensure that: – Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight. – Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches. – Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue. – Hydraulic line is free from obstacles. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair control valve assembly. F G H I J SAT367H 3. CHECK DTC K Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-277, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly. Component Inspection ECS007MQ SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B ● For removal, refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL"AT-402, "REMOVAL" . SAT651I Resistance Check ● Check resistance between terminal 2 and ground. AT-279 L M DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION [RE4R01A] Solenoid valve Shift solenoid valve B Terminal No. 2 Ground Resistance (Approx.) 20 - 40Ω Operation Check ● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal 2 and ground. SAT650I AT-280 DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION [RE4R01A] DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION Description ● ● ● PFP:31940 A ECS007MR This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM self-diagnosis. This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis B malfunction. This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into third gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such AT as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, malfunctioning servo piston or brake band, etc. D Gear position 1 2 3 4 Shift solenoid valve A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) E TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Terminal Wire color Item No. 11 L/W Judgement standard (Approx.) Condition Shift solenoid valve A When shift solenoid valve A operates. (When driving in D1 or D4 ) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve A does not operate. (When driving in D2 or D3 ) 0V F G H ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows: Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor B: Engine speed signal from ECM C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes If the actual gear position is higher than the position (3rd) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be more than normal. In case the ratio exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction. This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve A is stuck closed. Gear position supposed by TCM 1 2 3 4 In case of gear position with no malfunctions 1 2 3 4 In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve A stuck closed 1 1 4* 4 I J K L *: P0733 is detected. Diagnostic trouble code : A/T 3RD GR FNCTN Check item (Possible cause) Malfunction is detected when ... A/T cannot be shifted to the 3rd gear position even if electrical circuit is good. : P0733 AT-281 ● Shift solenoid valve A ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit M DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION [RE4R01A] DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITIONS: Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy of test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. 1. 2. 3. 4. – 5. – – 6. 7. With CONSULT-II Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is within the range below. FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down SAT971J the fluid). Select “3RD GR FNCTN P0733” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”. Accelerate vehicle to 70 to 85 km/h (43 to 53 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely. THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1/8 (at all times during step 4) Selector lever: D position (O/D ON) Check that “GEAR” shows 4 after releasing pedal. Depress accelerator pedal steadily with 3.5/8 - 4.5/8 of “THROTTLE POSI” from a speed of 70 to 85 km/h (43 to 53 MPH) until SAT021J “TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.) If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to AT-284, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to following step. Check that “GEAR” shows 3 when depressing accelerator pedal with 3.5/8 - 4.5/8 of “THROTTLE POSI”. If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0733 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”. Stop vehicle. Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting referring to the table below.) Vehicle condition ● Gear on actual transmission shift pattern when screen is changed to 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 No malfunction exists. 1→2→3→4 Malfunction for P0733 exists. 1→1→4→4 8. SAT014K Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to AT-284, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Refer to AT-496, "Shift Schedule" . With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. AT-282 DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION [RE4R01A] Wiring Diagram — AT — 3RD ECS007MS A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0151E AT-283 DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION [RE4R01A] Diagnostic Procedure ECS007MT 1. CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . Check shift solenoid valve operation. – Shift solenoid valve A Refer to AT-315, "SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly. 1. 2. 2. CHECK CONTROL VALVE 1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-431, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" . 2. Check to ensure that: – Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight. – Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches. – Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue. – Hydraulic line is free from obstacles. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair control valve assembly. SAT367H 3. CHECK DTC Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-282, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly. AT-284 DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION [RE4R01A] Component Inspection ECS007MU A SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A ● For removal, refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . B AT D SAT654I Resistance Check ● E Check resistance between terminal 3 and ground. Solenoid valve Shift solenoid valve A Terminal No. 3 Ground Resistance (Approx.) F 20 - 40Ω Operation Check ● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal 3 and ground. G H I SAT653I J K L M AT-285 DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION [RE4R01A] DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION Description ● ● ● PFP:31940 ECS007MV This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM self-diagnosis. This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction. This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into fourth gear position or the torque converter clutch does not lock up as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, malfunctioning oil pump or torque converter clutch, etc. CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Monitor item Condition Specification (Approx.) Torque converter clutch solenoid valve duty Lock-up OFF ↓ Lock-up ON 4% ↓ 94% Line pressure solenoid valve duty Small throttle opening (Low line pressure) ↓ Large throttle opening (High line pressure) 24% ↓ 95% Gear position 1 2 3 4 Shift solenoid valve A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Terminal Wire color Item No. 1 2 11 12 GY/R BR/Y L/W L/Y Condition Line pressure solenoid valve Judgement standard (Approx.) When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine. 1.5 - 2.5V When depressing accelerator pedal fully after warming up engine. 0V Line pressure solenoid valve (with dropping resistor) When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine. 4 - 14V When depressing accelerator pedal fully after warming up engine. 0V Shift solenoid valve A When shift solenoid valve A operates. (When driving in D1 or D4 .) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve A does not operate. (When driving in D2 or D3 .) 0V When shift solenoid valve B operates. (When driving in D1 or D2 .) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve B does not operate. (When driving in D3 or D4 .) 0V Shift solenoid valve B ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows: Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor B: Engine speed signal from ECM C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes If the actual gear position is much lower than the position (4th) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be much less than normal. In case the ratio does not reach the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction. This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve B is stuck closed. AT-286 DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION [RE4R01A] Gear position supposed by TCM 1 2 3 4 In case of gear position with no malfunctions 1 2 3 4 In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck closed 1 2 2 1* A B *: P0734 is detected. Diagnostic trouble code Check item (Possible cause) Malfunction is detected when ... : A/T 4TH GR FNCTN A/T cannot be shifted to the 4th gear position even if electrical circuit is good. : P0734 ● Shift solenoid valve A ● Shift solenoid valve B ● Line pressure solenoid valve ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit AT D E DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITIONS: Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy of test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. 1. 2. 3. 4. – 5. – F G H SAT014K With CONSULT-II Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is within the range below. FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down SAT971J the fluid). Select “4TH GR FNCTN P0734” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”. Accelerate vehicle to 50 to 60 km/h (31 to 37 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely. THROTTLE POSI: Less than 5.5/8 (at all times during step 4) Selector lever: D position (O/D ON) Check that “GEAR” shows 3 after releasing pedal. Depress accelerator pedal steadily with 1/8 - 2/8 of “THROTTLE POSI” from a speed of 50 to 60 km/h (31 to 37 MPH) until SAT021J “TESTING” has turned to “STOP VEHICLE” or “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.) If the check result NG appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to AT-290, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to following step. Check that “GEAR” shows 4 when depressing accelerator pedal with 1/8 - 2/8 of “THROTTLE POSI”. AT-287 I J K L M DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION [RE4R01A] – 6. 7. If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0734 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”. Stop vehicle. Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting referring to the table below.) Vehicle condition No malfunction exists 1→2→3→4 Malfunction for P0734 exists. 1→2→2→1 8. ● Gear on actual transmission shift pattern when screen is changed to 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to AT-290, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Refer to AT-496, "Shift Schedule" . With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. AT-288 DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION [RE4R01A] Wiring Diagram — AT — 4TH ECS007MW A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0152E AT-289 DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION [RE4R01A] Diagnostic Procedure 1. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 ECS007MX TO D4 ) During AT-223, "Cruise Test — Part 1" , does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 9. No >> GO TO 2. SAT988H 2. CHECK LINE PRESSURE Perform line pressure test. Refer to AT-214, "Line Pressure Test" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 7. 3. CHECK SOLENOID VALVES 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . 2. Refer to AT-315, "SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" and AT-320, "SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace solenoid valve assembly. 4. CHECK CONTROL VALVE Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-431, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" . Check to ensure that: – Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight. – Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches. – Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue. – Hydraulic line is free from obstacles. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair control valve. 1. 2. SAT367H 5. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4 ) Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 9. No >> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly. AT-290 DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION [RE4R01A] 6. CHECK LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE A 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . 2. Refer to AT-310, "LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace solenoid valve assembly. B AT 7. CHECK CONTROL VALVE 1. 2. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-431, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" . Check line pressure circuit valves for sticking. – Pressure regulator valve – Pilot valve – Pressure modifier valve OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair control valve. D E F G H SAT367H 8. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4 ) I Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed? OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly. J 9. CHECK DTC K Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-287, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> Perform “Cruise Test — Part 1” again and return to the start point of this flow chart. AT-291 L M DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION [RE4R01A] Component Inspection ECS007MY SOLENOID VALVES ● For removal, refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . AAT613A Resistance Check ● Check resistance between terminals (3, 2, or 6) and ground. Solenoid valve Terminal No. Shift solenoid valve A 3 Shift solenoid valve B 2 Line pressure solenoid valve 6 Ground Resistance (Approx.) 20 - 40Ω 2.5 - 5Ω Operation Check ● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminals (3, 2, 4, 6 or 7) and ground. SAT158J AT-292 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4R01A] DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Description PFP:31940 A ECS007MZ The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated, with the gear in D4 , by the TCM in response to signals sent from the vehicle speed and throttle position sensors. Lock-up piston operation will then be controlled. Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low. When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 2/8) in lock-up condition, the engine speed should not change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up. B AT D SAT342HA E CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Monitor item Torque converter clutch solenoid valve duty Condition Specification (Approx.) Lock-up OFF ↓ Lock-up ON 4% ↓ 94% F G TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Terminal Wire color Item No. 3 G/OR Judgement standard (Approx.) Condition Torque converter clutch solenoid valve When A/T performs lock-up. 8 - 15V When A/T does not perform lock-up. 0V H I ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC Diagnostic trouble code : TCC SOLENOID/CIRC Check item (Possible cause) Malfunction is detected when ... TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tires to operate the solenoid valve. : P0740 ● Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) ● T/C clutch solenoid valve J K L M AT-293 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4R01A] DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE NOTE: If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II and wait at least 1 second. ● SAT014K With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. SEF949Y AT-294 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4R01A] Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV ECS007N0 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0099E AT-295 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4R01A] Diagnostic Procedure ECS007N1 1. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment. Check resistance between terminal cord assembly connector E72 terminal 5 and ground. Refer to wiring diagram. Is resistance approx. 10 - 20 Ω? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> 1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . 2. Check the following items: – Torque converter clutch solenoid valve Refer to AT-297, "TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" . – Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open 2. CHECK RESISTANCE 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check resistance between terminal cord assembly connector E72 terminal 5 and TCM harness connector M77 terminal 3. Refer to wiring diagrams. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. Is resistance approx. 0 Ω? Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 3. CHECK DTC Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-294, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. AT-296 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4R01A] Component Inspection ECS007N2 A TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE ● For removal, refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . B AT D SAT160J Resistance Check ● E Check resistance between torque converter clutch solenoid valve terminal 7 and ground. Solenoid valve Torque converter clutch solenoid valve Terminal No. Resistance (Approx.) F 7 Ground 10 - 20 Ω Operation Check ● G Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal 7 and ground. H I J SAT161J K L M AT-297 DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION [RE4R01A] DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION Description ● ● ● PFP:31940 ECS007N3 This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM self-diagnosis. This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction. This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into fourth gear position, or the torque converter clutch does not lock up as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted), but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, malfunctioning oil pump or torque converter clutch, etc. CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Monitor item Torque converter clutch solenoid valve duty Condition Specification (Approx.) Lock-up OFF ↓ Lock-up ON 4% ↓ 94% TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Terminal Wire color Item No. 1 2 3 GY/R BR/Y G/OR Condition Line pressure solenoid valve Line pressure solenoid valve (with dropping resistor) Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-298 Judgement standard (Approx.) When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine. 1.5 - 2.5V When depressing accelerator pedal fully after warming up engine. 0V When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine. 4 - 14V When depressing accelerator pedal fully after warming up engine. 0V When A/T performs lock-up. 8 - 15V When A/T does not perform lock- up. 0V DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION [RE4R01A] ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as A follows: Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor B B: Engine speed signal from ECM C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes If the actual gear position is much lower than the position (4th) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be much less than normal. In case the ratio does not reach the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction. AT This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve B is stuck closed. Gear position supposed by TCM 1 2 3 4 In case of gear position with no malfunctions 1 2 3 4 In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck closed 1 2 2 1* *: P0744 is detected. Diagnostic trouble code D E Malfunction is detected when ... : A/T TCC S/V FNCTN A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good. : P0744 Check item (Possible cause) ● Line pressure solenoid valve ● Torque converter clutch solenoid valve ● Each clutch ● Hydraulic control circuit F G DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. With CONSULT-II Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 2. Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is within the range below. FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm up the fluid), or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down the fluid). 3. Select “TCC S/V FNCTN P0744” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”. 1. H I J SAT014K L M SAT971J AT-299 K DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION [RE4R01A] 4. – – – 5. ● Accelerate vehicle to more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) and maintain the following condition continuously until “TESTING” has turned to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 30 seconds after “TESTING” shows.) THROTTLE POSI: 1/8 - 2/8 (at all times during step 4) Selector lever: D position (O/D ON) TCC S/V DUTY: More than 94% VHCL/S SE·A/T: Constant speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) Check that “GEAR” shows 4. SAT021J For shift schedule, refer to AT-496, "Shift Schedule" . If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT II for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0744 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”. Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to AT-302, "Diagnostic Procedure" .) Refer to AT-496, "Shift Schedule" . With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. AT-300 DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION [RE4R01A] Wiring Diagram — AT — TCCSIG ECS007N4 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0100E AT-301 DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION [RE4R01A] Diagnostic Procedure 1. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 ECS007N5 TO D4 ) During AT-223, "Cruise Test — Part 1" , does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed? Yes or No Yes >> Check for proper lock-up. GO TO 10. No >> GO TO 2. SAT988H 2. CHECK LINE PRESSURE Perform line pressure test. Refer to AT-214, "Line Pressure Test" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 6. 3. CHECK CONTROL VALVE Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-431, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" . Check to ensure that: – Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight. – Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches. – Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue. – Hydraulic line is free from obstacles. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair control valve. 1. 2. SAT367H 4. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4 ) Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly. 5. CHECK DTC Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-299, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> ● Check for proper lock-up. GO TO 10. AT-302 DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION [RE4R01A] 6. CHECK LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE A 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . 2. Check line pressure solenoid valve operation. Refer to AT-304, "SOLENOID VALVES" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace solenoid valve assembly. B AT 7. CHECK CONTROL VALVE 1. 2. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-431, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" . Check line pressure circuit valves for sticking. – Pressure regulator valve – Pilot valve – Pressure modifier valve OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair control valve. D E F G H SAT367H 8. CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4 ) I Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 9. No >> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly. J 9. CHECK DTC K Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-299, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> ● Check for proper lock-up. GO TO 10. 10. CHECK LOCK-UP CONDITION During AT-223, "Cruise Test — Part 1" , Does A/T perform lock-up at the specified speed? Yes or No Yes >> Perform “Cruise Test − Part 1” again and return to the start point of this flow chart. No >> GO TO 11. 11. CHECK TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . Check torque converter clutch solenoid valve operation. Refer to AT-297, "TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Replace solenoid valve assembly. 1. 2. AT-303 L M DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION [RE4R01A] 12. CHECK CONTROL VALVE 1. 2. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-431, "CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY" . Check control valves for sticking. – Torque converter clutch control valve – Torque converter clutch relief valve OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Repair control valve. SAT367H 13. CHECK LOCK-UP CONDITION Does A/T perform lock-up at the specified speed? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 14. No >> Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly. 14. CHECK DTC Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-299, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> Perform “Cruise Test — Part 1” again and return to the start point of this flow chart. Component Inspection ECS007N6 SOLENOID VALVES ● For removal, refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . AAT614A AT-304 DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION [RE4R01A] Resistance Check ● A Check resistance between terminals (6, 7) and ground. Solenoid valve Line pressure solenoid valve Torque converter clutch solenoid valve Terminal No. 2.5 - 5 Ω 6 Ground 7 Resistance (Approx.) B 10 - 20 Ω AT Operation Check ● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminals (3, 2, 4, 6 or 7) and ground. D E F G H I SAT158J J K L M AT-305 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE [RE4R01A] DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE Description PFP:31940 ECS007N7 The line pressure solenoid valve regulates the oil pump discharge pressure to suit the driving condition in response to a signal sent from the TCM. The line pressure duty cycle value is not consistent when the closed throttle position switch is ON. To confirm the line pressure duty cycle at low pressure, the accelerator (throttle) should be open until the closed throttle position switch is OFF. SAT341H CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Monitor item Line pressure solenoid valve duty Condition Specification (Approx.) Small throttle opening (Low line pressure) ↓ Large throttle opening (High line pressure) 24% ↓ 95% NOTE: The line pressure duty cycle value is not consistent when the closed throttle position switch is ON. To confirm the line pressure duty cycle at low pressure, the accelerator (throttle) should be open until the closed throttle position switch is OFF. TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Terminal Wire color Item No. 1 GY/R 2 BR/Y Judgement standard (Approx.) Condition Line pressure solenoid valve Line pressure solenoid valve (with dropping resistor) When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine. 1.5 - 2.5V When depressing accelerator pedal fully after warming up engine. 0V When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine. 4 - 14V When depressing accelerator pedal fully after warming up engine. 0V ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC Diagnostic trouble code : L/PRESS SOL/CIRC Check item (Possible cause) Malfunction is detected when ... TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. : P0745 AT-306 ● Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted) ● Line pressure solenoid valve DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE [RE4R01A] DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE A NOTE: If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. 2. Depress accelerator pedal completely and wait at least 1 second. ● B AT D SAT014K E With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. F G H SEF949Y I J K L M AT-307 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE [RE4R01A] Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV ECS007N8 WCWA0101E AT-308 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE [RE4R01A] Diagnostic Procedure ECS007N9 A 1. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT B Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment. Check resistance between terminal cord assembly connector E72 terminal 4 and ground. Refer to the wir- AT ing diagram. Is resistance approx. 2.5 - 5Ω? Yes >> GO TO 2. D No >> 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . 2. Check the following items: E – Line pressure solenoid valve Refer to AT-310, "LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" . – Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open F 1. 2. 3. 2. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check resistance between terminal cord assembly connector E72 terminal 4 and TCM harness connector M77 terminal 2. Refer to the wiring diagram. Is resistance approx. 12Ω? Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> Check the following items: ● Dropping resistor Refer toAT-310, "DROPPING RESISTOR" . ● Harness for short or open between TCM terminal 2 and terminal cord assembly connector G H I J 3. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Check resistance between terminal cord assembly connector E72 terminal 4 and TCM harness connector M77 terminal 1. Refer to the wiring diagram. Is resistance approx. 0Ω? Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> Repair or replace harness between TCM terminal 1 and terminal cord assembly. 4. CHECK DTC Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-307, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. AT-309 K L M DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE [RE4R01A] Component Inspection ECS007NA LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE ● For removal, refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . SAT657I Resistance Check ● Check resistance between terminal 6 and ground. Solenoid valve Terminal No. Line pressure solenoid valve 6 Resistance (Approx.) Ground 2.5 - 5 Ω Operation Check ● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal 6 and ground. SAT658I DROPPING RESISTOR ● Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2. Resistance : Approx. 12Ω AAT492A AT-310 DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A [RE4R01A] DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A Description PFP:31940 A ECS007NB Shift solenoid valves A and B are turned ON or OFF by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle speed and throttle position sensors. Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position. B AT D SAT341H Gear position E 1 2 3 4 Shift solenoid valve A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) F TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Terminal Wire color Item No. 11 L/W Judgement standard (Approx.) Condition Shift solenoid valve A When shift solenoid valve A operates. (When driving in D1 or D4 ) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve A does not operate. (When driving in D2 or D3 ) 0V : SFT SOL A/CIRC H I ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC Diagnostic trouble code G Check item (Possible cause) Malfunction is detected when ... TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tires to operate the solenoid valve. : P0750 ● Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted) ● Shift solenoid valve A J K DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. AT-311 L M SAT014K DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A [RE4R01A] 2. 3. ● Start engine. Drive vehicle in D position and allow the transmission to shift 1 → 2 (“GEAR”). With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. SEF949Y AT-312 DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A [RE4R01A] Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A ECS007NC A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0153E AT-313 DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A [RE4R01A] Diagnostic Procedure ECS007ND 1. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment. Check resistance between terminal cord assembly connector E72 terminal 2 and ground. Is resistance approx. 20 - 40Ω? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer toAT-402, "REMOVAL" . 2. Check the following items: – Shift solenoid valve A Refer to AT-315, "SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" . – Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open AAT506A 2. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check resistance between terminal cord assembly connector E72 terminal 2 and TCM harness connector M77 terminal 11. Refer to wiring diagram. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. Is resistance approx. 0Ω? Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 3. CHECK DTC Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-311, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. AT-314 DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A [RE4R01A] Component Inspection ECS007NE A SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A ● For removal, refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . B AT D SAT654I Resistance Check ● E Check resistance between terminal 3 and ground. Solenoid valve Shift solenoid valve A Terminal No. 3 Ground Resistance (Approx.) F 20 - 40 Ω Operation Check ● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal 3 and ground. G H I SAT653I J K L M AT-315 DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B [RE4R01A] DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B Description PFP:31940 ECS007NF Shift solenoid valves A and B are turned ON or OFF by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle speed and throttle position sensors. Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position. SAT341H Gear position 1 2 3 4 Shift solenoid valve A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Terminal Wire color Item No. 12 L/Y Judgement standard (Approx.) Condition Shift solenoid valve B When shift solenoid valve B operates. (When driving in D1 or D2 ) Battery voltage When shift solenoid valve B does not operate. (When driving in D3 or D4 ) 0V ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC Diagnostic trouble code : SFT SOL B/CIRC Check item (Possible cause) Malfunction is detected when ... TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tires to operate the solenoid valve. : P0755 ● Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted) ● Shift solenoid valve B DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. 1. With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. AT-316 SAT014K DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B [RE4R01A] 2. ● Drive vehicle in D position and allow the transmission to shift 1 → 2 → 3 (“GEAR”). A With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. B AT SEF949Y D E F G H I J K L M AT-317 DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B [RE4R01A] Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B ECS007NG WCWA0103E AT-318 DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B [RE4R01A] Diagnostic Procedure ECS007NH A 1. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment. Check resistance between terminal cord assembly connector E72 terminal 1 and ground. Is resistance approx. 20 - 40Ω? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . 2. Check the following items: – Shift solenoid valve B Refer to AT-320, "SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" . – Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open B 1. 2. 3. AT D E AAT508A F 2. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check resistance between terminal cord assembly connector E72 terminal 1 and TCM harness connector M77 terminal 12. Refer to wiring diagram. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. Is resistance approx. 0Ω? Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 3. CHECK DTC G H I J Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-316, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. K L M AT-319 DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B [RE4R01A] Component Inspection ECS007NI SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B ● For removal, refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . SAT651I Resistance Check ● Check resistance between terminal 2 and ground. Solenoid valve Shift solenoid valve B Terminal No. 2 Ground Resistance (Approx.) 20 - 40Ω Operation Check ● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal 2 and ground. SAT650I AT-320 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [RE4R01A] DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Description ● ● PFP:22620 A ECS007NJ Throttle position sensor The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position and sends a signal to the TCM. Throttle position switch Consists of a wide open throttle position switch and a closed throttle position switch. The wide open position switch sends a signal to the TCM when the throttle valve is open at least 1/2 of the full throttle position. The closed throttle position switch sends a signal to the TCM when the throttle valve is fully closed. B AT D AAT495A E CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Monitor item Throttle position sensor Condition Specification Fully-closed throttle Approximately 0.5V Fully-open throttle Approximately 4V TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Terminal Wire color Item No. 16 17 BR/W OR/B G Judgement standard (Approx.) Condition Closed throttle position switch (in throttle position switch) Wide open throttle position switch (in throttle position switch) When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine. [Refer to AT-198, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" ] Battery voltage When depressing accelerator pedal after warming up engine. 0V B/W Throttle position sensor (Power source) 41 OR/L Throttle position sensor J When depressing accelerator pedal more than half-way after warming up engine. [Refer to AT-198, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" ] Battery voltage When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine. 0V K L 42 BR Throttle position sensor (Ground) ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC AT-321 Ignition switch ON 4.5 - 5.5V Ignition switch OFF 0V When depressing accelerator pedal slowly after warming up engine. (Voltage rises gradually in response to throttle position.) — H I or 32 F Fully-closed throttle: 0.5V Fully-open throttle: 4V 0V M DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [RE4R01A] Diagnostic trouble code Check item (Possible cause) Malfunction is detected when ... : TP SEN/CIRC A/T TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor. : P1705 AT-322 ● Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) ● Throttle position sensor ● Throttle position switch DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [RE4R01A] DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE A CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 2. Apply vacuum to the throttle opener, then check the following. Refer to step 1 and step 2 of AT-198, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . 1. Accelerator pedal condition THRTL POS SEN CLOSED THL/SW W/O THRL/P·SW Fully released Less than 4.7V ON OFF Partially depressed 0.1 - 4.6V OFF OFF Fully depressed More than 1.9 4.6V OFF ON 3. 4. B AT D SAT014K E F G SAT971J If the check result is NG, go to AT-325, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the check result is OK, go to following step. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 3 consecutive seconds. Then release accelerator pedal completely. VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more THRTL POS SEN: Approximately 3V or less Selector lever: D position (O/D ON) If the check result is NG, go to AT-325, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the check result is OK, go to following step. H I J K L SAT014K 5. ● Maintain the following conditions for at least 3 consecutive seconds. Then release accelerator pedal completely. VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more Accelerator pedal: Wide open throttle Selector lever: D position (O/D ON) M With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. SEF949Y AT-323 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [RE4R01A] Wiring Diagram — AT — TPS ECS007NK WCWA0154E AT-324 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [RE4R01A] Diagnostic Procedure ECS007NL A 1. CHECK DTC WITH ECM B Perform diagnostic test mode II (self-diagnostic results) for engine control. Refer to EC-634 (VG33E only) or EC-1235 (VG33ER only), “Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”. OK or NG AT OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check throttle position sensor circuit for engine control. Refer to EC-743, "DTC P0121 TP SENSOR" (VG33E only) or EC-1350, "DTC P0121 TP SENSOR" (VG33ER only). D CHECK INPUT SIGNAL 2. With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out the value of “THRTL POS SEN”. E F G H I SAT614J Voltage Fully-closed throttle Fully-open throttle J : Approximately 0.5V : Approximately 4V K Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) 2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 41 and 42 while accelerator pedal is depressed slowly. Voltage Fully-closed throttle valve Fully-open throttle valve (Voltage rises gradually in response to throttle position.) L M : Approximately 0.5V : Approximately 4V AAT474A OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 4. NG >> Check harness for short or open between ECM and TCM regarding throttle position sensor circuit. (Main harness) AT-325 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [RE4R01A] 3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITH CONSULT-II) With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out “CLOSED THL/SW” and “W/O THRL/P-SW” depressing and releasing accelerator pedal. Check the signal of throttle position switch is indicated properly. SAT646J MTBL0011 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Check the following items: ● Throttle position switch Refer to AT-328, "THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH" . ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and throttle position switch (Main harness) ● Harness for short or open between throttle position switch and TCM (Main harness) AT-326 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [RE4R01A] 4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) A Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) 2. Check voltage between TCM connector M77 terminals 16 (BR/W), 17 (OR/B) and ground while depressing, and releasing accelerator pedal slowly. (after warming up engine) B AT D E WAT337 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Check the following items: ● Throttle position switch Refer to AT-328, "THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH" . ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and throttle position switch (Main harness) ● Harness for short or open between throttle position switch and TCM (Main harness) 5. CHECK DTC F G H I Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-323, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. J K L M AT-327 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR [RE4R01A] Component Inspection ECS007NM THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH Closed Throttle Position Switch (Idle position) ● ● Check continuity between terminals 4 and 5. Accelerator pedal condition Continuity Released Yes Depressed No To adjust closed throttle position switch, refer to EC-646, "Basic Inspection" (VG33E only) or EC-1247, "Basic Inspection" (VG33ER only). AAT498A Wide Open Throttle Position Switch ● Check continuity between terminals 5 and 6. Accelerator pedal condition Continuity Released No Depressed Yes AAT499A AT-328 DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4R01A] DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Description PFP:31940 A ECS007NN The overrun clutch solenoid valve is activated by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, overdrive control switch, vehicle speed and throttle position sensors. The overrun clutch operation will then be controlled. B AT D SAT341H E TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Terminal Wire color Item No. 20 L/B Judgement standard (Approx.) Condition Overrun clutch solenoid valve When overrun clutch solenoid valve operates. Battery voltage When overrun clutch solenoid valve does not operate. 0V ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC Diagnostic trouble code : O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC Check item (Possible cause) Malfunction is detected when ... TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. : P1760 ● Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) ● Overrun clutch solenoid valve F G H I J K L M AT-329 DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4R01A] DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve accuracy of test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. ● ● ● ● SAT014K With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Accelerate vehicle to a speed of more than 10 km/h (6MPH) in D position (O/D ON). Release accelerator pedal completely in D position (O/D OFF). With GST 1. Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. SEF949Y AT-330 DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4R01A] Wiring Diagram — AT — OVRCSV ECS007NO A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0105E AT-331 DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4R01A] Diagnostic Procedure ECS007NP 1. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment. Check resistance between terminal cord assembly connector E72 terminal 3 and ground. Is resistance approx. 20 - 40Ω? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . 2. Check the following items: – Overrun clutch solenoid valve Refer to AT-333, "OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" . – Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open AAT500A 2. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check resistance between terminal cord assembly connector E72 terminal 3 and TCM harness connector M77 terminal 20. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. Is resistance approx 0Ω? Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 3. CHECK DTC Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-330, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. AT-332 DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE [RE4R01A] Component Inspection ECS007NQ A OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE ● For removal, refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . B AT D SAT139K Resistance Check ● E Check resistance between terminal 4 and ground. Solenoid valve Overrun clutch solenoid valve Terminal No. 4 Ground Resistance (Approx.) F 20 - 40Ω Operation Check ● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal 4 and ground. G H I SAT688I J K L M AT-333 DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE) [RE4R01A] DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE) PFP:31940 Description ECS007NR The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and sends a signal to the TCM. SAT342HA CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE SAT021J Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Monitor item Condition A/T fluid temperature sensor Specification (Approx.) Cold [20°C (68°F)] ↓ Hot [80°C (176°F)] 1.5V ↓ 0.5V 2.5kΩ ↓ 0.3kΩ TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Terminal Wire color Item No. 10 19 W/R Power source W/R Power source (Same as No. 10) or 28 42 47 R/Y BR R/B Judgement standard (Approx.) Condition Power source (Memory backup) Throttle position sensor (Ground) When turning ignition switch to ON. Battery voltage When turning ignition switch to OFF. 0V When turning ignition switch to ON. Battery voltage When turning ignition switch to OFF. 0V When turning ignition switch to OFF. Battery voltage When turning ignition switch to ON. Battery voltage — A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-334 0V When ATF temperature is 20°C (68°F). 1.5V When ATF temperature is 80°C (176°F). 0.5V DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE) [RE4R01A] ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC Diagnostic trouble code : BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor. : 8th judgement flicker A Check item (Possible cause) Malfunction is detected when ... ● Harness or connections (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● A/T fluid temperature sensor DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE B AT D E SAT014K After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. F G With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Drive vehicle under the following conditions: Selector lever in D position, vehicle speed higher than 20 km/h (12 MPH). H I SAT971J J ● Without CONSULT-II Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. K L M SAT335HB AT-335 DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE) [RE4R01A] Wiring Diagram — AT — BA/FTS ECS007NS WCWA0155E AT-336 DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE) [RE4R01A] Diagnostic Procedure ECS007NT A 1. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE 1. 2. Voltage 3. 4. B Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) Check voltage between TCM harness connectors M77, M78 terminals (10, 19, 28) and ground. AT : Battery voltage D Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Check voltage between TCM terminal 28 and ground. Voltage : Battery voltage E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. AAT476A NG >> Check the following items: ● Harness for short or open between fuse block J/B harness and TCM terminals (10, 19 and 28) (Main harness) ● Ignition switch and fuse Refer toPG-9, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" . 2. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR WITH TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment. Check resistance between terminals 6 and 7 when A/T is cold [20°C (68°F)]. Is resistance approx. 2.5kΩ? Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check the following items: – A/T fluid temperature sensor Refer to AT-339, "A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR" . – Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open F G H 1. 2. 3. I J K L AAT502A M AT-337 DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE) [RE4R01A] 3. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out the value of “FLUID TEMP SE”. SAT614J Voltage Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)] : Approximately 1.5V → 0.5V Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 47 and ground while warming up A/T. Voltage Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)] : : Approximately 1.5V → 0.5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check the following item: ● Harness for short or open between TCM and terminal cord assembly (Main harness) AAT503A 4. CHECK DTC Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-335, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> ● Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. ● If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. AT-338 DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE) [RE4R01A] Component Inspection ECS007NU A A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR ● ● For removal, refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . Check resistance between terminals 6 and 7 while changing temperature as shown at left. Temperature °C (°F) Resistance (Approx.) 20 (68) 2.5 kΩ 80 (176) 0.3 kΩ B AT D AAT485A E F G H I J K L M AT-339 DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR [RE4R01A] DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR Description PFP:24814 ECS007NV The vehicle speed sensor·MTR is built into the speedometer assembly. The sensor functions as an auxiliary device to the revolution sensor when it is malfunctioning. The TCM will then use a signal sent from the vehicle speed sensor·MTR. WAT497 TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Terminal Wire color Item No. 40 G/B Judgement standard (Approx.) Condition Vehicle speed sensor When moving vehicle at 2 to 3 km/h (1 to 2 MPH) for 1 m (3 ft) or more. Voltage varies between less than 1V and more than 4.5V ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC Diagnostic trouble code : VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR Check item (Possible cause) Malfunction is detected when ... TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor. : 2nd judgement flicker AT-340 ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Vehicle speed sensor DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR [RE4R01A] DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE A CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● If conducting this “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” again, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before continuing. B AT D SAT014K E F G SAT971J H After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. 1. 2. ● With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Start engine and accelerate vehicle from 0 to 25 km/h (0 to 6 MPH). I J Without CONSULT-II Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. K L M LAT436 AT-341 DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR [RE4R01A] Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSMTR ECS007NW WCWA0156E AT-342 DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR [RE4R01A] Diagnostic Procedure ECS007NX A 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL. B With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·MTR” while driving. Check the value changes according to driving speed. AT D E F SAT614J Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Check voltage between TCM harness connector M78 terminal 40 and ground while driving at 2 to 3 km/h (1 to 2 MPH) for 1 m (3 ft) or more. Does battery voltage vary between less than 1V and more than 4.5V? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Check the following items: ● Vehicle speed sensor and ground circuit for vehicle speed sensor. Refer to DI-3, "METERS AND GAUGES" . ● Harness for short or open between TCM and vehicle speed sensor (Main harness) G H I J K AAT504A L 2. CHECK DTC Perform AT-341, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. AT-343 M DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR (VG33ER ONLY) [RE4R01A] DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR (VG33ER ONLY) Description PFP:31935 ECS007NY The turbine revolution sensor detects input shaft rpm (revolutions per minute). It is located on the input side of the automatic transmission. The vehicle speed sensor A/T (Revolution sensor) is located on the output side of the automatic transmission. With the two sensors, input and output shaft rpms are accurately detected. The result is optimal shift timing during deceleration and improved shifting. SAT136K TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Terminal No. Wire color Item 38 Y Turbine revolution sensor (Measure in AC range) 42 BR Throttle position sensor (Ground) Judgement standard (Approx.) Condition When engine is running at 1,000 rpm — 1.2V Voltage rises gradually in response to engine speed. 0V ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC Diagnostic trouble code : TURBINE REV Malfunction is detected when ... TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor. : 10th judgement flicker AT-344 Check item (Possible cause) ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Turbine revolution sensor DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR (VG33ER ONLY) [RE4R01A] DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE A CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● If conducting this “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” again, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before continuing. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-II Start engine. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Drive vehicle under the following conditions: Selector lever in “D”, vehicle speed higher than 40 km/h (25 MPH), engine speed higher than 1,500 rpm, throttle opening greater than 1.0/8 of the full throttle position and driving for more than 5 seconds. No Tools 1. Start engine. 2. Drive vehicle under the following conditions: Selector lever in “D”, vehicle speed higher than 40 km/h (25 MPH), engine speed higher than 1,500 rpm, throttle opening greater than 1/8 of the full throttle position and driving for more than 5 seconds. 3. Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-198, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . B AT D SAT014K E F G SAT971J H I J K SAT635I L M AT-345 DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR (VG33ER ONLY) [RE4R01A] Wiring Diagram — AT — TRSA/T ECS007NZ WCWA0157E AT-346 DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR (VG33ER ONLY) [RE4R01A] Diagnostic Procedure ECS007O0 A 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL B With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out the value of “TURBINE REV”. Check the value changes according to engine speed. AT D Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. E F SAT740J 2. Check voltage between TCM harness connector M78 terminal 38 (Y) and ground. (Measure in AC range.) G H I J LAT509 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. K 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM L Check harness for short or open between TCM and turbine revolution sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. M 3. CHECK DTC Perform AT-345, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> GO TO 4. 4. CHECK TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminal for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT-347 DTC TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR (VG33ER ONLY) [RE4R01A] Component Inspection ECS007O1 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR ● Check resistance between terminals 1, 2 and 3. Terminal No. Resistance (Approx.) 1 2 2.4 - 2.8 kΩ 1 3 No continuity 2 3 No continuity LAT449 AT-348 DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM) [RE4R01A] DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM) Description PFP:31036 A ECS007O2 The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the A/T. B AT D SAT574J E ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC Diagnostic trouble code : CONTROL UNIT (RAM) : CONTROL UNIT (ROM) Malfunction is detected when ... ● TCM memory (RAM) or (ROM) is malfunctioning. Check Items (Possible Cause) ● TCM F DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G H I SAT014K NOTE: If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine. 3. Run engine for at least 2 seconds at idle speed. K L M SAT971J AT-349 J DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM) [RE4R01A] Diagnostic Procedure ECS007O3 1. INSPECTION START With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II. 2. Touch “ERASE”. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF for 10 seconds. 4. Perform AT-349, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . Is the “CONTROL UNIT (RAM)” or “CONTROL UNIT (ROM)” displayed again? Yes or No Yes >> Replace TCM. No >> INSPECTION END. AT-350 DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM) [RE4R01A] DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM) Description PFP:31036 A ECS007O4 The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the A/T. B AT D SAT574J E ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC Diagnostic trouble code : CONT UNIT (EEP ROM) Malfunction is detected when ... TCM memory (EEP ROM) is malfunctioning. Check item (Possible cause) F TCM DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G H I SAT014K J NOTE: If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test. K With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine. 3. Run engine for at least 2 seconds at idle speed. L 1. M SAT971J AT-351 DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM) [RE4R01A] Diagnostic Procedure ECS007O5 1. INSPECTION START With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II. 2. Move selector lever to “R” position. 3. Depress accelerator pedal (Full throttle position). 4. Touch “ERASE”. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF for ten seconds. Perform AT-351, "DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" . Is the “CONT UNIT (EEP ROM)” displayed again? Yes or No Yes >> Replace TCM. No >> INSPECTION END. AT-352 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC PFP:00007 A ECS007O6 B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0171E AT-353 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] WCWA0110E AT-354 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WCWA0158E AT-355 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] 1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On ECS007O7 SYMPTOM: ● O/D OFF indicator lamp does not come on for about 2 seconds when turning ignition switch to ON. 1. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE 1. 2. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) Check voltage between TCM harness connectors (M77, M78) terminals (10, 19, 28) and ground. Voltage 3. 4. : Battery voltage Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Check voltage between TCM connector terminal 28 and ground. Voltage : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the following items: ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM (Main harness) ● Refer toAT-246, "Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN" . ● Ignition switch and fuse Refer to PG-9, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" . AAT476A 2. CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check resistance between TCM harness connector M78 terminals (25, 48) and ground. Refer to wiring diagram. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. Is resistance approx. 0Ω? Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> ● Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. ● Refer to AT-246, "Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN" . 3. CHECK LAMP CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to ON position. Set overdrive control switch to ON position. Check voltage between TCM harness connector M78 terminal 13 and ground. Does battery voltage exist? Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> Check the following items. ● Fuse ● O/D OFF indicator lamp Refer to DI-25, "WARNING LAMPS" . ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and O/D OFF indicator lamp (Main harness) ● Refer to PG-9, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" . ● Harness for short or open between O/D OFF indicator lamp and TCM AT-356 AAT505A TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] 4. CHECK SYMPTOM A Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. B AT D E F G H I J K L M AT-357 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] 2. Engine Cannot Be Started In P and N Position ECS007O8 SYMPTOM: ● Engine cannot be started with selector lever in P or N position. ● Engine cannot be started with selector lever in P. Engine can be started with selector lever in D, 2, 1 or R position. 1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to PNP switch circuit? Without CONSULT-II Does self-diagnosis show damage to PNP switch circuit? Yes or No Yes >> Check PNP switch circuit. Refer to AT-249, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH" . No >> GO TO 2. SAT367J 2. CHECK PNP SWITCH INSPECTION Check for short or open of PNP switch 2-pin connector. Refer to AT393, "PNP Switch" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace PNP switch. AAT482A 3. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM Check starting system. Refer to SC-9, "STARTING SYSTEM" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT-358 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] 3. In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or Backward When Pushed ECS007O9 A SYMPTOM: ● Vehicle moves when it is pushed forward or backward with selector lever in P position. B 1. CHECK PARKING COMPONENTS Check parking components. Refer to AT-475, "PARKING PAWL COMPONENTS" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT D E F SAT133B G H I J K L M AT-359 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] 4. In N Position, Vehicle Moves ECS007OA SYMPTOM: ● Vehicle moves forward or backward when selecting N position. 1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT With CONSULT Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to PNP switch circuit? Without CONSULT Does self-diagnosis show damage to PNP switch circuit? Yes or No Yes >> Check PNP switch circuit. Refer to AT-249, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH" . No >> GO TO 2. SAT367J 2. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE Check control linkage. Refer to AT-406, "Manual Control Linkage Adjustment" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-406, "Manual Control Linkage Adjustment" . SAT032G 3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check A/T fluid level again. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Refill ATF. SAT638A AT-360 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] 4. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION A 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check A/T fluid condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> 1. Disassemble A/T. 2. Check the following items: – Forward clutch assembly – Overrun clutch assembly – Reverse clutch assembly B AT D SAT171B E 5. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. F G H I J K L M AT-361 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] 5. Large Shock. N → R Position ECS007OB SYMPTOM: ● There is large shock when changing from N to R position. 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Does self-diagnosis show damage to A/T fluid temperature sensor, line pressure solenoid valve or throttle position sensor circuit? LAT456 Yes or No Yes >> Check damaged circuit. Refer to AT-255, "DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" , AT-306, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-321, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" . No >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Check throttle position sensor. Refer to EC-743, "DTC P0121 TP SENSOR" (VG33E only) or EC-1350, "DTC P0121 TP SENSOR" (VG33ER only). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace throttle position sensor. AAT495A 3. CHECK LINE PRESSURE Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in D position. Refer to AT-214, "Line Pressure Test" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . 2. Check the following items: – Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter) – Line pressure solenoid valve AT-362 SAT494G TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] 4. CHECK SYMPTOM A Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. B AT D E F G H I J K L M AT-363 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] 6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position ECS007OC SYMPTOM: ● Vehicle does not creep backward when selecting R position. 1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check A/T fluid level again. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refill ATF. SAT638A 2. CHECK STALL TEST Check stall revolution with selector lever in 1 and R positions. Refer to AT-496, "Stall Revolution" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. OK in 1 position, NG in R position>>1.Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . 2. Check the following items: – Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter) – Line pressure solenoid valve 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly – Torque converter – Reverse clutch assembly – High clutch assembly NG in both 1 and R positions>> GO TO 6. AT-364 SAT493G TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] 3. CHECK LINE PRESSURE A Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in R position. Refer to AT-214, "Line Pressure Test" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . 2. Check the following items: – Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter) – Line pressure solenoid valve 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly B AT D SAT494G E F 4. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check A/T fluid condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 6. G H I J SAT171B 5. CHECK SYMPTOM K Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. L M AT-365 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. 2. – – 3. 4. – – – – – – Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter) Line pressure solenoid valve Disassemble A/T. Check the following items: Oil pump assembly Torque converter Reverse clutch assembly High clutch assembly Low & reverse brake assembly Low one-way clutch >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT-366 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] 7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 Or 1 Position ECS007OD A SYMPTOM: ● Vehicle does not creep forward when selecting D, 2 or 1 position. B 1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check A/T fluid level again. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refill ATF. AT D E SAT638A F 2. CHECK STALL TEST G Check stall revolution with selector lever in D position. Refer to AT-211, "Stall Test" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 6. H I J SAT493G 3. CHECK LINE PRESSURE K Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in R position. Refer to AT-214, "Line Pressure Test" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . 2. Check the following items: – Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter) – Line pressure solenoid valve 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly AT-367 L M SAT494G TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] 4. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check A/T fluid condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 6. SAT171B 5. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. 2. – – 3. 4. – – – – – – Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter) Line pressure solenoid valve Disassemble A/T. Check the following items: Oil pump assembly Forward clutch assembly Forward one-way clutch Low one-way clutch Low & reverse brake assembly Torque converter >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT-368 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] 8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ECS007OE A SYMPTOM: ● Vehicle cannot be started from D1 on Cruise Test — Part 1. B 1. CHECK SYMPTOM Is “6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position” OK? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Go to AT-364, "6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position" . AT D 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS E Does self-diagnosis show damage to vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor), shift solenoid valve A, B or vehicle speed sensor·MTR after cruise test? Yes or No Yes >> Check damaged circuit. Refer to AT-261, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-311, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" , AT-316, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" , or AT-340, "DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR" . No >> GO TO 3. F G SAT934FB H 3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR I Check throttle position sensor. Refer to EC-743, "DTC P0121 TP SENSOR" (VG33E only) or EC-1350, "DTC P0121 TP SENSOR" (VG33ER only). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace throttle position sensor. J K L AAT495A 4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE M Check line pressure at stall point with selector lever in D position. Refer to AT-214, "Line Pressure Test" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 8. SAT494G AT-369 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] 5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check A/T fluid condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 8. SAT171B 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . 2. Check the following items: – Shift valve A – Shift valve B – Shift solenoid valve A – Shift solenoid valve B – Pilot valve – Pilot filter OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 7. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. AT-370 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . 2. Check the following items: – Shift valve A – Shift valve B – Shift solenoid valve A – Shift solenoid valve B – Pilot valve – Pilot filter 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following items: – Forward clutch assembly – Forward one-way clutch – Low one-way clutch – High clutch assembly – Torque converter – Oil pump assembly OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. B AT D E F G H I J K L M AT-371 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] 9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2 ECS007OF SYMPTOM: ● A/T does not shift from D1 to D2 at the specified speed. A/T does not shift from D4 to D2 when depressing accelerator pedal fully at the specified speed. 1. CHECK SYMPTOM Are “7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 Or 1 Position” and “8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ” OK? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Go to AT-367, "7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 Or 1 Position" and AT-369, "8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" . 2. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT With CONSULT Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to PNP switch circuit? Without CONSULT Does self-diagnosis show damage to PNP switch circuit? Yes or No Yes >> Check PNP switch circuit. Refer to AT-249, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH" . No >> GO TO 3. SAT367J 3. CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T AND VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR CIRCUIT Check vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR circuit. Refer to AT-261, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" and AT-340, "DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR circuits. 4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Check throttle position sensor. Refer to EC-743, "DTC P0121 TP SENSOR" (VG33E only) or EC-1350, "DTC P0121 TP SENSOR" (VG33ER only). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace throttle position sensor. AAT495A AT-372 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] 5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION A 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check A/T fluid condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 8. B AT D SAT171B E 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Remove control valve. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Shift valve A – Shift solenoid valve A – Pilot valve – Pilot filter OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. F G H I 7. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM J K L Remove control valve. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Shift valve A – Shift solenoid valve A – Pilot valve – Pilot filter 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following items: – Servo piston assembly – Brake band – Oil pump assembly OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. AT-373 M TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] 10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 ECS007OG SYMPTOM: ● A/T does not shift from D2 to D3 at the specified speed. 1. CHECK SYMPTOM Are “7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 Or 1 Position” and “8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ” OK? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Go to AT-367, "7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 Or 1 Position" and AT-369, "8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" . 2. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT With CONSULT Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to PNP switch circuit? Without CONSULT Does self-diagnosis show damage to PNP switch circuit? Yes or No Yes >> Check PNP switch circuit. Refer to AT-249, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH" . No >> GO TO 3. SAT367J 3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Check throttle position sensor. Refer to EC-743, "DTC P0121 TP SENSOR" (VG33E only) or EC-1350, "DTC P0121 TP SENSOR" (VG33ER only). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace throttle position sensor. AAT495A AT-374 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] 4. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION A 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check A/T fluid condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 7. B AT D SAT171B E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Shift valve B – Shift solenoid valve B – Pilot valve – Pilot filter OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. F G H I 6. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM J K L Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Shift valve B – Shift solenoid valve B – Pilot valve – Pilot filter 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following items: – Servo piston assembly – High clutch assembly – Oil pump assembly OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. AT-375 M TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] 11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 ECS007OH SYMPTOM: ● A/T does not shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed. ● A/T must be warm before D3 to D4 shift will occur. 1. CHECK SYMPTOM Are “7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 Or 1 Position” and “8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ” OK? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Go to AT-367, "7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 Or 1 Position" and AT-369, "8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" . 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS With CONSULT Does self-diagnosis, after Cruise Test, show damage to any of the following circuits? ● PNP switch ● Overdrive control switch ● A/T fluid temperature sensor ● Revolution sensor ● Shift solenoid valve A or B ● Vehicle speed sensor Yes or No Yes >> Check damaged circuit. Refer to AT-321, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" , AT-255, "DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" , AT-261, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-311, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" , AT-316, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" , or AT-340, "DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR" . No >> GO TO 3. SAT363HA 3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Check throttle position sensor. Refer to EC-743, "DTC P0121 TP SENSOR" (VG33E only) or EC-1350, "DTC P0121 TP SENSOR" (VG33ER only). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace throttle position sensor. AAT495A AT-376 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] 4. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION A 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check A/T fluid condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 7. B AT D SAT171B E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Shift valve B – Overrun clutch control valve – Shift solenoid valve B – Pilot valve – Pilot filter OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. F G H I 6. CHECK SYMPTOM J Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. K 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM L Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Shift valve B – Overrun clutch control valve – Shift solenoid valve B – Pilot valve – Pilot filter 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following items: – Servo piston assembly – Brake band – Torque converter – Oil pump assembly OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. AT-377 M TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] 12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up ECS007OI SYMPTOM: ● A/T does not perform lock-up at the specified speed. 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Does self-diagnosis show damage to torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit after Cruise Test? Yes or No Yes >> Check torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit. Refer to AT-293, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" . No >> GO TO 2. SAT346H 2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Check throttle position sensor. Refer to EC-743, "DTC P0121 TP SENSOR" (VG33E only) or EC-1350, "DTC P0121 TP SENSOR" (VG33ER only). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace throttle position sensor. AAT495A 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Remove control valve. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . Check following items: – Torque converter clutch control valve – Torque converter relief valve – Torque converter clutch solenoid valve – Pilot valve – Pilot filter OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 4. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. AT-378 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] 13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition ECS007OJ A SYMPTOM: ● A/T does not hold lock-up condition for more than 30 seconds. B 1. CHECK DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Does self-diagnosis show damage to engine speed signal circuit after Cruise Test? Yes or No Yes >> Check engine speed signal circuit. Refer to AT-266, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" . No >> GO TO 2. AT D E SAT347H F 2. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION G 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check A/T fluid condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 5. H I J SAT171B 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM K Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Torque converter clutch control valve – Pilot valve – Pilot filter OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 4. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. AT-379 L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. 2. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Torque converter clutch control valve – Pilot valve – Pilot filter 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check torque converter and oil pump assembly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT-380 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] 14. Lock-up Is Not Released ECS007OK A SYMPTOM: ● Lock-up is not released when accelerator pedal is released. B 1. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT AT With CONSULT Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to closed throttle position switch circuit? Without CONSULT Does self-diagnosis show damage to closed throttle position switch circuit? Yes or No Yes >> Check closed throttle position switch circuit. Refer to AT321, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" . No >> GO TO 2. D E F SAT367J G 2. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. H I J K L M AT-381 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 ) ECS007OL SYMPTOM: ● Engine speed does not smoothly return to idle when A/T shifts from D4 to D3 . ● Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when turning overdrive control switch OFF. ● Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when shifting A/T from D to 2 position. 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Does self-diagnosis show damage to overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit after Cruise Test? Yes or No Yes >> Check overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit. Refer to AT329, "DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" . No >> GO TO 2. SAT348H 2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Check throttle position sensor. Refer to EC-743, "DTC P0121 TP SENSOR" (VG33E only) or EC-1350, "DTC P0121 TP SENSOR" (VG33ER only). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace throttle position sensor. AAT495A 3. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION 1. Remove oil pan. 2. Check A/T fluid condition. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 6. SAT171B AT-382 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A 1. 2. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Overrun clutch control valve – Overrun clutch reducing valve – Overrun clutch solenoid valve OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. B AT D 5. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM E F G Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-402, "REMOVAL" . Check the following items: – Overrun clutch control valve – Overrun clutch reducing valve – Overrun clutch solenoid valve 3. Disassemble A/T. 4. Check the following items: – Overrun clutch assembly – Oil pump assembly OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1 H I J K ECS007OM L SYMPTOM: ● Vehicle does not start from D1 on Cruise Test — Part 2. M 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Does self-diagnosis show damage to vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor), shift solenoid valve A, B or vehicle speed sensor·MTR after Cruise Test? Yes or No Yes >> Check damaged circuit. Refer to AT-261, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-311, "DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" , AT-316, "DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" , or AT-340, "DTC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR" . No >> GO TO 2. SAT633I AT-383 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] 2. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> Go to AT-369, "8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" . NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. AT-384 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] 17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D3 , When Overdrive Control Switch ON → OFF ECS007ON A SYMPTOM: ● A/T does not shift from D4 to D3 when changing overdrive control switch to OFF position. B 1. CHECK OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT AT With CONSULT Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to overdrive control switch circuit? Without CONSULT Does self-diagnosis show damage to overdrive control switch circuit? Yes or No Yes >> Check overdrive control switch circuit. Refer to AT-389, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE" . No >> Go to AT-374, "10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3" . D E F G SAT344H H I J K L M AT-385 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] 18. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → 22 , When Selector Lever D → 2 Position ECS007OO SYMPTOM: ● A/T does not shift from D3 to 22 when changing selector lever from D to 2 position. 1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT With CONSULT Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to PNP switch circuit? Without CONSULT Does self-diagnosis show damage to PNP switch circuit? Yes or No Yes >> Check PNP switch circuit. Refer to AT-249, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH" . No >> Go to AT-372, "9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2" . SAT367J AT-386 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] 19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11 , When Selector Lever 2 → 1 Position ECS007OP A SYMPTOM: ● A/T does not shift from 22 to 11 when changing selector lever from 2 to 1 position. B 1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT AT With CONSULT Does “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to PNP switch circuit? Without CONSULT Does self-diagnosis show damage to PNP switch circuit? Yes or No Yes >> Check PNP switch circuit. Refer to AT-249, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH" . No >> GO TO 2. D E F SAT367J G 2. CHECK SYMPTOM H Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. I J K SAT778B 20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake ECS007OQ L SYMPTOM: ● Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when shifting from 22 (12 ) to 11 . M 1. CHECK SYMPTOM Is “6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position” OK? Yes or No Yes >> Go to AT-382, "15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3 )" . No >> Go to AT-364, "6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position" . 21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches Circuit Checks) ECS007OR SYMPTOM: ● O/D OFF indicator lamp does not come on in TCM self-diagnostic procedure even the lamp circuit is good. AT-387 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] DESCRIPTION ● PNP switch The PNP switch assembly includes a transmission range switch. The transmission range switch detects the selector position and sends a signal to the TCM. AAT478A ● Overdrive control switch Detects the overdrive control switch position (ON or OFF) and sends a signal to the TCM. SAT341I ● Throttle position switch Consists of a wide open throttle position switch and a closed throttle position switch. The wide open position switch sends a signal to the TCM when the throttle valve is open at least 1/2 of the full throttle position. The closed throttle position switch sends a signal to the TCM when the throttle valve is fully closed. AAT495A AT-388 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE NOTE: The diagnostic procedure includes inspections for the overdrive control and throttle position switch circuits. A 1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITH CONSULT-II) B With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out P, R, N, D, 2 and 1 position switches moving selector lever to each position. Check the signal of the selector lever position is indicated properly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following items: ● PNP switch Refer to AT-393, "PNP Switch" . ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and PNP switch (Main harness) ● Harness for short or open between PNP switch and TCM (Main harness) AT D E F G SAT701J H 2. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) 2. Check voltage between TCM terminals (26, 27, 34, 35, 36) and ground while moving selector lever through each position. Terminals Lever Position I J K 36 35 34 27 26 P, N B 0 0 0 0 R 0 B 0 0 0 D 0 0 B 0 0 2 0 0 0 B 0 1 0 0 0 0 B L M Does battery voltage exist (B) or non-existent (0)? Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> Check the following items: ● PNP switch Refer to AT-393, "PNP Switch" . ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and PNP switch (Main harness) ● Harness for short or open between PNP switch and TCM (Main harness) LAT457 AT-389 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] 3. CHECK OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out “OVERDRIVE SW”. Check the signal of the overdrive control switch is indicated properly. (Overdrive control switch ON displayed on CONSULT-II means overdrive OFF.) Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) SAT645J 2. Check voltage between TCM harness connector M77 terminal 22 and ground when overdrive control switch is ON and OFF. Voltage Switch position ON Switch position OFF : Battery voltage : 1V or less OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>> GO TO 4. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>> GO TO 5. NG >> Check the following items: ● Overdrive control switch Refer to AT-392, "Overdrive Control Switch" . ● Harness for short or open between TCM and overdrive control switch (Main harness) ● Harness for short or open of ground circuit for overdrive control switch (Main harness) AT-390 AAT510A TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] 4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITH CONSULT-II) A With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “TCM INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out “CLOSED THL/SW” and “W/O THRL/P-SW” depressing and releasing accelerator pedal. Check the signal of throttle position switch is indicated properly. B AT D E F SAT646J G Data Monitor Accelerator pedal condition CLOSED THL/SW W/O THRL/P-SW Released ON OFF Fully depressed OFF ON OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check the following items: ● Throttle position switch Refer to AT-394, "Throttle Position Switch" . ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and throttle position switch (Main harness) ● Harness for short or open between throttle position switch and TCM (Main harness) H I J K L M AT-391 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] 5. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) 2. Check voltage between TCM terminals (16, 17) and ground while depressing, and releasing accelerator pedal slowly. (after warming up engine). WAT337 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check the following items: ● Throttle position switch Refer to AT-394, "Throttle Position Switch" . ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and throttle position switch (Main harness) ● Harness for short or open between throttle position switch and TCM (Main harness) 6. CHECK DTC Perform diagnostic procedure. Refer to AT-389, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. COMPONENT INSPECTION Overdrive Control Switch ● Check continuity between terminals 5 and 6. Continuity Switch position ON Switch position OFF : No : Yes AAT512A AT-392 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] PNP Switch 1. A Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2 and between terminals 3 and (4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9) while moving manual shaft through each position. Lever position Terminal No. P 1-2 3-4 R 3-5 N 1-2 D 2 1 3-7 3-8 3-9 B 3-6 AT SAT517GB D E F G AAT482A 2. 3. If NG, check again with manual control linkage disconnected from manual shaft of A/T assembly. Refer to step 1. If OK on step 2, adjust manual control linkage. Refer to AT-406, "Manual Control Linkage Adjustment" . H I J AAT551A 4. 5. 6. If NG on step 2, remove PNP switch from A/T and check continuity of PNP switch terminals. Refer to step 1. If OK on step 4, adjust PNP switch. Refer to AT-405, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment" . If NG on step 4, replace PNP switch. L M AAT481A AT-393 K TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [RE4R01A] Throttle Position Switch Closed Throttle Position Switch (Idle Position) ● Check continuity between terminals 4 and 5. Accelerator pedal condition Continuity Released Yes Depressed No AAT498A To adjust closed throttle position switch, refer to EC-646 (VG33E only) or EC-1247 (VG33ER only), “Basic Inspection”. Wide Open Throttle Position Switch ● Check continuity between terminals 5 and 6. ● Accelerator pedal condition Continuity Released No Depressed Yes AAT499A AT-394 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM [RE4R01A] A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM Description ● ● PFP:34950 A ECS007OS The mechanical key interlock mechanism also operates as a shift lock: With the key switch turned to ON, the selector lever cannot be shifted from P (park) to any other position B unless the brake pedal is depressed. With the key removed, the selector lever cannot be shifted from P to any other position. The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is placed in P. AT The shift lock and key interlock mechanisms are controlled by the ON-OFF operation of the shift lock solenoid and by the operation of the rotator and slider located inside the key cylinder, respectively. D E F G H I J K SAT138JA L M AT-395 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM [RE4R01A] Wiring Diagram — SHIFT — ECS007OT WCWA0112E AT-396 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM [RE4R01A] Diagnostic Procedure ECS007OU A SYMPTOM 1: ● Selector lever cannot be moved from P position with key in ON position and brake pedal applied. ● Selector lever can be moved from P position with key in ON position and brake pedal released. B ● Selector lever can be moved from P position when key is removed from key cylinder. SYMPTOM 2: ● Ignition key cannot be removed when selector lever is set to P position. It can be removed when AT selector lever is set to any position except P. D 1. CHECK KEY INTERLOCK CABLE Check key interlock cable for damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair key interlock cable. Refer to AT-400, "KEY INTERLOCK CABLE" . E F 2. CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION Check selector lever position for damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check selector lever. Refer to AT-405, "Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment" and AT406, "Manual Control Linkage Adjustment" . G H 3. CHECK POWER SOURCE I 1. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) 2. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch (shift lock brake switch) harness terminal 1 and ground. Does battery voltage exist? Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> Check the following items: ● Harness for short or open between battery and ASCD brake switch (shift lock brake switch) harness terminal 1 ● Fuse ● Ignition switch Refer to PG-9, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" . AT-397 J K L AAT513A M A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM [RE4R01A] 4. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (BRAKE SWITCH) Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.) ● Check voltage between A/T device harness connector M35 terminal 2 (GY) and ground. LAT421 Voltage Brake pedal depressed Brake pedal released : 0V : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Check the following items: ● Harness for short or open between A/T device harness connector 2 and ASCD brake switch (shift lock brake switch) harness connector 2 ● ASCD brake switch (shift lock brake switch) Refer to AT-399, "ASCD BRAKE SWITCH (SHIFT LOCK BRAKE SWITCH)" . 5. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. Disconnect A/T device harness connector. Check continuity between A/T device harness terminal 1 and ground. AAT515A OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair harness or connector. 6. CHECK PARK POSITION SWITCH Refer to AT-399, "PARK POSITION SWITCH" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace park position switch. AT-398 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM [RE4R01A] 7. CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID A Refer to AT-399, "SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace shift lock solenoid. B 8. CHECK SHIFT LOCK OPERATION AT 1. Reconnect shift lock harness connector. 2. Turn ignition switch from OFF to ON” position. (Do not start engine.) 3. Recheck shift lock operation. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END. NG >> 1. Perform A/T device input/output signal inspection test. 2. If NG, recheck harness connector connection. Component Check D E ECS007OV F SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID ● Check operation by applying battery voltage between shift lock solenoid connector terminals 1 and 3. G H I AAT516A PARK POSITION SWITCH ● Check continuity between park position switch harness connector terminal 1 and A/T device harness connector terminal 1. Condition J K Continuity When selector lever is set in “P” position and selector lever button is released Yes Except above No L M AAT517A ASCD BRAKE SWITCH (SHIFT LOCK BRAKE SWITCH) ● Check continuity between ASCD brake switch (shift lock brake switch) harness connector terminals 1 and 2. Condition Continuity When brake pedal is depressed No When brake pedal is released Yes Check ASCD brake switch (shift lock brake switch) after adjusting brake pedal — refer to BR-8, "Adjustment" . AAT518A AT-399 KEY INTERLOCK CABLE [RE4R01A] KEY INTERLOCK CABLE Components PFP:34908 ECS007OW SAT352I CAUTION: ● Install key interlock cable in such a way that it will not be damaged by sharp bends, twists or interference with adjacent parts. ● After installing key interlock cable to control device, make sure that casing cap and bracket are firmly secured in their positions. If casing cap can be removed with an external load of less than 39.2 N (4.0 kg, 8.8 lb), replace key interlock cable with new one. Removal ECS007OX Unlock slider from adjuster holder and remove rod from cable. SAT353I AT-400 KEY INTERLOCK CABLE [RE4R01A] Installation 1. 2. 3. ECS007OY A Set key interlock cable to steering lock assembly and install lock plate. Clamp cable to steering column and fix to control cable with band. Set selector lever to P position. B AT D SAT354I 4. Insert interlock rod into adjuster holder. E F G SAT355I 5. 6. Install casing cap to bracket. Move slider in order to fix adjuster holder to interlock rod. H I J K SAT356I L M AT-401 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE [RE4R01A] ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators PFP:00000 ECS007OZ REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Drain ATF through drain plug. Remove exhaust front tube. Remove oil pan and gasket. ● Always replace oil pan bolts as they are self-sealing bolts. SAT359I 4. 5. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor if necessary. Remove oil strainer. SAT073BA 6. Remove control valve assembly by removing fixing bolts and disconnecting harness connector. SAT353B AT-402 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE [RE4R01A] Bolt length and location A mm (in) Bolt symbol B A 33 (1.30) B 45 (1.77) AT 7. 8. 9. Remove solenoids and valves from valve body if necessary. Remove terminal cord assembly if necessary. Remove accumulator A, B, C and D by applying compressed air if necessary. ● Hold each piston with rag. 10. Reinstall any part removed. ● Always use new sealing parts. ● Always replace oil pan bolts as they are self-sealing bolts. D E F SAT074BA Revolution Sensor Replacement G ECS007P0 —4WD MODEL— H I J AAT565A 1. 2. 3. 4. ● Remove rear engine mounting member from side member while supporting A/T with transfer case with jack. Tighten rear engine mounting member to the specified torque. Refer to EM-129, "REMOVAL" . Lower A/T with transfer case as much as possible. Remove revolution sensor from A/T. Reinstall any part removed. Always use new sealing parts. ● L M —2WD MODEL— ● K Remove revolution sensor from A/T. Always use new sealing parts. SAT661I AT-403 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE [RE4R01A] Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement (VG33ER only) 1. 2. 3. ● ECS007P1 Remove A/T assembly. Refer to AT-407, "Removal" . Remove turbine revolution sensor from A/T assembly upper side. Reinstall any part removed. Always use new sealing parts. SAT136K Rear Oil Seal Replacement ECS007P2 —4WD MODEL— 1. 2. 3. ● 4. Remove transfer case from vehicle. Refer to TF-11, "Removal" . Remove rear oil seal. Install rear oil seal. Apply ATF before installing. Reinstall any part removed. SAT035E —2WD MODEL— 1. 2. 3. – 4. Remove propeller shaft from vehicle. Refer to PR-8, "Removal and Installation" . Remove rear oil seal. Install rear oil seal. Apply ATF before installing. Reinstall any part removed. SAT662I AT-404 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE [RE4R01A] Parking Components Inspection ECS007P3 A —4WD MODEL— 1. 2. 3. Remove propeller shaft. Refer to PR-8, "Removal and Installation" . Remove transfer case from vehicle. Refer to TF-11, "Removal" . Remove A/T control cable bracket from transmission case. B AT D AAT564A 4. 5. 6. 7. ● E Support A/T assembly with a jack. Remove adapter case from transmission case. Replace parking components if necessary. Reinstall any part removed. Always use new sealing parts. F G SAT078B H —2WD MODEL— 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. – Remove propeller shaft from vehicle. Refer to PR-8, "Removal and Installation" . Support A/T assembly with jack. Remove rear engine mounting member. Tighten rear engine mounting member to the specified torque. Refer EM-129, "REMOVAL" . Remove rear extension from transmission case. Replace parking components if necessary. Reinstall any part removed. Always use new sealing parts. Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. ECS007P4 Remove manual control linkage from manual shaft of A/T assembly. Set manual shaft of A/T assembly in N position. Loosen PNP switch fixing bolts. Insert pin into adjustment holes in both PNP switch and manual shaft of A/T assembly as near vertical as possible. Reinstall any part removed. Check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to AT-393, "PNP Switch" . J K L M SAT081B AT-405 I ON-VEHICLE SERVICE [RE4R01A] Manual Control Linkage Adjustment ECS007P5 Move selector lever from P position to 1 position. You should be able to feel the detents in each position. If the detents cannot be felt or the pointer indicating the position is improperly aligned, the linkage needs adjustment. 1. Place selector lever in P position. 2. Loosen lock nuts. SAT361I 3. 4. Tighten turn buckle until it aligns with inner cable, pulling selector lever toward R position side without pushing button. Back off turn buckle 1 turn and tighten lock nuts to the specified torque. Lock nut : 4.4 - 5.9 N·m (0.45 - 0.60 kg-m, 39.1 - 52.1 in-lb) 5. Move selector lever from P position to 1 position. Make sure that selector lever can move smoothly. SAT032G AT-406 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION [RE4R01A] REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal PFP:00000 A ECS007P6 —4WD MODEL— B AT D E F G AAT563A CAUTION: When removing the A/T assembly from engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor (OBD) from the A/T assembly upper side. Be careful not to damage sensor edge. NOTE: To prevent oil spills, drain the A/T fluid before removing the A/T assembly, Refer to MA-38, "Changing A/T Fluid" or insert a plug into the rear oil seal after removing the propeller shaft. 1. Remove battery negative terminal. 2. Remove exhaust front and rear tubes. 3. Remove fluid charging pipe from A/T assembly. 4. Remove oil cooler pipe from A/T assembly. 5. Plug up openings such as the fluid charging pipe hole, etc. 6. Remove propeller shaft. Refer to PR-6, "FRONT PROPELLER SHAFT" (front), PR-7, "REAR PROPELLER SHAFT" (rear). 7. Remove transfer control linkage from transfer. Refer to TF-11, "Removal" . ● Insert plug into rear oil seal after removing rear propeller shaft. ● Be careful not to damage spline, sleeve yoke and rear oil seal. 8. Remove A/T control cable from A/T assembly. 9. Disconnect A/T, turbine revolution sensor (VG33ER only) and vehicle speed sensor harness connectors. 10. Remove the starter motor.SC-25, "Removal and Installation" . 11. Remove the gusset and the rear plate securing engine to A/T assembly. 12. Remove bolts securing torque converter to drive plate. ● Remove the bolts by turning crankshaft. SAT800C AT-407 H I J K L M REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION [RE4R01A] 13. Support A/T and transfer assembly with a jack. 14. Remove rear engine mounting member from body and A/T assembly. Refer to EM-129, "REMOVAL" . 15. Remove bolts securing A/T assembly to engine. 16. Lower A/T assembly with transfer. SAT801C —2WD MODEL— 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. – – 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. – 12. 13. 14. 15. – – 16. Remove battery negative terminal. Remove exhaust front and rear tubes. Remove fluid charging pipe from A/T assembly. Remove oil cooler pipe from A/T assembly. Plug up openings such as the fluid charging pipe hole, etc. Remove propeller shaft. Refer to PR-7, "REAR PROPELLER SHAFT" . Insert plug into rear oil seal after removing rear propeller shaft. SAT663I Be careful not to damage spline, sleeve yoke and rear oil seal. Remove A/T control cable from A/T assembly. Disconnect A/T, turbine revolution sensor (VG33ER only) and vehicle speed sensor harness connectors. Remove starter motor.SC-25, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the gusset and the rear plate securing engine to A/T assembly. Remove bolts securing torque converter to drive plate. Remove the bolts by turning crankshaft. Support A/T assembly with a jack. Remove rear engine mounting member from body and A/T assembly. Refer to EM-129, "REMOVAL" . Remove bolts securing A/T assembly to engine. Pull A/T assembly backwards. Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping. Secure A/T assembly to a jack. Lower A/T assembly. Installation ● ECS007P7 Drive plate runout Maximum allowable runout : Refer to EM-140, "FLYWHEEL/DRIVE PLATE RUNOUT" . If this runout is out of specification, replace drive plate with ring gear. SAT977H AT-408 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION [RE4R01A] ● When connecting torque converter to transmission, measure distance “A” to be certain that they are correctly assembled. Distance “A” VG33E VG33ER A : 26.0 mm (1.024 in) or more : 25.0 mm (0.984 in) or more B AT SAT017B D ● ● Install converter to drive plate. After converter is installed to drive plate, rotate crankshaft several turns and check to be sure that transmission rotates freely without binding. E F G SAT006G ● H Tighten bolts securing transmission. Bolt No. Tightening torque N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) Bolt length “$$$Use Symbol (litre)$$$” mm (in) 1 39 - 49 (4.0 - 5.0, 29 - 36) 47.5 (1.870) 2 39 - 49 (4.0 - 5.0, 29 - 36) 58.0 (2.283) 3 29 - 39 (3.0 - 4.0, 22 - 29) 25.0 (0.984) Gusset to engine 29 - 39 (3.0 - 4.0, 22 - 29) 20.0 (0.787) I J SAT553H ● Reinstall any part removed. ● Check fluid level in transmission. Move selector lever through all positions to be sure that transmission operates correctly. With parking brake applied, rotate engine at idling. Move selector lever through N to D, to 2, to 1 and to R positions. A slight shock should be felt by hand gripping selector each time transmission is shifted. Perform road test. Refer to “AT-216, "Road Test" . ● ● L M SAT638A AT-409 K OVERHAUL [RE4R01A] OVERHAUL Components PFP:00000 ECS007P8 WAT515 AT-410 OVERHAUL [RE4R01A] A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WAT499 AT-411 OVERHAUL [RE4R01A] Oil Channel ECS007P9 LCIA0274E AT-412 OVERHAUL [RE4R01A] Locations of Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings ECS007PA A B AT D E F G H I J K L M WAT378 AT-413 OVERHAUL [RE4R01A] Disassembly 1. 2. 3. ECS007PB Drain ATF through drain plug. Remove turbine revolution sensor (VG33ER only). Remove torque converter by holding it firmly and turning while pulling straight out. SAT018B 4. a. b. c. Check torque converter one-way clutch. Insert Tool into spline of one-way clutch inner race. Hook bearing support unitized with one-way clutch outer race with suitable wire. Check that one-way clutch inner race rotates only clockwise with Tool while holding bearing support with wire. SAT521G 5. Remove park/neutral position (PNP) switch from transmission case. AAT562A 6. ● ● Remove oil pan. Always place oil pan straight down so that foreign particles inside will not move. Always replace oil pan bolts as they are self-sealing bolts. SAT754I AT-414 OVERHAUL [RE4R01A] 7. Place transmission into Tool with the control valve facing up. A B AT SAT522G D 8. ● Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine cause of malfunction. If the fluid is very dark, smells burned, or contains foreign particles, the frictional material (clutches, band) may need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to stick and may inhibit pump pressure. If frictional material is detected, replace radiator after repair of A/T. Refer to CO-30, "Removal and Installation" . E F G SAT171B 9. ● H Remove torque converter clutch solenoid valve and A/T fluid temperature sensor connectors. Be careful not to damage connector. I J K AAT561A 10. Remove oil strainer. a. Remove oil strainer from control valve assembly. Then remove O-ring from oil strainer. L M SAT008B AT-415 OVERHAUL [RE4R01A] b. Check oil strainer screen for damage. SAT025B 11. Remove control valve assembly. a. Straighten terminal clips to free terminal cords then remove terminal clips. SAT009B b. Remove bolts A and B, and remove control valve assembly from transmission. Bolt symbol Length mm (in) A 33 (1.30) B 45 (1.77) SAT353B c. Remove solenoid connector. ● Be careful not to damage connector. SAT026B AT-416 OVERHAUL [RE4R01A] d. Remove manual valve from control valve assembly. A B AT SAT127B 12. Remove terminal cord assembly from transmission case while pushing on stopper. ● Be careful not to damage cord. ● Do not remove terminal cord assembly unless it is damaged. D E F G SAT128B H 13. Remove converter housing from transmission case. ● Be careful not to scratch converter housing. I J K SAT999A 14. Remove O-ring from input shaft. L M SAT995A AT-417 OVERHAUL [RE4R01A] 15. Remove oil pump assembly. a. Attach Tool to oil pump assembly and extract it evenly from transmission case. SAT027B b. c. Remove O-ring from oil pump assembly. Remove traces of sealant from oil pump housing. ● Be careful not to scratch pump housing. SAT028B d. Remove needle bearing and thrust washer from oil pump assembly. SAT108B 16. Remove input shaft and oil pump gasket. SAT988A AT-418 OVERHAUL [RE4R01A] 17. Remove brake band and band strut. a. Loosen lock nut and remove band servo anchor end pin from transmission case. A B AT SAT029B D b. Remove brake band and band strut from transmission case. E F G SAT986A c. Hold brake band in a circular shape with clip. H I J SAT655 18. Remove front side clutch and gear components. a. Remove clutch pack (reverse clutch, high clutch and front sun gear) from transmission case. K L M SAT030B b. c. Remove front bearing race from clutch pack. Remove rear bearing race from clutch pack. SAT113B AT-419 OVERHAUL [RE4R01A] d. Remove front planetary carrier from transmission case. SAT031B e. f. Remove front needle bearing from front planetary carrier. Remove rear bearing from front planetary carrier. SAT968A g. Remove rear sun gear from transmission case. SAT974A 19. Remove rear extension or adapter case. a. Remove rear extension or adapter case from transmission case. b. Remove rear extension or adapter case gasket from transmission case. SAT716C AT-420 OVERHAUL [RE4R01A] c. Remove oil seal from adapter case or rear extension. ● Do not remove oil seal unless it is to be replaced. A B AT SAT146GA d. e. D Remove revolution sensor from adapter case or rear extension. Remove O-ring from revolution sensor. E F G SAT147G H 20. Remove output shaft and parking gear. a. Remove rear snap ring from output shaft. I J SAT960A b. c. Slowly push output shaft all the way forward. ● Do not use excessive force. Remove snap ring from output shaft. K L M SAT957A d. e. Remove output shaft and parking gear as a unit from transmission case. Remove parking gear from output shaft. SAT109B AT-421 OVERHAUL [RE4R01A] f. Remove needle bearing from transmission case. SAT033B 21. Remove rear side clutch and gear components. a. Remove front internal gear. SAT954A b. Remove bearing race from front internal gear. SAT110B c. Remove needle bearing from rear internal gear. SAT111B d. Remove rear internal gear, forward clutch hub and overrun clutch hub as a set from transmission case. SAT951A AT-422 OVERHAUL [RE4R01A] e. f. Remove needle bearing from overrun clutch hub. Remove overrun clutch hub from rear internal gear and forward clutch hub. A B AT SAT148G g. D Remove thrust washer from overrun clutch hub. E F G SAT036B h. Remove forward clutch assembly from transmission case. H I J SAT037B 22. Remove band servo and accumulator components. a. Remove band servo retainer from transmission case. K L M SAT038B b. c. Apply compressed air to oil hole until band servo piston comes out of transmission case. ● Hold piston with a rag and gradually direct air to oil hole. Remove return springs. SAT039B AT-423 OVERHAUL [RE4R01A] d. e. Remove springs from accumulator pistons B, C and D. Apply compressed air to each oil hole until piston comes out. ● Hold piston with a rag and gradually direct air to oil hole. Identification of accumulator pistons A B C D Identification of oil holes a b c d SAT040BA f. Remove O-ring from each piston. SAT523GA 23. Remove manual shaft components, if necessary. a. Hold width across flats of manual shaft (outside the transmission case) and remove lock nut from shaft. SAT041B b. Remove retaining pin from transmission case. SAT042B c. While pushing detent spring down, remove manual plate and parking rod from transmission case. SAT935A AT-424 OVERHAUL [RE4R01A] d. Remove manual shaft from transmission case. A B AT SAT043B e. D Remove spacer and detent spring from transmission case. E F G SAT934A f. Remove oil seal from transmission case. H I J SAT044B K L M AT-425 OIL PUMP [RE4R01A] OIL PUMP Components PFP:15010 ECS007PC WAT379 Disassembly 1. ECS007PD Loosen bolts in numerical order and remove oil pump cover. SAT649A 2. ● Remove rotor, vane rings and vanes. Inscribe a mark on back of rotor for identification of fore-aft direction when reassembling rotor. Then remove rotor. SAT650A AT-426 OIL PUMP [RE4R01A] 3. ● While pushing on cam ring remove pivot pin. Be careful not to scratch oil pump housing. A B AT SAT651A D 4. ● ● While holding cam ring and spring lift out cam ring spring. Be careful not to damage oil pump housing. Hold cam ring spring to prevent it from jumping. E F G SAT652A 5. H Remove cam ring and cam ring spring from oil pump housing. I J K SAT653A 6. Remove pivot pin from control piston and remove control piston assembly. L M SAT654A 7. ● Remove oil seal from oil pump housing. Be careful not to scratch oil pump housing. SAT655A AT-427 OIL PUMP [RE4R01A] Inspection ECS007PE OIL PUMP COVER, ROTOR, VANES, CONTROL PISTON, SIDE SEALS, CAM RING AND FRICTION RING ● Check for wear or damage. SAT656A SIDE CLEARANCES ● ● Measure side clearances between end of oil pump housing and cam ring, rotor, vanes and control piston. Measure in at least four places along their circumferences. Maximum measured values should be within specified positions. Before measurement, check that friction rings, O-ring, control piston side seals and cam ring spring are removed. Standard clearance (Cam ring, rotor, vanes and control piston) ● : Refer to AT-500, "Oil Pump and Low One-way Clutch" . If not within standard clearance, replace oil pump assembly except oil pump cover assembly. SAT657A SEAL RING CLEARANCE ● ● Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove. Standard clearance : 0.10 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 0.0098 in) Wear limit : 0.25 mm (0.0098 in) If not within wear limit, replace oil pump cover assembly. SAT658A Assembly 1. ● ECS007PF Drive oil seal into oil pump housing. Apply ATF to outer periphery and lip surface. SAT081E AT-428 OIL PUMP [RE4R01A] 2. a. b. Install cam ring in oil pump housing as follows: Install side seal on control piston. ● Pay attention to its direction — Black surface goes toward control piston. ● Apply petroleum jelly to side seal. Install control piston on oil pump. A B AT SAT654A D c. Install O-ring and friction ring on cam ring. ● Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring. E F G SAT660A d. Assemble cam ring, cam ring spring and spring seat. Install spring by pushing it against pump housing. H I J SAT661A e. K While pushing on cam ring install pivot pin. L M SAT651A 3. ● Install rotor, vanes and vane rings. Pay attention to direction of rotor. SAT662A AT-429 OIL PUMP [RE4R01A] 4. a. b. Install oil pump housing and oil pump cover. Wrap masking tape around splines of oil pump cover assembly to protect seal. Position oil pump cover assembly in oil pump housing assembly, then remove masking tape. Tighten bolts in a crisscross pattern. SAT649A 5. ● ● Install new seal rings carefully after packing ring grooves with petroleum jelly. Press rings down into jelly to a close fit. Seal rings come in two different diameters. Check fit carefully in each groove. Small dia. seal ring : No mark Large dia. seal ring : Yellow mark in area shown by arrow Do not spread gap of seal ring excessively while installing. It may deform ring. AT-430 SAT663A CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY [RE4R01A] CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY Components PFP:31705 A ECS007PG B AT D E F G H I J K L M LCIA0275E AT-431 CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY [RE4R01A] Disassembly 1. a. b. ECS007PH Remove solenoids. Remove torque converter clutch solenoid valve and side plate from lower body. Remove O-ring from solenoid. SAT194B c. d. Remove line pressure solenoid valve from upper body. Remove O-ring from solenoid. SAT667A e. f. Remove 3-unit solenoid assembly from upper body. Remove O-rings from solenoids. SAT043G 2. a. b. Disassemble upper and lower bodies. Place upper body face down, and remove bolts, reamer bolts, side plate and support plates. Remove lower body and separator plate as a unit from upper body. ● Be careful not to drop pilot filter, orifice check valve, spring and steel balls. SAT195B AT-432 CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY [RE4R01A] c. d. Place lower body face down, and remove separator plate. Remove pilot filter, orifice check valve and orifice check spring. A B AT SAT670A D e. Check to see that steel balls are properly positioned in upper body. Then remove them from upper body. E F G SAT671A Inspection ECS007PI H LOWER AND UPPER BODIES ● Check to see that there are pins and retainer plates in lower body. I J K SAT672A ● ● L Check to see that there are pins and retainer plates in upper body. Be careful not to lose these parts. M SAT673A AT-433 CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY [RE4R01A] ● ● Check to make sure that oil circuits are clean and free from damage. Check tube brackets and tube connectors for damage. SAT674A SEPARATOR PLATE ● Make sure that separator plate is free of damage and not deformed and oil holes are clean. SAT675A PILOT FILTER ● Check to make sure that filter is not clogged or damaged. SAT676A TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE ● ● Check that filter is not clogged or damaged. Measure resistance. Refer to AT-297, "TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" . SAT149G LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE ● ● Check that filter is not clogged or damaged. Measure resistance. Refer to AT-310, "LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" . AT-434 CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY [RE4R01A] 3-UNIT SOLENOID ASSEMBLY (OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE AND SHIFT SOLENOID VALVES A AND B) ● Measure resistance of each solenoid. Refer to AT-333, "OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-315, "SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A" , AT-320, "SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B" . A B AT D SAT095B A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR ● E Measure resistance. Refer to AT-339, "A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR" . F G H SAT196BA Assembly 1. a. ECS007PJ I Install upper and lower bodies. Place oil circuit of upper body face up. Install steel balls in their proper positions. J K L SAT671A b. Install reamer bolts from bottom of upper body. M SAT681A AT-435 CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY [RE4R01A] c. Place oil circuit of lower body face up. Install orifice check spring, orifice check valve and pilot filter. SAT682A d. e. Install separator plate on lower body. Install and temporarily tighten support plates, fluid temperature sensor and tube brackets. SAT197B f. Temporarily assemble lower and upper bodies, using reamer bolt as a guide. ● Be careful not to dislocate or drop steel balls, orifice check spring, orifice check valve and pilot filter. SAT198B g. Install and temporarily tighten bolts and tube brackets in their proper locations. SAT199BA AT-436 CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY [RE4R01A] Bolt length and location: Bolt symbol Bolt length mm (in) 2. a. a b c d 70 (2.76) 50 (1.97) 33 (1.30) 27 (1.06) A Install solenoids. Attach O-ring and install torque converter clutch solenoid valve and side plates onto lower body. B AT D SAT200B b. c. 3. Attach O-rings and install 3-unit solenoids assembly onto upper body. Attach O-ring and install line pressure solenoid valve onto upper body. Tighten all bolts. E F G H SAT150G I J K L M AT-437 CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY [RE4R01A] CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY Components PFP:31711 ECS007PK SAT142J Apply ATF to all components before their installation. Numbers preceding valve springs correspond with those shown in AT-497, "Return Springs" . AT-438 CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY [RE4R01A] Disassembly 1. ECS007PL A Remove valves at parallel pins. ● Do not use a magnetic hand. B AT D SAT834A a. Use a wire paper clip to push out parallel pins. E F G SAT822A b. Remove parallel pins while pressing their corresponding plugs and sleeves. ● Remove plug slowly to prevent internal parts from jumping out. H I J K SAT823A c. L Place mating surface of valve face down, and remove internal parts. ● If a valve is hard to remove, place valve body face down and lightly tap it with a soft hammer. ● Be careful not to drop or damage valves and sleeves. M SAT824A AT-439 CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY [RE4R01A] 2. a. Remove valves at retainer plates. Pry out retainer plate with wire paper clip. SAT825A b. Remove retainer plates while holding spring. SAT826A c. Place mating surface of valve face down, and remove internal parts. ● If a valve is hard to remove, lightly tap valve body with a soft hammer. ● Be careful not to drop or damage valves, sleeves, etc. SAT827A ● ● 4-2 sequence valve and relay valve are located far back in upper body. If they are hard to remove, carefully push them out using stiff wire. Be careful not to scratch sliding surface of valve with wire. SAT828A Inspection ECS007PM SAT829A AT-440 CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY [RE4R01A] VALVE SPRINGS ● Measure free length and outer diameter of each valve spring. Also check for damage or deformation. Inspection standard ● : Refer to AT-497, "Return Springs" . B Replace valve springs if deformed or fatigued. CONTROL VALVES ● AT Check sliding surfaces of valves, sleeves and plugs. Assembly 1. A ECS007PN D Lubricate the control valve body and all valves with ATF. Install control valves by sliding them carefully into their bores. ● Be careful not to scratch or damage valve body. E F SAT830A Wrap a small screwdriver with vinyl tape and use it to insert the valves into proper position. Pressure regulator valve ● If pressure regulator plug is not centered properly, sleeve cannot be inserted into bore in upper body. If this happens, use vinyl tape wrapped screwdriver to center sleeve until it can be inserted. G ● H I J SAT832A SAT831A K Turn sleeve slightly while installing. Accumulator control plug ● Align protrusion of accumulator control sleeve with notch in plug. ● Align parallel pin groove in plug with parallel pin, and install accumulator control valve. ● L M SAT833A 2. Install parallel pins and retainer plates. SAT834A AT-441 CONTROL VALVE UPPER BODY [RE4R01A] ● While pushing plug, install parallel pin. 4-2 sequence valve and relay valve ● Push 4-2 sequence valve and relay valve with wire wrapped in vinyl tape to prevent scratching valve body. Install parallel pins. SAT835A SAT823A ● Insert retainer plate while pushing spring. SAT836A AT-442 CONTROL VALVE LOWER BODY [RE4R01A] CONTROL VALVE LOWER BODY Components PFP:31713 A ECS007PO B AT D E F G H I J K L M SAT966I Apply ATF to all components before their installation. Numbers preceding valve springs correspond with those shown in AT-497, "Return Springs" 9. AT-443 CONTROL VALVE LOWER BODY [RE4R01A] Disassembly 1. 2. ECS007PP Remove valves at parallel pins. Remove valves at retainer plates. For removal procedures, refer to “DISASSEMBLY” of control valve upper body. SAT838A Inspection ECS007PQ VALVE SPRINGS ● Check each valve spring for damage or deformation. Also measure free length and outer diameter. Inspection standard ● : Refer to AT-497, "Return Springs" . Replace valve springs if deformed or fatigued. SAT829A CONTROL VALVES ● Check sliding surfaces of control valves, sleeves and plugs for damage. Assembly ● ECS007PR Install control valves. For installation procedures, refer to AT-478, "ASSEMBLY" . SAT838A AT-444 REVERSE CLUTCH [RE4R01A] REVERSE CLUTCH Components PFP:31510 A ECS007PS B AT D E F G H I J LCIA0276E K Disassembly 1. a. b. c. ECS007PT Check operation of reverse clutch. Install seal ring onto oil pump cover and install reverse clutch. Apply compressed air to oil hole. Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring. If retaining plate does not contact snap ring: ● D-ring might be damaged. ● Oil seal might be damaged. ● Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball. L M SAT841A AT-445 REVERSE CLUTCH [RE4R01A] 2. Remove drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate, dish plate and snap ring. SAT842A 3. ● 4. Remove snap ring from clutch drum while compressing clutch spring(s). Do not expand snap ring excessively. Remove spring retainer and return spring. SAT524G 5. ● 6. Install seal ring onto oil pump cover and install reverse clutch drum. While holding piston, gradually apply compressed air to oil hole until piston is removed. Do not apply compressed air abruptly. Remove D-ring and oil seal from piston. SAT844A Inspection ECS007PU REVERSE CLUTCH SNAP RING AND SPRING RETAINER ● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. REVERSE CLUTCH RETURN SPRINGS (VG33E ONLY) ● Check for deformation or damage. Also measure free length and outside diameter. Inspection standard : Refer to AT-497, "Return Springs" . SAT829A AT-446 REVERSE CLUTCH [RE4R01A] REVERSE CLUTCH DRIVE PLATES ● ● Thickness of drive plate Standard value Wear limit ● A Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. Measure thickness of facing. B : 1.90 - 2.05 mm (0.0748 0.0807 in) : 1.80 mm (0.0709 in) AT If not within wear limit, replace. SAT845A D REVERSE CLUTCH DISH PLATE ● Check for deformation or damage. E REVERSE CLUTCH PISTON ● ● ● Shake piston to assure that balls are not seized. Apply compressed air to check ball oil hole opposite the return spring. Make sure there is no air leakage. Also apply compressed air to oil hole on return spring side to assure that air leaks past ball. F G H SAT846A I Assembly 1. ● ECS007PV Install D-ring and oil seal on piston. Apply ATF to both parts. J K L SAT847A M 2. ● Install piston assembly by turning it slowly and evenly. Apply ATF to inner surface of drum. SAT848A AT-447 REVERSE CLUTCH [RE4R01A] 3. Install return springs and spring retainer (VG33E only) or spring retainer (VG33ER only). SAT849A 4. Install snap ring while compressing clutch springs. SAT524G SAT850A ● 5. 6. Do not align snap ring gap with spring retainer stopper. Install drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish plate. Install snap ring. SAT842A AT-448 REVERSE CLUTCH [RE4R01A] 7. Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring. If not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate. Specified clearance Standard Allowable limit Retaining plate A : 0.5 - 0.8 mm (0.020 0.031 in) : 1.2 mm (0.047 in) : Refer to AT-498, "REVERSE CLUTCH" . B AT SAT852A D 8. Check operation of reverse clutch. Refer to AT-445, "Disassembly" . E F G SAT841A H I J K L M AT-449 HIGH CLUTCH [RE4R01A] HIGH CLUTCH Components PFP:31410 ECS007PW LAT437 Disassembly and Assembly ECS007PX Service procedures for high clutch are essentially the same as those for reverse clutch, with the following exception: SAT853A AT-450 HIGH CLUTCH [RE4R01A] ● Check of high clutch operation A B AT SAT854A D ● Removal and installation of return spring E F G SAT525G ● H Inspection of high clutch return springs Inspection standard : Refer to AT-497, "Return Springs" . I J K SAT829A ● Inspection of high clutch drive plate L Thickness of drive plate Standard : 1.52 - 1.67 mm (0.0598 0.0657 in) Wear limit : 1.40 mm (0.0551 in) M SAT845A AT-451 HIGH CLUTCH [RE4R01A] ● Measurement of clearance between retaining plate and snap ring Specified clearance Standard Allowable limit VG33E only VG33ER only Retaining plate : 1.8 - 2.2 mm (0.071 0.087 in) : 2.8 mm (0.110 in) : 2.2 mm (0.087 in) : Refer to AT-498, "HIGH CLUTCH" . AT-452 SAT858A FORWARD AND OVERRUN CLUTCHES [RE4R01A] FORWARD AND OVERRUN CLUTCHES Components PFP:31570 A ECS007PY B AT D E F G H I J K L M LCIA0261E AT-453 FORWARD AND OVERRUN CLUTCHES [RE4R01A] Disassembly and Assembly ECS007PZ Forward and overrun clutches are serviced essentially the same way as reverse clutch is serviced. However, note the following exceptions. ● Check of forward clutch operation SAT860A ● Check of overrun clutch operation SAT861A ● Removal of forward clutch drum Remove forward clutch drum from transmission case by holding snap ring. SAT865A ● – Removal of forward clutch and overrun clutch pistons While holding overrun clutch piston, gradually apply compressed air to oil hole. SAT862A AT-454 FORWARD AND OVERRUN CLUTCHES [RE4R01A] – Remove overrun clutch from forward clutch. A B AT SAT863A D ● Removal and installation of return springs E F G SAT526G ● H Inspection of forward clutch and overrun clutch return springs Inspection standard : Refer to AT-497, "Return Springs" . I J K SAT829A ● Inspection of forward clutch drive plates L Thickness of drive plate Standard : 1.52 - 1.67 mm (0.0598 - 0.0657 in) Wear limit : 1.40 mm (0.0551 in) M SAT845A AT-455 FORWARD AND OVERRUN CLUTCHES [RE4R01A] ● Inspection of overrun clutch drive plates Thickness of drive plate Standard : 1.90 - 2.05 mm (0.0748 - 0.0807 in) Wear limit : 1.80 mm (0.0709 in) SAT845A ● – • Installation of forward clutch piston and overrun clutch piston Install forward clutch piston by turning it slowly and evenly. Apply ATF to inner surface of clutch drum. SAT866A • Align notch in forward clutch piston with groove in forward clutch drum. SAT867A – • Install overrun clutch by turning it slowly and evenly. Apply ATF to inner surface of forward clutch piston. SAT868A AT-456 FORWARD AND OVERRUN CLUTCHES [RE4R01A] ● Measurement of clearance between retaining plate and snap ring of overrun clutch A Specified clearance Standard : 1.0 - 1.4 mm (0.039 - 0.055 in) Allowable limit : 2.4 mm (0.094 in) Retaining plate : Refer to AT-499, "FORWARD CLUTCH" . B AT SAT869A ● Measurement of clearance between retaining plate and snap ring of forward clutch Specified clearance Standard Allowable limit VG33E only Model 4FX17 (2WD) Model 4FX18 (4WD) VG33ER only Model 4FX19 (2WD) Model 4FX20 (4WD) Retaining plate D E : 0.35 - 0.75 mm (0.0138 - 0.0295 in) F : 2.15 mm (0.085 in) : 2.15 mm (0.085 in) SAT870A : 2.15 mm (0.085 in) : 2.35 mm (0.093 in) : Refer to AT-499, "FORWARD CLUTCH" . G H I J K L M AT-457 LOW & REVERSE BRAKE [RE4R01A] LOW & REVERSE BRAKE Components PFP:31645 ECS007Q0 LAT423 Disassembly 1. a. b. c. ECS007Q1 Check operation of low and reverse brake. Install seal ring onto oil pump cover and install reverse clutch. Apply compressed air to oil hole. Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring. If retaining plate does not contact snap ring: ● D-ring might be damaged. ● Oil seal might be damaged. ● Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball. SAT872A 2. Remove snap ring, low and reverse brake drive plates, driven plates and dish plate. SAT873A AT-458 LOW & REVERSE BRAKE [RE4R01A] 3. 4. 5. Remove low one-way clutch inner race, spring retainer and return spring from transmission case. Remove seal rings from low one-way clutch inner race. Remove needle bearing from low one-way clutch inner race. A B AT SAT382I D 6. 7. Remove low and reverse brake piston using compressed air. Remove oil seal and D-ring from piston. E F G SAT876A Inspection ECS007Q2 LOW AND REVERSE BRAKE SNAP RING AND SPRING RETAINER ● Check for deformation, or damage. I LOW AND REVERSE BRAKE RETURN SPRINGS ● H Check for deformation or damage. Also measure free length and outside diameter. Inspection standard J : Refer to AT-497, "Return Springs" . K L SAT829A LOW AND REVERSE BRAKE DRIVE PLATES ● ● M Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. Measure thickness of facing. Thickness of drive plate Standard value : 1.52 - 1.67 mm (0.0598 0.0657 in) Wear limit : 1.40 mm (0.0551 in) ● If not within wear limit, replace. SAT845A AT-459 LOW & REVERSE BRAKE [RE4R01A] LOW ONE-WAY CLUTCH INNER RACE ● Check frictional surface of inner race for wear or damage. SAT877A ● ● ● Install a new seal rings onto low one-way clutch inner race. Be careful not to expand seal ring gap excessively. Measure seal ring-to-groove clearance. Inspection standard Standard value Allowable limit ● : 0.10 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 0.0098 in) : 0.25 mm (0.0098 in) If not within allowable limit, replace low one-way clutch inner race. Assembly 1. ● ● SAT878A ECS007Q3 Install needle bearing onto one-way clutch inner race. Pay attention to its direction — Black surface goes to rear side. Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. SAT112B 2. ● Install oil seal and D-ring onto piston. Apply ATF to oil seal and D-ring. SAT879A AT-460 LOW & REVERSE BRAKE [RE4R01A] 3. ● Install piston by rotating it slowly and evenly. Apply ATF to inner surface of transmission case. A B AT SAT880A D 4. 5. 6. Install return springs, spring retainer and low one-way clutch inner race onto transmission case. Install dish plate, low and reverse brake drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate. Install snap ring on transmission case. E F G SAT881A 7. H Check operation of low and reverse brake clutch piston. Refer to AT-414, "Disassembly" . I J K SAT872A 8. Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring. If not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate. Specified clearance Standard Allowable limit VG33E only VG33ER only Retaining plate L : 0.8 - 1.1 mm (0.031 0.043 in) : 2.5 mm (0.098 in) : 2.7 mm (0.106 in) : Refer to AT-500, "LOW & REVERSE BRAKE" . AT-461 M SAT885A LOW & REVERSE BRAKE [RE4R01A] 9. ● ● Install low one-way clutch inner race seal ring. Apply petroleum jelly to seal ring. Make sure seal rings are pressed firmly into place and held by petroleum jelly. SAT884A AT-462 FORWARD CLUTCH DRUM ASSEMBLY [RE4R01A] FORWARD CLUTCH DRUM ASSEMBLY Components PFP:31571 A ECS007Q4 B AT D SAT211GA Disassembly 1. 2. ECS007Q5 Remove snap ring from forward clutch drum. Remove side plate from forward clutch drum. E F G H SAT212G 3. 4. I Remove low one-way clutch from forward clutch drum. Remove snap ring from forward clutch drum. J K L SAT213G 5. Remove needle bearing from forward clutch drum. M SAT891A AT-463 FORWARD CLUTCH DRUM ASSEMBLY [RE4R01A] Inspection ECS007Q6 FORWARD CLUTCH DRUM ● ● Check spline portion for wear or damage. Check frictional surfaces of low one-way clutch and needle bearing for wear or damage. SAT892A NEEDLE BEARING AND LOW ONE-WAY CLUTCH ● Check frictional surface for wear or damage. SAT893A Assembly 1. 2. ECS007Q7 Install needle bearing in forward clutch drum. Install snap ring onto forward clutch drum. SAT214G 3. Install low one-way clutch onto forward clutch drum by pushing the roller in evenly. SAT894A AT-464 FORWARD CLUTCH DRUM ASSEMBLY [RE4R01A] ● Install low one-way clutch with flange facing rearward. A B AT SAT895A D 4. 5. Install side plate onto forward clutch drum. Install snap ring onto forward clutch drum. E F G SAT887A H I J K L M AT-465 REAR INTERNAL GEAR AND FORWARD CLUTCH HUB [RE4R01A] REAR INTERNAL GEAR AND FORWARD CLUTCH HUB Components PFP:31450 ECS007Q8 SAT896AA Disassembly 1. ECS007Q9 Remove rear internal gear by pushing forward clutch hub forward. SAT897A 2. Remove thrust washer from rear internal gear. SAT898A AT-466 REAR INTERNAL GEAR AND FORWARD CLUTCH HUB [RE4R01A] 3. Remove snap ring from forward clutch hub. A B AT SAT899A D 4. Remove end bearing. E F G SAT900A 5. H Remove forward one-way clutch and end bearing as a unit from forward clutch hub. I J K SAT955A 6. Remove snap ring from forward clutch hub. L M SAT901A AT-467 REAR INTERNAL GEAR AND FORWARD CLUTCH HUB [RE4R01A] Inspection ECS007QA REAR INTERNAL GEAR AND FORWARD CLUTCH HUB ● ● ● Check gear for excessive wear, chips or cracks. Check frictional surfaces of forward one-way clutch and thrust washer for wear or damage. Check spline for wear or damage. SAT902A SNAP RING AND END BEARING ● Check for deformation or damage. SAT903A Assembly 1. 2. ECS007QB Install snap ring onto forward clutch hub. Install end bearing. SAT901A 3. ● 4. 5. Install forward one-way clutch onto clutch hub. Install forward one-way clutch with flange facing rearward. Install end bearing. Install snap ring onto forward clutch hub. SAT904A AT-468 REAR INTERNAL GEAR AND FORWARD CLUTCH HUB [RE4R01A] 6. ● ● Install thrust washer onto rear internal gear. Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer. Securely insert pawls of thrust washer into holes in rear internal gear. A B AT SAT906A D 7. Position forward clutch hub in rear internal gear. E F G SAT907A 8. H After installing, check to assure that forward clutch hub rotates clockwise. I J K SAT905A L M AT-469 BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY [RE4R01A] BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY Components PFP:31615 ECS007QC LCIA0277E Disassembly 1. 2. 3. ECS007QD Block one oil hole in O/D servo piston retainer and the center hole in O/D band servo piston. Apply compressed air to the other oil hole in piston retainer to remove O/D band servo piston from retainer. Remove D-ring from O/D band servo piston. SAT909A 4. Remove band servo piston assembly from servo piston retainer by pushing it forward. SAT910A AT-470 BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY [RE4R01A] 5. Place piston stem end on a wooden block. While pushing servo piston spring retainer down, remove E-ring. A B AT SAT911A D 6. Remove servo piston spring retainer, return spring C and piston stem from band servo piston. E F G SAT912A 7. H Remove E-ring from band servo piston. I J K SAT913A 8. Remove servo cushion spring retainer from band servo piston. 9. Remove D-rings from band servo piston. 10. Remove O-rings from servo piston retainer. L M SAT914A AT-471 BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY [RE4R01A] Inspection ECS007QE PISTONS, RETAINERS AND PISTON STEM ● Check frictional surfaces for abnormal wear or damage. SAT915A RETURN SPRINGS ● Check for deformation or damage. Measure free length and outer diameter. Inspection standard : Refer to AT-497, "Return Springs" . SAT916AA Assembly 1. ● ● ECS007QF Install O-rings onto servo piston retainer. Apply ATF to O-rings. Pay attention to position of each O-ring. SAT917A 2. Install servo cushion spring retainer onto band servo piston. SAT918A AT-472 BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY [RE4R01A] 3. Install E-ring onto servo cushion spring retainer. A B AT SAT919A D 4. ● Install D-rings onto band servo piston. Apply ATF to D-rings. E F G SAT920A 5. H Install servo piston spring retainer, return spring C and piston stem onto band servo piston. I J K SAT912A 6. Place piston stem end on a wooden block. While pushing servo piston spring retainer down, install E-ring. L M SAT921A AT-473 BAND SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY [RE4R01A] 7. Install band servo piston assembly onto servo piston retainer by pushing it inward. SAT922A 8. ● Install D-ring on O/D band servo piston. Apply ATF to D-ring. SAT923A 9. Install O/D band servo piston onto servo piston retainer by pushing it inward. SAT924A AT-474 PARKING PAWL COMPONENTS [RE4R01A] PARKING PAWL COMPONENTS Components PFP:31991 A ECS007QG B AT D E F G H I J SAT379I K Disassembly 1. 2. 3. ECS007QH Slide return spring to the front of adapter case flange. Remove return spring, pawl spacer and parking pawl from adapter case. Remove parking pawl shaft from adapter case. L M SAT226H AT-475 PARKING PAWL COMPONENTS [RE4R01A] 4. Remove parking actuator support from adapter case. SAT228H AT-476 PARKING PAWL COMPONENTS [RE4R01A] Assembly 1. 2. 3. ECS007QI A Install parking actuator support onto adapter case. Insert parking pawl shaft into adapter case. Install return spring, pawl spacer and parking pawl onto parking pawl shaft. B AT D SAT229H 4. Bend return spring upward and install it onto adapter case. E F G SAT226H H I J K L M AT-477 ASSEMBLY [RE4R01A] ASSEMBLY Assembly (1) 1. a. b. c. PFP:00000 ECS007QJ Install manual shaft components. Install oil seal onto manual shaft. ● Apply ATF to oil seal. ● Wrap threads of manual shaft with masking tape. Insert manual shaft and oil seal as a unit into transmission case. Remove masking tape. SAT931A d. Push oil seal evenly and install it onto transmission case. SAT932A e. Align groove in shaft with drive pin hole, then drive pin into position as shown. SAT933A f. g. Install detent spring and spacer. While pushing detent spring down, install manual plate onto manual shaft. SAT901E AT-478 ASSEMBLY [RE4R01A] h. Install lock nuts onto manual shaft. A B AT SAT936A D 2. a. Install accumulator piston. Install O-rings onto accumulator piston. ● Apply ATF to O-rings. E F G SAT523GA Accumulator piston O-rings Unit: mm (in) Accumulator A B C D Small diameter end 29 (1.14) 32 (1.26) 45 (1.77) 29 (1.14) Large diameter end 45 (1.77) 50 (1.97) 50 (1.97) 45 (1.77) b. I Install return spring for accumulator A onto transmission case. Free length of return spring H J : Refer to AT-497, "Return Springs" . K L SAT938A c. Install accumulator pistons A, B, C and D. ● Apply ATF to transmission case. SAT939AA AT-479 M ASSEMBLY [RE4R01A] 3. a. Install band servo piston. Install return springs onto servo piston. SAT941A b. c. Install band servo piston onto transmission case. ● Apply ATF to O-ring of band servo piston and transmission case. Install gasket for band servo onto transmission case. SAT942A d. Install band servo retainer onto transmission case. SAT940A 4. a. Install rear side clutch and gear components. Place transmission case in vertical position. SAT943A b. Slightly lift forward clutch drum assembly. Then slowly rotate it clockwise until its hub passes fully over clutch inner race inside transmission case. SAT944A AT-480 ASSEMBLY [RE4R01A] c. Check to be sure that rotation direction of forward clutch assembly is correct. A B AT SAT945A d. Install thrust washer onto front of overrun clutch hub. Apply petroleum jelly to the thrust washer. ● Insert pawls of thrust washer securely into holes in overrun clutch hub. D ● E F G SAT946A e. Install overrun clutch hub onto rear internal gear assembly. H I J SAT947A f. Install needle bearing onto rear of overrun clutch hub. ● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. K L M SAT948A g. Check that overrun clutch hub rotates as shown while holding forward clutch hub. SAT949A AT-481 ASSEMBLY [RE4R01A] h. Place transmission case into horizontal position. SAT527G i. Install rear internal gear, forward clutch hub and overrun clutch hub as a unit onto transmission case. SAT951A j. Install needle bearing onto rear internal gear. ● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. SAT952A k. Install bearing race onto rear of front internal gear. ● Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race. ● Securely engage pawls of bearing race with holes in front internal gear. SAT953A l. Install front internal gear on transmission case. SAT954A AT-482 ASSEMBLY [RE4R01A] 5. a. Install output shaft and parking gear. Insert output shaft from rear of transmission case while slightly lifting front internal gear. ● Do not force output shaft against front of transmission case. A B AT SAT216B b. Carefully push output shaft against front of transmission case. Install snap ring on front of output shaft. ● Check to be sure output shaft cannot be removed in rear direction. D E F G SAT957A c. H Install needle bearing on transmission case. ● Pay attention to its direction — black side goes to rear. ● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. I J SAT217B d. K Install parking gear on transmission case. L M SAT218B e. Install snap ring on rear of output shaft. Check to be sure output shaft cannot be removed in forward direction. ● SAT960A AT-483 ASSEMBLY [RE4R01A] 6. a. Install adapter case or rear extension. Install oil seal on adapter case or rear extension. ● Apply ATF to oil seal. SAT157G b. c. Install O-ring on revolution sensor. ● Apply ATF to O-ring. Install revolution sensor on adapter case or rear extension. SAT147G d. Install rear extension gasket on transmission case. SAT963A e. Install parking rod on transmission case. SAT964A AT-484 ASSEMBLY [RE4R01A] f. Install rear extension or adapter case on transmission case. A B AT D E F G SAT716C 7. a. Install front side clutch and gear components. Install rear sun gear on transmission case. ● Pay attention to its direction. H I J SAT974A b. c. Make sure needle bearing is on front of front planetary carrier. ● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. Make sure needle bearing is on rear of front planetary carrier. ● Apply petroleum jelly to bearing. ● Pay attention to its direction — Black side goes to front. L M SAT967A d. While rotating forward clutch drum clockwise, install front planetary carrier on forward clutch drum. SAT969A AT-485 K ASSEMBLY [RE4R01A] ● Check that portion A of front planetary carrier protrudes approximately 2 mm (0.08 in) beyond portion B of forward clutch assembly. SAT970A e. Make sure bearing races are on front and rear of clutch pack. ● Apply petroleum jelly to bearing races. ● Securely engage pawls of bearing races with holes in clutch pack. SAT971A f. Install clutch pack into transmission case. SAT973A Adjustment ECS007QK When any parts listed in the following table are replaced, total end play or reverse clutch end play must be adjusted. Part name Total end play Reverse clutch end play Transmission case ● ● Low one-way clutch inner race ● ● Overrun clutch hub ● ● Rear internal gear ● ● Rear planetary carrier ● ● Rear sun gear ● ● Front planetary carrier ● ● Front sun gear ● ● High clutch hub ● ● High clutch drum ● ● Oil pump cover ● ● Reverse clutch drum — ● AT-486 ASSEMBLY [RE4R01A] 1. Adjust total end play. Total end play “T1 ” A : 0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 0.0217 in) B AT SAT975A a. With needle bearing installed, place J34291-1 (bridge), J342912 (legs) and the J34291-5 (gauging cylinder) onto oil pump. The long ends of legs should be placed firmly on machined surface of oil pump assembly. The gauging cylinder should rest on top of the needle bearing. Lock gauging cylinder in place with set screw. D E F SAT976A b. G Install J34291-23 (gauging plunger) into gauging cylinder. H I J SAT977A c. K Install original bearing race inside reverse clutch drum. Place shim selecting gauge with its legs on machined surface of transmission case (no gasket). Allow gauging plunger to rest on bearing race. Lock gauging plunger in place with set screw. L M SAT978A d. Remove Tool and use feeler gauge to measure gap between gauging cylinder and gauging plunger. This measurement should give exact total end play. Total end play “T1 ” ● : 0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 0.0217 in) If end play is out of specification, decrease or increase thickness of oil pump cover bearing race as necessary. Available oil pump cover bearing race : Refer to AT-501, "Total End Play" . SAT979A AT-487 ASSEMBLY [RE4R01A] 2. Adjust reverse clutch drum end play. Reverse clutch drum end play “T2 ” : 0.55 - 0.90 mm (0.0217 0.0354 in) SAT980A a. Place J34291-1 (bridge), J34291-2 (legs) and J34291-5 (gauging cylinder) on machined surface of transmission case (no gasket). Allow gauging cylinder to rest on front thrust surface of reverse clutch drum. Lock cylinder in place with set screw. SAT981A b. Install J34291-23 (gauging plunger) into gauging cylinder. SAT982AA c. Install original thrust washer on oil pump. Place shim setting gauge legs onto machined surface of oil pump assembly. Allow gauging plunger to rest on thrust washer. Lock plunger in place with set screw. SAT983A d. Use feeler gauge to measure gap between gauging plunger and gauging cylinder. This measurement should give you exact reverse clutch drum end play. Reverse clutch drum end play “T2 ” ● : 0.55 - 0.90 mm (0.0217 0.0354 in) If end play is out of specification, decrease or increase thickness of oil pump thrust washer as necessary. SAT984A AT-488 ASSEMBLY [RE4R01A] Available oil pump thrust washer : Refer to AT-501, "Reverse Clutch Drum End Play" . Assembly (2) 1. a. A ECS007QL Install brake band and band strut. Install band strut on brake band. ● Apply petroleum jelly to band strut. B AT D E SAT985A b. F Place brake band on periphery of reverse clutch drum, and insert band strut into end of band servo piston stem. G H SAT986A c. Install anchor end pin on transmission case. Then, tighten anchor end pin just enough so that reverse clutch drum (clutch pack) will not tilt forward. I J K L SAT987A M 2. ● 3. Install input shaft on transmission case. Pay attention to its direction — O-ring groove side is front. Install gasket on transmission case. SAT988A AT-489 ASSEMBLY [RE4R01A] 4. a. b. Install oil pump assembly. Install needle bearing on oil pump assembly. ● Apply petroleum jelly to the needle bearing. Install selected thrust washer on oil pump assembly. ● Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer. SAT989A c. Carefully install seal rings into grooves and press them into the petroleum jelly so that they are a tight fit. SAT990A d. Install O-ring on oil pump assembly. ● Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring. SAT991A e. Apply petroleum jelly to mating surface of transmission case and oil pump assembly. SAT992A f. Install oil pump assembly. Install two converter housing securing bolts in bolt holes in oil pump assembly as guides. ● SAT993A AT-490 ASSEMBLY [RE4R01A] ● Insert oil pump assembly to the specified position in transmission, as shown at left. A B AT SAT994A 5. ● Install O-ring on input shaft. Apply ATF to O-rings. D E F G SAT114B H 6. a. Install converter housing. Apply Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent to outer periphery of bolt holes in converter housing. Refer to GI-42, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . ● Do not apply too much sealant. I J K SAT397C b. c. 7. Apply Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent to seating surfaces of bolts that secure front of converter housing. Refer to GI-42, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . Install converter housing on transmission case. Install turbine revolution sensor (VG33ER only). L M SAT158G AT-491 ASSEMBLY [RE4R01A] 8. a. Adjust brake band. Tighten anchor end bolt to specified torque. Anchor end bolt b. : : 4 - 6 N·m (0.4 - 0.6 kg-m, 35 - 52 in-lb) Back off anchor end bolt two and a half turns. SAT001B c. While holding anchor end pin, tighten lock nut. SAT002B 9. a. b. Install terminal cord assembly. Install O-ring on terminal cord assembly. ● Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring. Compress terminal cord assembly stopper and install terminal cord assembly on transmission case. SAT115B 10. Install control valve assembly. a. Install accumulator piston return springs B, C and D. Free length of return springs : Refer to AT-497, "Return Springs" . SAT004BA b. Install manual valve on control valve. ● Apply ATF to manual valve. SAT005B AT-492 ASSEMBLY [RE4R01A] c. d. Place control valve assembly on transmission case. Connect solenoid connector for upper body. Install connector clip. A B AT SAT006B e. f. Install control valve assembly on transmission case. Install connector tube brackets and tighten bolts A and B. ● Check that terminal assembly does not catch. Bolt symbol E mm (in) A 33 (1.30) B 45 (1.77) D F G H I J SAT353B g. h. Install O-ring on oil strainer. ● Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring. Install oil strainer on control valve. K L M SAT221B i. Securely fasten terminal harness with clips. SAT009B AT-493 ASSEMBLY [RE4R01A] j. Install torque converter clutch solenoid valve and fluid temperature sensor connectors. SAT010B 11. Install oil pan. a. Attach a magnet to oil pan. SAT011B b. c. d. Install new oil pan gasket on transmission case. Install oil pan and bracket on transmission case. ● Always replace oil pan bolts as they are self-sealing bolts. ● Before installing bolts, remove traces of sealant and oil from mating surface and thread holes. ● Tighten four bolts in a crisscross pattern to prevent dislocation of gasket. Tighten drain plug. SAT365I 12. Install park/neutral position (PNP) switch. a. Check that manual shaft is in 1 position. b. Temporarily install park/neutral position (PNP) switch on manual shaft. c. Move manual shaft to N. SAT299I AT-494 ASSEMBLY [RE4R01A] d. Tighten bolts while inserting 4.0 mm (0.157 in) dia. pin vertically into locating holes in park/neutral position (PNP) switch and manual shaft. A B AT SAT014B D 13. Install torque converter. a. Pour ATF into torque converter. ● Approximately 2 liters (2-1/8 US qt, 1-3/4 Imp qt) of fluid are required for a new torque converter. ● When reusing old torque converter, add the same amount of fluid as was drained. E F G SAT428DA b. Install torque converter while aligning notches and oil pump. H I J SAT016B c. Measure distance A to check that torque converter is in proper position. Distance “A” VG33E only VG33ER only L : 26.0 mm (1.024 in) or more : 25.0 mm (0.984 in) or more M SAT017B AT-495 K SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE4R01A] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specifications PFP:00030 ECS007QM VG33E engine Applied model VG33ER engine 2WD 4WD Automatic transmission model 2WD 4WD 4FX19 4FX20 RE4R01A Transmission model code number 4FX17 4FX18 Stall torque ratio 2.0 : 1 Transmission gear ratio 1st 2.785 2nd 1.545 Top 1.000 O/D 0.694 Reverse 2.272 Recommended fluid Nissan Matic “D” (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Genuine Nissan Automatic Transmission Fluid (Canada)*1 Fluid capacity 8.3 (8-3/4 US qt, 7-1/4 Imp qt) 8.5 (9 US qt, 7-1/ 2 Imp qt) 8.3 (8-3/4 US qt, 7-1/4 Imp qt) 8.5 (9 US qt, 7-1/ 2 Imp qt) *1: Refer to MA-12, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . Shift Schedule ECS007QN VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS THROTTLE POSITION Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) Throttle position D1 → D2 D2 → D3 D3 → D4 D4 → D3 D3 → D2 D2 → D1 12 → 1 1 VG33E only 47 - 51 (29 - 32) 92 - 100 (57 - 62) 146 - 156 (91 - 97) 141 - 151 (88 - 94) 87 - 95 (54 - 59) 42 - 46 (26 - 29) 43 - 47 (27 - 29) VG33ER only 49 - 53 (30 - 33) 94 - 102 (58 - 63) 151 - 161 (94 - 100) 147 - 157 (91 - 98) 87 - 95 (54 - 59) 43 - 47 (27 - 29) 54 - 58 (34 - 36) VG33E only 34 - 38 (21 - 24) 68 - 74 (42 - 46) 132 - 140 (82 - 87) 59 - 67 (37 - 42) 31 - 37 (19 - 23) 10 - 14 (6 - 9) 43 - 47 (27 - 29) VG33ER only 41 - 45 (25 - 28) 68 - 74 (42 - 46) 121 - 129 (75 - 80) 76 - 84 (47 - 52) 41 - 47 (25 - 29) 11 - 15 (7 - 9) 54 - 58 (34 - 36) Full throttle Half throttle VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING AND RELEASING LOCK-UP Throttle position VG33E only Full throttle VG33ER only VG33E only Half throttle VG33ER only Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) Overdrive control switch [Shift position] Lock-up “ON” Lock-up “OFF” ON [D4 ] 147 - 155 (91 - 96) 142 - 150 (88 - 93) OFF [D3 ] 74 - 82 (46 - 51) 71 - 79 (44 - 49) ON [D4 ] 152 - 160 (94 - 99) 148 -156 (92 - 97) OFF [D3 ] 86 - 94 (53 - 58) 83 - 91 (52 - 57) ON [D4 ] 139 - 147 (86 - 91) 84 - 92 (52 - 57) OFF [D3 ] 74 - 82 (46 - 51) 71 - 79 (44 - 49) ON [D4 ] 134 - 142 (83 - 88) 103 - 111 (64 - 69) OFF [D3 ] 86 - 94 (53 - 58) 83 - 91 (52 - 57) Stall Revolution ECS007QO Engine Stall revolution VG33E only 2,450 - 2,650 VG33ER only 2,420 - 2,620 AT-496 rpm SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE4R01A] Line Pressure ECS007QP A Line pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) Engine speed rpm D, 2 and 1 positions R position Idle 422 - 461 (4.3 - 4.7, 61 - 67) 667 - 706 (6.8 - 7.2, 97 - 102) Stall 1,020 - 1,098 (10.4 - 11.2, 148 - 159) 1,422 - 1,500 (14.5 - 15.3, 206 - 218) Return Springs B ECS007QQ AT Unit: mm (in) Item Parts Upper body Control valve Lower body Part No.* Free length Outer diameter 1 Torque converter relief valve spring 31742-41X23 38.0 (1.496) 9.0 (0.354) 2 Pressure regulator valve spring 31742-41X24 44.02 (1.7331) 14.0 (0.551) 3 Pressure modifier valve spring 31742-41X19 31.95 (1.2579) 6.8 (0.268) — Accumulator control valve spring — — — 4 Shuttle shift valve D spring 31762-41X01 25.0 (0.984) 7.0 (0.276) 5 4-2 sequence valve spring 31756-41X00 29.1 (1.146) 6.95 (0.2736) 6 Shift valve B spring 31762-41X01 25.0 (0.984) 7.0 (0.276) 7 4-2 relay valve spring 31756-41X00 29.1 (1.146) 6.95 (0.2736) 8 Shift valve A spring 31762-41X01 25.0 (0.984) 7.0 (0.276) 9 Overrun clutch control valve spring 31762-41X03 23.6 (0.929) 7.0 (0.276) 31762-41X14 (VG33ER only) 31742-41X20 (VG33E only) 38.9 (1.531) (VG33ER only) 32.5 (1.280) (VG33E only) 7.0 (0.276) D E F G H I 10 Overrun clutch reducing valve spring 11 Shuttle shift valve S spring 31762-41X04 51.0 (2.008) 5.65 (0.2224) 12 Pilot valve spring 31742-41X13 25.7 (1.012) 9.0 (0.354) 13 Lock-up control valve spring 31742-41X22 18.5 (0.728) 13.0 (0.512) 1 Modifier accumulator piston spring 31742-27X70 31.4 (1.236) 9.8 (0.386) K 31756-41X05 (VG33E only) 31756-60X00 (VG33ER only) 25.4 (1.000) (VG33E only) 29.5 (1.161) (VG33ER only) 6.75 (0.2657) (VG33E only) 7.00 (0.2756) (VG33ER only) L 2 1st reducing valve spring 3 3-2 timing valve spring 31742-41X06 23.0 (0.906) 6.7 (0.264) 4 Servo charger valve spring 31742-41X06 23.0 (0.906) 6.7 (0.264) 31521-41X02 (Assembly) (VG33E only) 31505-41X07 (Assembly) (VG33ER only) 19.7 (0.7756) (VG33E only) — (VG33ER only) 11.6 (0.457) (VG33E only) — (VG33ER only) Reverse clutch 16 pcs (VG33E only) 1 pc (VG33ER only) High clutch 10 pcs 31521-41X03 (Assembly) 24.2 (0.9528) 11.6 (0.457) Forward clutch (Overrun clutch) 20 pcs 31521-41X04 (Assembly) 35.77 (1.4083) 9.7 (0.382) Low & reverse brake 18 pcs 31655-41X00 (Assembly) 22.3 (0.878) 11.2 (0.441) AT-497 J M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE4R01A] Item Parts Part No.* Free length Outer diameter Spring A 31605-41X05 (VG33E only) 31605-41X14 (VG33ER only) 45.6 (1.795) (VG33E only) 47.6 (1.874) (VG33ER only) 34.3 (1.350) (VG33E only) 26.5 (1.043) (VG33ER only) Spring B 31605-41X00 (VG33E only) 53.8 (2.118) (VG33E only) 40.3 (1.587) (VG33E only) Spring C 31605-41X01 29.7 (1.169) 27.6 (1.087) Accumulator A 31605-41X02 43.0 (1.693) 18.0 (0.709) Accumulator B 31605-41X10 (VG33E only) 31605-4AX03 (VG33ER only) 66.0 (2.598) 20.0 (0.787) Accumulator C 31605-41X09 45.0 (1.772) 29.3 (1.154) Accumulator D 31605-41X06 58.4 (2.299) 17.3 (0.681) Band servo Accumulator *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Accumulator O-ring ECS007QR Diameter mm (in) Accumulator A B C D Small diameter end 29 (1.14) 32 (1.26) 45 (1.77) 29 (1.14) Large diameter end 45 (1.77) 50 (1.97) 50 (1.97) 45 (1.77) Clutches and Brakes ECS007QS REVERSE CLUTCH Code number 4FX17 4FX18 4FX19 Number of drive plates 2 Number of driven plates 2 Thickness of drive plate mm (in) Clearance mm (in) Standard 1.90 - 2.05 (0.0748 - 0.0807) Wear limit 1.80 (0.0709) Standard 0.5 - 0.8 (0.020 - 0.031) Allowable limit Thickness of retaining plate 4FX20 1.2 (0.047) Thickness mm (in) Part No.* Thickness mm (in) Part No.* 4.8 (0.189) 5.0 (0.197) 5.2 (0.205) 5.4 (0.213) 5.6 (0.220) 31537-42X02 31537-42X03 31537-42X04 31537-42X05 31537-42X06 4.6 (0.181) 4.8 (0.189) 5.0 (0.197) 5.2 (0.205) 5.4 (0.213) 31537-42X20 31537-42X21 31537-42X22 31537-42X23 31537-42X24 4FX19 4FX20 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. HIGH CLUTCH Code number 4FX17 4FX18 Number of drive plates Number of driven plates Thickness of drive plate mm (in) Clearance mm (in) 5 5 6 Standard 1.52 - 1.67 (0.0598 - 0.0657) Wear limit 1.40 (0.0551) Standard 1.8 - 2.2 (0.071 - 0.087) Allowable limit 3.2 (0.126) AT-498 2.2 (0.087) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE4R01A] Thickness of retaining plate Thickness mm (in) Part No.* Thickness mm (in) Part No.* 3.4 (0.134) 3.6 (0.142) 3.8 (0.150) 4.0 (0.157) 4.2 (0.165) 4.4 (0.173) 4.6 (0.181) 4.8 (0.189) 31537-41X71 31537-41X61 31537-41X62 31537-41X63 31537-41X64 31537-41X65 31537-41X66 31537-41X67 4.0 (0.157) 4.2 (0.165) 4.4 (0.173) 4.6 (0.181) 4.8 (0.189) 5.0 (0.197) 31537-41X63 31537-41X64 31537-41X65 31537-41X66 31537-41X67 31537-41X68 A B AT *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. FORWARD CLUTCH Code number D 4FX17 4FX18 4FX19 4FX20 Number of drive plates 7 7 7 8 Number of driven plates 7 7 7 8 Thickness of drive plate mm (in) Clearance mm (in) Standard 1.52 - 1.67 (0.0598 - 0.0657) Wear limit 1.40 (0.0551) Standard 0.35 - 0.75 (0.0138 - 0.0295) Allowable limit Thickness of retaining plate E 2.15 (0.0846) 2.15 (0.0846) F 2.15 (0.0846) Thickness mm (in) Part No.* Thickness mm (in) Part No.* Thickness mm (in) Part No.* 4.6 (0.181) 4.8 (0.189) 5.0 (0.197) 5.2 (0.205) 5.4 (0.213) 5.6 (0.220) 5.8 (0.228) 3153742X13 3153742X14 3153742X15 315374AX00 315374AX01 315374AX02 315374AX03 4.6 (0.181) 4.8 (0.189) 5.0 (0.197) 5.2 (0.205) 5.4 (0.213) 5.6 (0.220) 5.8 (0.228) 3153742X13 3153742X14 3153742X15 315374AX00 315374AX01 315374AX02 315374AX03 4.6 (0.181) 4.8 (0.189) 5.0 (0.197) 5.2 (0.205) 5.4 (0.213) 5.6 (0.220) 5.8 (0.228) 3153742X13 3153742X14 3153742X15 315374AX00 315374AX01 315374AX02 315374AX03 2.35 (0.0925) Thickness mm (in) Part No.* 4.0 (0.157) 4.2 (0.165) 4.4 (0.173) 4.6 (0.181) 4.8 (0.189) 5.0 (0.197) 5.2 (0.205) 5.4 (0.213) 3153742X10 3153742X11 3153742X12 3153742X13 3153742X14 3153742X15 315374AX00 315374AX01 G H I J K L *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. M AT-499 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE4R01A] OVERRUN CLUTCH Code number 4FX17 4FX18 4FX19 Number of drive plates 3 Number of driven plates 5 Thickness of drive plate mm (in) Clearance mm (in) Standard 1.90 - 2.05 (0.0748 - 0.0807) Wear limit 1.80 (0.0709) Standard 1.0 - 1.4 (0.039 - 0.055) Allowable limit 4FX20 2.4 (0.094) Thickness mm (in) Part No.* 4.2 (0.165) 4.4 (0.173) 4.6 (0.181) 4.8 (0.189) 5.0 (0.197) 31537-41X80 31537-41X81 31537-41X82 31537-41X83 31537-41X84 Thickness of retaining plate *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. LOW & REVERSE BRAKE Code number 4FX17 4FX18 4FX19 4FX20 Number of drive plates 7 8 Number of driven plates 7 8 Thickness of drive plate mm (in) Clearance mm (in) Standard 1.52 - 1.67 (0.0598 - 0.0657) Wear limit 1.40 (0.0551) Standard 0.8 - 1.1 (0.031 - 0.043) Allowable limit Thickness of retaining plate 2.5 (0.098) 2.7 (0.106) Thickness mm (in) Part No.* Thickness mm (in) Part No.* 6.6 (0.260) 6.8 (0.268) 7.0 (0.276) 7.2 (0.283) 7.4 (0.291) 7.6 (0.299) 7.8 (0.307) 8.0 (0.315) 8.2 (0.323) 8.4 (0.331) 8.6 (0.339) 8.8 (0.346) 9.0 (0.354) 31667-41X17 31667-41X11 31667-41X12 31667-41X13 31667-41X14 31667-41X07 31667-41X08 31667-41X00 31667-41X01 31667-41X02 31667-41X03 31667-41X04 31667-41X05 7.6 (0.299) 7.8 (0.307) 8.0 (0.315) 8.2 (0.323) 8.4 (0.331) 8.6 (0.339) 8.8 (0.346) 9.0 (0.354) 9.2 (0.362) 9.4 (0.370) 9.6 (0.378) 31667-41X07 31667-41X08 31667-41X00 31667-41X01 31667-41X02 31667-41X03 31667-41X04 31667-41X05 31667-41X06 31667-41X09 31667-41X10 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. BRAKE BAND Anchor end bolt tightening torque 4 - 6 N·m (0.4 - 0.6 kg-m, 35 - 52 in-lb) Number of returning revolution for anchor end bolt 2.5 Oil Pump and Low One-way Clutch ECS007QT Unit: mm (in) Oil pump clearance Cam ring — oil pump housing Standard 0.01 - 0.024 (0.0004 - 0.0009) Rotor, vanes and control piston — oil pump housing Standard 0.03 - 0.044 (0.0012 - 0.0017) Standard 0.10 - 0.25 (0.0039 - 0.0098) Seal ring clearance Allowable limit AT-500 0.25 (0.0098) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE4R01A] Total End Play ECS007QU A Total end play “T1 ” 0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in) Thickness of oil pump cover bearing race Thickness mm (in) Part No.* 0.8 (0.031) 1.0 (0.039) 1.2 (0.047) 1.4 (0.055) 1.6 (0.063) 1.8 (0.071) 2.0 (0.079) 31435-41X01 31435-41X02 31435-41X03 31435-41X04 31435-41X05 31435-41X06 31435-41X07 B AT *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. D Reverse Clutch Drum End Play ECS007QV Reverse clutch drum end play “T2 ” E 0.55 - 0.90 mm (0.0217 - 0.0354 in) Thickness of oil pump thrust washer Thickness mm (in) Part No.* 0.9 (0.035) 1.1 (0.043) 1.3 (0.051) 1.5 (0.059) 1.7 (0.067) 1.9 (0.075) 31528-21X01 31528-21X02 31528-21X03 31528-21X04 31528-21X05 31528-21X06 F G *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Removal and Installation ECS007QW Number of returning revolutions for lock nut Manual control linkage 2 4.4 - 5.9 N·m (0.45 - 0.60 kg-m, 39.1 - 52.1 in-lb) Lock nut tightening torque 26.0 mm (1.024 in) or more (VG33E only) 25.0 mm (0.984 in) or more (VG33ER only) Distance between end of clutch housing and torque converter Shift Solenoid Valves I J ECS007QX K Gear position 1 2 3 4 Shift solenoid valve A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) Solenoid Valves L ECS007QY Solenoid valves Resistance (Approx.) Ω Terminal No. Shift solenoid valve A 20 - 40 3 Shift solenoid valve B 20 - 40 2 Overrun clutch solenoid valve 20 - 40 4 Line pressure solenoid valve 2.5 - 5 6 Torque converter clutch solenoid valve 10 - 20 7 A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor M ECS007QZ Remarks: Specification data are reference values. Monitor item Condition A/T fluid temperature sensor H Specification (Approx.) Cold [20°C (68°F)] ↓ Hot [80°C (176°F)] 1.5V ↓ 0.5V AT-501 2.5 kΩ ↓ 0.3 kΩ SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [RE4R01A] Turbine Revolution Sensor ECS007R0 Terminal No. Resistance (Approx.) 1 2 2.4 - 2.8 KΩ 1 3 No continuity 2 3 No continuity Revolution Sensor ECS007R1 Terminal No. Resistance (Approx.) 1 2 500 - 650Ω 2 3 No continuity 1 3 No continuity Dropping Resistor ECS007R2 Resistance Approx. 12Ω AT-502
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : Yes Create Date : 2003:09:25 22:05:05 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 4.05 for Windows Title : AT.fm Creator : FrameMaker+SGML 5.5.6p145 Modify Date : 2003:10:02 16:32:04-04:00 Page Count : 502 Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Layout : OneColumnEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools